15000 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15060 Hangers and Supports 15070 Mechanical Sound, Vibration, and Seismic Control 15075 Mechanical Identification 15080 Mechanical Insulation 15110 Valves 15120 Piping Specialties 15125 Piping Expansion Compensation 15130 Pumps 15140 Domestic Water Piping 15150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 15160 Storm Drainage Piping 15180 Heating and Cooling Piping 15184 Refrigerant Piping 15185 Chemical Water Treatment Equipment 15195 Gas Piping 15410 Plumbing Fixtures 15480 Domestic Water Heaters 15540 Fuel-Fired Heaters 15739 Split System Air Conditioning Units 15740 Heat Pumps 15810 Ducts 15820 Duct Accessories 15830 Fans 15850 Air Outlets and Inlets 15910 Energy Management Control System 15940 Sequence of Operation 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

10/14/2010-B/A #10100101 TABLE OF CONTENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

B/A #09100194 02529 - 12 Geothermal Energy Exchange Wells

SECTION 15000 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The general conditions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 of the Specification.

B. Construction Drawings, all Addenda, Bulletins and Change Orders.

1.2 RESPONSIBILITY

A. Submission of a Bid is considered evidence that the Contractor has visited the site, examined the Drawings and Specifications of all Trades and has fully informed himself as to all Project conditions and is proficient, experienced and knowledgeable of all regulations and conditions which may affect any portion of the Work included in his Bid.

B. OFCI - Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed 1. Contractor shall verify owner furnished equipment prior to fabrication and provide necessary valves, ductwork, piping, etc. to install equipment per the manufacturer’s printed instructions. 2. Changes required to contract documents in order to install the equipment per the manufacturer’s instructions shall be made at no additional cost to the owner.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. “Pipe”, “pipe fittings”, and “piping” shall include “tube”, “tube fittings”, and “tubing”.

B. “Finished Spaces” are spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.

C. “Exposed Interior Installations” refers to interior mechanical work that is exposed to view in the final construction.

D. “Exposed Exterior Installations” refers to exterior mechanical work that is exposed to exterior ambient conditions.

E. “Concealed Interior Installations” refers to interior mechanical work that is concealed from physical contact by building occupants when the project is complete.

F. “Concealed Exterior Installations” refers to exterior mechanical work that is protected from weather conditions and contact by building occupants, but is exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures.

B/A #09100194 15000 - 1

G. “Code”, “Regulation”, “Ordinance”, “Law”, and “Rule” are used interchangeably in this Specification to mean requirements of all authorities (local, State, Federal, or other), which may have jurisdiction over the construction of the work. Where one is used, all are implied.

1.4 SCOPE OF WORK

A. These specifications and the accompanying drawings describe the furnishing and installation of all material, equipment, supplies, labor and supervision required for the complete performance of all operations relating to the Mechanical Trades consisting of Plumbing, Fire Protection, Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning, and Temperature Control work.

B. Work shall be done complete in all respects, including the following items briefly mentioned and all other items which are indicated, specified or necessary for complete and satisfactory Mechanical systems: 1. Specific types of work to be done on this project include, but are not limited to the following: a. Insulation. b. Plumbing Piping. c. Plumbing Fixtures. d. Hydronic Piping. e. Air Handling Equipment. f. Sheet metal. g. Temperature Controls. h. Testing and Balancing. System verification.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. All work shall be performed by Contractors skilled in the work required with a minimum of three (3) years experience.

B. All materials shall be supplied by manufacturers having a minimum of three (3) years experience in the production of the item provided.

1.6 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

A. In addition to standards which may be enforced by authorities having jurisdiction, the following standards apply as referenced in other portions of the Specifications: 1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 2. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 5. Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. (AMCA). 6. Air diffusion council (ADC). 7. American Society of Heating, Ventilating, Refrigerating, Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

B/A #09100194 15000 - 2

8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 9. American Boiler Manufacturers Association (ABMA). 10. Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers (IBR). 11. American Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 12. Standards of the Hydronic Institute. 13. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. 14. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 15. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 16. American Gas Association (AGA). 17. Occupational Safety and Health Acts (OSHA). 18. Sheet metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA). 19. National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES).

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the installation of the work with all other Trades before installation to eliminate conflicts over available space.

B. Arrange with other Trades for the provision of all chases, slots, and openings necessary for the proper installation of the Mechanical Work.

C. Coordinate the installation of all required supporting devices.

D. Set sleeves in poured concrete construction and other structural components as they are constructed.

E. Sequence the installation of the Work in accordance with the requirements of the project schedule. Particular attention is drawn to large equipment which may require installation in the building before certain General Trades items are installed.

F. Where electrical connections are required, confirm with project Electrical Contractor before item is ordered.

G. Where connections to Site Services are required, confirm location and elevation before proceeding with the layout of the building systems.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

characteristics, and installation instructions. Where applicable, submittal data must also include metal gauges, frame types, finish fan diameters, bearing types, lubrication system, motor types, insulation, velocities, pressure drops, pump curves, coil areas, filter types and areas, electrical characteristics, wiring and piping diagrams, and accessories required. 4. Submittals must be thoroughly checked by the Contractor and must contain his stamp of approval before being sent to the Architect for review. 5. Submittals not conforming to the above requirements will be returned without review and must be revised and resubmitted.

1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. All work installed under the requirements of this project shall be performed in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, and references.

B. Applicable Codes: All references to codes, specifications, and standards referred to in the specifications sections and on the drawings shall mean and are intended to be latest edition, amendment, or revision of such referenced standards in effect at the date of these contract documents.

C. Obtain and pay for all required permits and inspections. Obtain certificates of such inspections, and copies of same to the Architect.

1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Visit the project site before bidding to determine the actual existing conditions imposed on the construction of the work. The Contractor retains sole responsibility for interpreting the impact of existing conditions on his work.

1.11 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Refer to Division 1.

B. Store all materials and equipment to protect against damage of all types.

C. Provide appropriate barriers to maintain safe construction areas.

1.12 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Provide in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 and other portions of this Division.

B. Maintain a “clean” set of project Drawings for the sole purpose of recording deviations from the design. This set of Drawings shall be maintained at project site, with all modifications marked-up as work progresses.

C. This set of marked-up Drawings shall show all work as actually installed with accurate vertical and horizontal measurements of concealed and buried work.

B/A #09100194 15000 - 4

D. This set of Drawings shall be certified as accurate by the Contractor and turned over to the Owner for future reference.

PART 2 -MATERIALS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. In the Drawings and Specifications materials and equipment are generally noted as “based on”. The layout and arrangement of systems and equipment for this project are based on the size and arrangement of these manufacturers.

B. For major items of equipment, two or three other manufacturers may be listed who manufacture equipment deemed to be “equal” by the Engineer. These items may be used at the Contractors option. It remains the Contractors responsibility to determine which item manufactured by the “alternate” company is equivalent to the item listed as “based on”.

C. In all cases where items other than those upon which the design is based are used, it is the Contractors responsibility to determine the impact of providing “alternate” equipment. Where “alternate” equipment is provided, the Contractor shall pay all charges, including design fees and charges by other Contractors, that may be necessary to accommodate the installation of the “alternate” equipment or materials.

2.2 ACCESS PANELS

A. Provide access panels for all equipment which must be located in “inaccessible” locations (above fixed ceilings, behind walls, etc.). Access panels shall conform to the requirements of the General Trades Specifications. Turn panels over to the General Trades Contractor for installation.

2.3 MOTORS AND STARTERS

A. Motors for the Mechanical equipment shall be furnished by this Contractor unless specifically noted to the contrary elsewhere.

B. The work shall be complete in every respect. Where starters, disconnects, etc., are not specifically indicated on the Electrical Trades Drawings and Specifications, they are to be provided by this Contractor.

C. All electrical equipment and installation provided by this Contractor shall conform to the requirements of Division 16 of this specification.

D. Each motor shall have a conduit terminal box.

E. All motors shall have a power factor of 85%, or higher.

PART 3-EXECUTION B/A #09100194 15000 - 5

3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Perform in accordance with the requirements of Division 1.

B. Perform, or cause to be performed, all cutting and patching necessary for the installation of the work unless specifically noted to the contrary elsewhere.

C. No structural members shall be cut without written authorization from the Architect. All such cutting, when authorized, shall be done in strict accordance with the instructions of the Architect.

D. In general, roof and wall openings required for mechanical equipment and systems shall be provided by this Contractor. The size and location of these openings shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.

3.2 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Maintain work areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition at all times.

B. All openings in piping and duct work systems shall be protected during construction to prevent the entrance of foreign materials.

C. Before installing air inlets and outlets, remove all dirt, debris and rubbish from inside, on and about air chambers, ducts, fans, register faces, etc. After installation leave them ready for operation with exposed surfaces clean and ready for furnishing.

3.3 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

A. Remove temporary equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion.

B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.

3.4 STARTING OF SYSTEMS

A. All systems fabricated on site shall be tested by the Contractor; testing shall include the provision of all necessary equipment, labor, and fluids.

B. Notify the Architect and other inspection authorities at least 48 hours before the scheduled test or sampling time.

C. Control devices, instrumentation, and similar items not designed to withstand the test pressures shall be removed or otherwise protected prior to testing the system.

D. Water Distribution System: Perform a preliminary balance check during start-up and prior to final balancing.

B/A #09100194 15000 - 6

E. Temperature Balance: Following completion of controls balancing, room temperatures are to be checked for adequacy and uniformity. Final adjustments will then be made to the systems to compensate for varied load conditions based on temperature balance.

F. Fixtures and Equipment: All fixtures and equipment shall be cleaned. Cleaning shall be done with soap and water, rinsed, and dried. Clean floor drains.

G. All plates, polished, and bronzed surfaces shall be cleaned and polished.

H. Valves, faucets, automatic valves, etc., shall be properly adjusted and shall be quiet operating.

3.5 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Transport and handle all materials and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions.

3.6 RIGGING AND HOISTING

A. Provide all rigging and hoisting necessary for the installation of the materials and equipment provided under this Division of work.

3.7 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.

B. Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view. Vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces where materials have been deposited due to the work of this Contractor.

C. Clean debris from site.

D. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.

3.8 FINAL ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

3.9 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The electrical characteristics available for each item of mechanical equipment shall be confirmed with the project electrical contractor before the mechanical contractor orders the equipment.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15000 - 7

B/A #09100194 15000 - 8

SECTION 15060-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Hanger rods. 3. Inserts. 4. Flashing. 5. Equipment curbs. 6. Sleeves. 7. Mechanical sleeve seals. 8. Formed steel channel. 9. Firestopping relating to mechanical work. 10. Firestopping accessories. 11. Equipment bases and supports.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Product requirements for sealant materials for placement by this section. 2. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this section. 3. Section 15070 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration, and Seismic Control: Product and execution requirements for vibration isolators. 4. Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. 5. Section 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. 6. Section 15160 - Storm Drainage Piping: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. 7. Section 15180 - Heating and Cooling Piping: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. 8. Section 15195 - Gas Piping: Execution requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

B/A #09100194 15060-1

3. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops. 4. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan code.

B. Perform Work in accordance with applicable authority for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B/A #09100194 15060-2

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson Inc. 2. Creative Systems Inc. 3. Flex-Weld, Inc. 4. Glope Pipe Hanger Products Inc. 5. Michigan Hanger Co. 6. Superior Valve Co. 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Plumbing Piping - DWV: 1. Conform to ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, or MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

B/A #09100194 15060-3

8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 9. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon-steel adjustable, ring.

C. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1. Conform to ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, or MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. 7. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 8. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 9. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 10. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 11. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, Carbon-steel ring.

D. Hydronic Piping: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, or MSS SP89. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron or Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hooks. 7. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 8. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 9. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 10. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 11. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon steel ring.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded. B/A #09100194 15060-4

2.3 INSERTS

A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.4 EQUIPMENT CURBS

A. Fabrication: Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, minimum 14” high, mitered 3 inch cant, variable step to match roof insulation, 1-1/2 inch thick insulation, factory installed wood nailer.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel, minimum 1” extension past floor.

C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc. 2. NMP Corporation. 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

2.7 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL

A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp. 2. B-Line Systems. 3. Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division. 4. Unistrut Corp. 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1/2 inches on center.

B/A #09100194 15060-5

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.

B. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.

C. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.

D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.

3.3 INSTALLATION - INSERTS

A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.

B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger.

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.

B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

C. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.

F. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. B/A #09100194 15060-6

G. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.

H. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers.

I. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

J. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

K. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

L. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Refer to Section 09900. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

M. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Refer to Section 15080.

3.5 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment.

B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.

C. Construct supports of formed steel channel. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.

D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. Refer to Section 15070.

3.6 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES

A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.

B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.

D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.

E. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with stuffing firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

F. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.

B/A #09100194 15060-7

3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

3.8 SCHEDULES PIPE HANGER SPACING

HANGER ROD PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING DIAMETER Inches Feet Inches 1/2 7 3/8 3/4 7 3/8 1 7 3/8 1-1/4 7 3/8 1-1/2 9 3/8 2 10 3/8 2-1/2 11 1/2 3 12 1/2 4 14 5/8 5 16 5/8 6 17 3/4 8 19 3/4 PVC (All Sizes)4 3/8 C.I. Bell and Spigot (or No-Hub) 5 5/8 And at Joints

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15060-8

SECTION 15070 -MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Vibration isolators. 2. Inertia Bases.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports. 2. Section 15120 - Piping Specialties: Product requirements for anchors and piping expansion compensation. 3. Section 15820 - Duct Accessories: Product requirements for both solid and flexible duct connectors for duct silencers specified for placement by this section. 4. Section 15950 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Requirements for sound and vibration measurements performed independent of this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.

B. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI S1.4 - Sound Level Meters. 2. ANSI S1.8 - Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels. 3. ANSI S1.13 - Methods for the Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels in Air. 4. ANSI S12.36 - Survey Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of Noise Sources.

C. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 575 - Method of Measuring Machinery Sound within Equipment Space.

D. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and: 1. ASHRAE 68 - Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement Procedure for Fans. 2. ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications.

E. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 2. ASTM E477 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and B/A #09100194 15070-1

Airflow Performance of Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers. 3. ASTM E596 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Noise Reduction of Sound-Isolating Enclosures.

F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.5 hp, plus connected piping and ductwork.

B. Provide minimum static deflection of isolators for equipment as follows: 1. Basement, Under 20 hp a. Under 400 rpm: b. 400 - 600 rpm: 1 inch c. 600 - 800 rpm: 0.5 inch d. 800 - 900 rpm: 0.2 inch e. 1100 - 1500 rpm: 0.14 inch f. Over 1500 rpm: 0.1 inch 2. Basement, Over 20 hp a. Under 400 rpm: b. 400 - 600 rpm: 2 inch c. 600 - 800 rpm: 1 inch d. 800 - 900 rpm: 0.5 inch e. 1100 - 1500 rpm: 0.2 inch f. Over 1500 rpm: 0.15 inch 3. Upper Floors, Normal a. Under 400 rpm: b. 400 - 600 rpm: 3.5 inch c. 600 - 800 rpm: 2 inch d. 800 - 900 rpm: 1 inch e. 1100 - 1500 rpm: 0.5 inch f. Over 1500 rpm: 0.2 inch 4. Upper Floors, Critical a. Under 400 rpm: b. 400 - 600 rpm: c. 600 - 800 rpm: 3.5 inch d. 800 - 900 rpm: 2 inch e. 1100 - 1500 rpm: 1 inch f. Over 1500 rpm: 0.5 inch

C. Consider upper floor locations critical unless otherwise indicated.

D. Maintain sound level of spaces at levels not to exceed those listed below by utilizing acoustical devices.

E. Maintain rooms at following maximum sound levels, in Room Criteria (RC) as defined by ASHRAE Handbook., Fundamentals. B/A #09100194 15070-2

1. Offices a. Executive: 30 N. b. Conference rooms: 30 N. c. Private: 30 N. d. Open-plan areas: 35 N. e. Computer/business machine areas: 45 N. 2. Schools a. Lecture and classrooms: 25 N. b. Open-plan classrooms: 30 N. 3. Libraries: 30 N. 4. Concert Halls and Legitimate Theaters a. Rehearsal rooms: 25 N. b. Teaching studios: 25 N.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Locate vibration isolators, with static and dynamic load.

B. Product Data: Submit schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and setting dimensions. Indicate installation requirements maintaining integrity of sound isolation.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify isolators meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate sound isolation installation is complete and in accordance with instructions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with AMCA 300 ANSI S1.13 ARI 575 ANSI S12.36 standards and recommendations of ASHRAE 68.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

B/A #09100194 15070-3

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Open Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Spring Mounts: Furnish with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware. 4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators.

B. Restrained Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Spring Mounts: Furnish with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware. 4. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators. 5. Restraint: Furnish mounting frame and limit stops.

C. Closed Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. 3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance.

D. Restrained Closed Spring Isolators: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. B/A #09100194 15070-4

b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Type: Closed spring mount with top and bottom housing separated with neoprene rubber stabilizers. 3. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 4. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators, and neoprene side stabilizers with minimum 0.25 inch clearance and limit stops.

E. Spring Hanger: 1. Spring Isolators: a. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Furnish hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. b. Code: Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. 3. Housings: Incorporate rubber hanger with threaded insert. 4. Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree hanger rod misalignment.

F. Neoprene Pad Isolators: 1. Rubber or neoprene-waffle pads. a. 30 durometer. b. Minimum 1/2 inch thick. c. Maximum loading 40 psi. d. Height of ribs: not to exceed 0.7 times width. 2. Configuration: Single layer.

G. Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 0.5 inches deflection with threaded insert.

H. Glass Fiber Pads: Neoprene jacketed pre-compressed molded glass fiber.

2.2 INERTIA BASES

A. Structural Bases: 1. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine, and to transmit design loads to isolators and snubbers. 2. Construction: Welded structural steel with gusset brackets, supporting equipment and motor with motor slide rails.

B. Concrete Inertia Bases: 1. Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment. 2. Construction: Structured steel channel perimeter frame, with gusset brackets and anchor bolts, adequately reinforced, concrete filled. 3. Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base. 4. Concrete: Reinforced 3,000 psi concrete.

B/A #09100194 15070-5

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify equipment, ductwork and piping is installed before work in this section is started.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install isolation for motor driven equipment.

B. Adjust equipment level.

C. Install spring hangers without binding.

D. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions.

E. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15070-6

SECTION 15075-MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Tags. 3. Pipe markers. 4. Labels. 5. Lockout devices.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B/A #09100194 15075-1

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Craftmark Identification Systems. 2. Safety Sign Co. 3. Seton Identification Products 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color.

2.2 TAGS

A. Plastic Tags: 1. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter.

B. Metal Tags: 1. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with finished edges.

C. Information Tags: 1. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.

D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location plastic laminated.

2.3 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.

B. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.

C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers:

B/A #09100194 15075-2

1. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

D. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: 1. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

2.4 LABELS

A. Description: Laminated Mylar, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed with printed identification.

2.5 LOCKOUT DEVICES

A. Lockout Hasps: 1. Reinforced nylon hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches.

B. Valve Lockout Devices: 1. Steel device preventing access to valve operator, accepting lock shackle.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. All nameplates, tags, pipe markers, labels, and lock-out devices shall correspond with all equipment marks shown on mechanical drawings unless directed otherwise by owner.

B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.

C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

D. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.

E. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location.

F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.

B/A #09100194 15075-3

G. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with tags.

H. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

I. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

J. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.

K. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.

L. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers, or plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

M. Identify ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15075-4

SECTION 15080-MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Ductwork insulation. 2. Duct liner. 3. Insulation jackets. 4. Equipment insulation 5. Breeching insulation. 6. Piping system insulation. 7. Insulation accessories including vapor retarders, jackets, and accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for painting insulation jackets and covering specified by this section. 2. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports: Product and Execution requirements for inserts at hanger locations. 3. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification: Product requirements for mechanical identification.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. 2. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement. 3. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. 4. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 5. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 6. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 7. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 8. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. 9. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 10. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation.

B/A #09100194 15080-1

11. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 12. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 13. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material). 14. ASTM C1126 - Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation. 15. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 16. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts. 17. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 18. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and thickness for each service, and location.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating proper installation procedures.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storaging, and protecting products.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.

B/A #09100194 15080-2

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer.

C. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 MAN MADE MINERAL FIBER

A. Insulation: ASTM C547 Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation, Type I, 850 degrees F.

B. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. ASTM C921, White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm-inches.

C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.

D. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation.

E. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

F. Glass Fiber Fabric: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density. 3. Weave: 5 x 5.

G. Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.

H. Outdoor Vapor Retarder Mastic: 1. Product Description: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.

I. Outdoor Breather Mastic:

B/A #09100194 15080-3

1. Product Description: Vinyl emulsion type, black acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation.

J. Insulating Cement: 1. ASTM C449/C449M.

2.2 MAN MADE MINERAL FIBER, FLEXIBLE BLANKET OR BATTS

A. Insulation: ASTM C1290; Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 1. Operating Temperatures: 250 degrees F. 2. Density: 1.0 lb/cu ft 3. ‘K’ factor: ASTM C518, 0.27 at 75 degrees F.

B. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASTM 1136, Type II Flexible and Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 1. For systems operating at temperatures below ambient, close and secure seams and joints. When outward clinching staples are used, seal penetrations.

C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.

D. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation.

E. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

2.3 MINERAL FIBER, FLEXIBLE

A. Insulation: ASTM C553 Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications, Type II.

B. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

C. Vapor Retarder Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.

D. Outdoor Vapor Retarder Mastic: 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.

E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.

B/A #09100194 15080-4

2.4 MINERAL FIBER, RIGID

A. Insulation: ASTM C612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Insulation, Type IA

B. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film 2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.04 perm. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

C. Vapor Retarder Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.

D. Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish: 1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight, glass fabric. 2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.

2.5 CELLULAR GLASS

A. Insulation: ASTM C552, Type II - pipe and tubing insulation, Class 2 - Jacketed. 1. ‘K’ factor: ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, 0.29 at 75 degrees F.

2.6 GLASS FIBER, RIGID

A. Insulation: ASTM C612 or ASTM C592; rigid, noncombustible. 1. ‘K’ factor: ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 650 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.1 percent by volume. 4. Density: 2.0 lb/cu ft.

B. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASTM C1136 Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation, Type II.

C. Facing: 1 inch galvanized steel hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of insulation.

D. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation.

E. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

2.7 ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR FOAM

A. Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular form: ASTM C534; Type I, Tubular form

B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: 1. Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.

B/A #09100194 15080-5

2.8 PIPE INSULATION AND EQUIPMENT JACKETS

A. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket: 1. Product Description: ASTM D1784, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. 2. Thickness: 15 mil. 3. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.

B. PVC Plastic Equipment Jacket: 1. Product Description: Sheet material, off-white color. 2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 3. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. 4. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm-inches. 5. Thickness: 15 mil. 6. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.

C. Covering Adhesive Mastic: 1. Compatible with insulation.

D. Lagging Adhesive: 1. Compatible with insulation.

E. Aluminum Pipe Jacket: 1. ASTM B209. 2. Thickness: 0.020 inch thick sheet. 3. Finish: Smooth. 4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 5. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify piping, equipment and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

B. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, chilled water pump bodies, and expansion joints.

B/A #09100194 15080-6

C. Man made mineral fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: 1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

D. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment.

E. Man made mineral fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket and butt strips or both. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

F. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping or Equipment 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range and service.

G. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section 07840 for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour.

H. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish all insulated piping systems with PVC fitting covers and install PVC jacket on all insulated piping to 10 feet above finish floor.

I. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on bottom side of horizontal equipment.

B/A #09100194 15080-7

J. Buried Piping: Insulate only where insulation manufacturer recommends insulation product may be installed in trench, tunnel or direct buried. Install factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with 1 mil thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with polyester film.

K. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size insulation large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water.

L. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.

M. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

N. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.

O. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement.

P. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system.

Q. Mineral fiber insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Provide vapor retarder jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass- cloth and vapor barrier adhesive.

R. For hot equipment containing fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and jackets.

S. Mineral fiber insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature: Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor retarder, factory-applied or field- applied. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive.

T. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.

U. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.

V. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.

W. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation for easy removal and replacement without damage.

X. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: B/A #09100194 15080-8

1. Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.

Y. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor retarder jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.

Z. Ductwork Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Finish with foil faces rigid insulation.

AA. Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor retarder jacket. Cover with caulked aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal duct section.

BB. External Duct Insulation Application: 1. Secure insulation with vapor retarder with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor retarder adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure insulation without vapor retarder with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor retarder penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor retarder adhesive. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply: a. Man Made Mineral Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: ½” to 3”, 1 inch thick. 2) Size Range: 4”+, 1½” thick . b. Cellular Glass Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: ½” to 3”, 1 inch thick. 2. Domestic Hot Water Re-circulation: a. Man Made Mineral Fiber Insulation: 1) Pipe Size Range: ½” to 3”, 1 inch thick. 3. Domestic Cold Water: a. Man Made Mineral Fiber: 1) Pipe Size: ½” to 3”, 1 inch thick. 2) Size Range: 4”+, 1½ inch thick. 4. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies: a. Elastomeric Cellular Foam: B/A #09100194 15080-9

1) Pipe Size: All. 2) Thickness: 1½ inch 5. Roof Drainage and Overflow Drainage Above Grade: a. Elastomeric Cellular Foam: 1) Pipe Size: All. 2) Thickness: 1½ inch 6. Plumbing Vents Within 10 feet of Exterior: a. Man Made Mineral Fiber: 1) Pipe Size: 3-4”. 2) Thickness: 1 inch

B. Heat Pump Systems: 1. Heat Pump Loop: a. Elastomeric Cellular Foam: 1) Pipe Size: 3” and under 2) Thickness: 1 inch b. Elastomeric Cellular Foam: 1) Pipe Size: 4 inch and over. 2) Thickness: 1 ½ inch. 2. Condensate Drains from Cooling Coils: a. Man Made Mineral Fiber: 1) Pipe Size: All 2) Thickness: 1 inch 3) Jacket: PVC (Exposed piping in finished areas only.)

C. Equipment: 1. Heat Pump Loop & Domestic: a. Air Separators: 1) Man Made Mineral Fiber Insulation: a) Thickness: 2 inch

D. Combustion Air Duct: 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Ductwork Insulation: 1 inch thick. 2. Rigid Glass Fiber Ductwork Insulation: 1 inch thick.

E. Exhaust Ducts Within 10 feet of Exterior Openings: 1. Man Made Mineral Fiber Insulation: a. Thickness: 1 inch

F. Exhaust Ducts Exposed to Outdoor Air: 1. Man Made Mineral Fiber Insulation: a. Thickness: 1 inch

G. Outside Air Intake Ducts: 1. Man Made Mineral Fiber Insulation: a. Thickness: 1 inch

H. Plenums (Cooling System): 1. Man Made Mineral Fiber Insulation: B/A #09100194 15080-10

a. Thickness: 1 inch

I. Supply Ducts: 1. Man Made Mineral Fiber Insulation: a. Thickness: 1 inch 2. No insulation required on Supply & Return ductwork located in exposed, interior, ambient conditions.

J. All Ducts Exposed to Outdoors: 1. Glass Fiber, Rigid: a. Thickness: 3 inch. b. Jacket: 18-gage Aluminum.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15080-11

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

B/A #09100194 15080-12

SECTION 15110-VALVES

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Gate valves. 2. Globe valves. 3. Ball valves. 4. Plug valves. 5. Butterfly valves. 6. Check valves.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports: Product and installation requirements for pipe hangers and supports. 2. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation: Product and installation requirements for insulation for valves. 3. Section 15120 - Piping Specialties: Product and installation requirements for piping specialties used in hydronic, steam and steam condensate, piping systems. 4. Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping: Product and installation requirements for piping, piping specialties, and equipment used in domestic water systems. 5. Section 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: Product and installation requirements for piping, piping specialties, and equipment used in sanitary waste and vent systems. 6. Section 15160 - Storm Drainage Piping: Product and installation requirements for piping, piping specialties, and equipment used in storm drainage systems. 7. Section 15180 - Heating and Cooling Piping: Product and installation requirements for piping used in hydronic, piping systems. 8. Section 15184 - Refrigerant Piping: Product and installation requirements for valves used in process compressed air and medical gas systems. 9. Section 15195 - Gas Piping: Product and installation requirements for piping, piping specialties, and equipment used in natural gas and LPG piping systems.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A216/A216M - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service.

B. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves.

B/A #09100194 15110-1

2. MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 3. MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 4. MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 5. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 6. MSS SP 85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded. 7. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 842 - Valves for Flammable Fluids.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan code.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

B/A #09100194 15110-2

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install valves underground when bedding is wet or frozen.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish two packing kits for each size and type of valve.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLENOID VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Alcon. 2. Cal-Val. 3. Crane Valve, North America. 4. Hammond Valve. 5. Milwaukee Valve Company. 6. NIBCO, Inc. 7. Stockham Valves & Fittings. 8. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Heavy duty bronze body, piston operated, Nitrile (BunaN) seal, NEMA 2 metal enclosure, working temperature range from 14 to 176 degrees F, 24v AC, normally open.

2.2 GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Crane Valve, North America. 2. Hammond Valve. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company. 4. NIBCO, Inc. 5. Stockham Valves & Fittings. 6. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 70, Class 125, cast iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, hand-wheel, outside screw and yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends. Furnish chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.

2.3 GLOBE VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Crane Valve, North America. 2. Hammond Valve. 3. Milwaukee Valve. 4. NIBCO, Inc. 5. Stockham Valves & Fittings. B/A #09100194 15110-3

6. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 85, Class 125, cast iron body, bronze trim, hand wheel, outside screw and yoke, flanged ends. Furnish chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.

2.4 BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Apollo. 2. Crane Valve, North America. 3. Hammond Valve. 4. Milwaukee Valve Company. 5. NIBCO, Inc. 6. Stockham Valves & Fittings. 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, Class 150, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated bronze ball, full port, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded ends, locking lever handle with balancing stops.

2.5 PLUG VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. DeZURIK, Unit of SPX Corp. 2. Flow Control Equipment, Inc. 3. Homestead Valve. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 78, Class 150, semi-steel construction, rectangular port, regular opening, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, threaded ends. Furnish one plug valve wrench for every ten plug-valves with minimum of one wrench.

C. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 78, Class 300, semi-steel construction, rectangular port, regular opening, pressure lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends. Furnish wrench-operated.

2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Crane Valve, North America. 2. Hammond Valve. 3. Milwaukee Valve Company. 4. NIBCO, Inc. 5. Stockham Valves & Fittings. 6. Victaulic. 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 67, Class 150.

B/A #09100194 15110-4

1. Body: Cast or ductile iron, wafer lug or grooved ends, stainless steel stem, extended neck. 2. Disc: Nickel-plated ductile iron Elastomer coated ductile iron or stainless steel. 3. Seat: Resilient replaceable EPDM. 4. Handle and Operator: Infinite position lever handle with memory stop. 5. Stem: Blow out proof stem.

2.7 CHECK VALVES

A. Horizontal Swing Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve, North America. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO, Inc. e. Stockham Valves & Fittings. f. Victaulic. g. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 150, bronze body and cap, bronze seat, Buna-N disc, solder or threaded ends. 3. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, cast iron body, bolted cap, bronze or cast iron disc, renewable disc seal and seat, solder, threaded , or grooved ends.

B. Spring Loaded Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Crane Valve, North America. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO, Inc. e. Stockham Valves & Fittings. f. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 250, bronze body, in-line spring lift check, silent closing, Buna-N disc, integral seat, solder or threaded ends. 3. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, globe style, cast iron body, bronze seat, center guided bronze disc, stainless steel spring and screws, flanged ends.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify piping system is ready for valve installation.

B/A #09100194 15110-5

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.

C. Install 3/4 inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment.

D. Install valves with clearance for installation of insulation and allowing access.

E. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08310.

F. Refer to Section 15060 for pipe hangers.

G. Refer to Section 15080 for insulation requirements for valves.

H. For installation of valves in domestic water systems refer to Section 15140.

I. For installation of valves in hot water, and chilled water, piping systems refer to Section 15180.

J. For installation of valves in natural gas systems refer to Section 15195.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff and drain valves at locations indicated on Drawings in accordance with this Section.

B. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

C. Install ball, butterfly or globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

D. Install spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.

E. Install lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when functioning to isolate equipment.

F. Install ball valves in domestic water systems for shut-off service.

G. Install ball and butterfly valves in domestic water systems for throttling service.

H. Install ball and butterfly valves in heat pump loop system for shut-off service.

I. Install ball and butterfly valves in heat pump loop system for throttling service.

J. Install plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. B/A #09100194 15110-6

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15110-7

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

B/A #09100194 15110-8 SECTION 15120-PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pressure gages. 2. Pressure gage taps. 3. Thermometers. 4. Thermometer supports. 5. Test plugs. 6. Static pressure gages. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Expansion tanks. 9. Air vents. 10. Air separators. 11. Strainers. 12. Pump suction fittings. 13. Flow controls. 14. Relief valves.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15130 - Pumps: Execution requirements for piping connections to products specified by this section. 2. Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping: Execution requirements for piping connections to products specified by this section. 3. Section 15180 - Heating and Cooling Piping: Execution requirements for piping connections to products specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element. 2. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A105/A105M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications. 2. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 3. ASTM A216/A216M - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service. 4. ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 5. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers.

B/A #09100194 15120-1 6. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers.

C. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C700 - Cold-Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case. 2. AWWA C701 - Cold-Water Meters - Turbine Type, for Customer Service. 3. AWWA C702 - Cold-Water Meters - Compound Type. 4. AWWA C706 - Direct-Reading, Remote-Registration Systems for Cold- Water Meters. 5. AWWA M6 - Water Meters - Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service. 2. UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Flexible Connectors: Provide at or near pumps where piping configuration does not absorb vibration.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for manufactured products and assemblies used in this Project. 1. Manufacturer’s data and list indicating use, operating range, total range, accuracy, and location for manufactured components. 2. Submit product description, model, dimensions, component sizes, rough- in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 3. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer, model number, size, location, rated capacity, load served, and features for each piping specialty. 4. Submit electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures, application, selection, and hookup configuration. Include pipe and accessory elevations.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of actual locations of components and instrumentation.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for calibrating instruments, installation instructions, assembly views, servicing requirements, lubrication instruction, and replacement parts list.

B/A #09100194 15120-2 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept piping specialties on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

D. Protect systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, caps and closures, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system until installation.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except rough in, taps, supports and test plugs.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements before fabrication.

1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish two bottles of red gage oil for static pressure gages.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Gage: ASME B40.1, UL 393 with bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front calibration adjustment, black scale on white background. 1. Case: Steel. 2. Bourdon Tube: Brass. 3. Dial Size:3-1/2 inch 4 inch diameter. 4. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent. 5. Scale: Psi.

B/A #09100194 15120-3 2.2 PRESSURE GAGE TAPS

A. Needle Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch NPT for minimum 300 psi.

B. Ball Valve: Brass 1/4 inch NPT for 250 psi.

C. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch NPT connections.

D. Siphon: Steel, Schedule 40, 1/4 inch NPT angle or straight pattern.

2.3 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS

A. Thermometer: ASTM E1, adjustable angle, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint with positive locking device. 1. Size: 9 inch scale. 2. Window: Clear Lexan. 3. Stem: Brass, 3/4 inch NPT, 3-1/2 inch long. 4. Accuracy: 2 percent. 5. Calibration: Degrees F.

2.4 DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. Thermometer: ASTM E1, drawn steel with enamel finish case, vapor or liquid actuated with brass or copper bulb, copper or bronze braided capillary, white with black markings and black pointer glass lens. 1. Size: 2-1/2 inch diameter dial. 2. Lens: Clear Lexan. 3. Length of Capillary: Minimum 5 feet 4. Accuracy: 2 percent. 5. Calibration: Degrees F.

2.5 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS

A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions, and with cap and chain.

B. Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts, with brass perforated stem.

2.6 TEST PLUGS

A. 1/4 inch NPT or 1/2 inch NPT brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with: 1. Neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F. 2. Nordel core for temperatures up to 350 degrees F. 3. Viton core for temperatures up to 400 degrees F.

B/A #09100194 15120-4 2.7 STATIC PRESSURE GAGES

A. Dial Gages: 3-1/2 inch diameter dial in metal case, diaphragm actuated, black figures on white background, front calibration adjustment, 2 percent of full scale accuracy.

B. Inclined Manometer: Plastic with red liquid on white background with black figures, front calibration adjustment, 3 percent of full scale accuracy.

C. Accessories: Static pressure tips with compression fittings for bulkhead mounting, 1/4 inch diameter tubing.

2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding, minimum 9 inches long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure 350 psig.

2.9 EXPANSION TANKS

A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Section VIII; supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible butyl rubber bladder and steel support stand.

B. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; pre-charge to 12 psig.

C. Quick Connect Air Inlet: 1. Compressed Air: 75 inches of 1/4 inch diameter braided reinforced air hose, air chuck, check valve, and shut-off valve on supply. 2. Expansion Tank: Inlet tire check valve, manual air vent, tank drain, and pressure relief valve.

D. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, reduced pressure double check back flow prevention device, test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker, and by-pass valves.

2.10 AIR VENTS

A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8 inch brass needle valve at top of chamber.

B. Float Type: 1. Cast iron body and cover, float, bronze pilot valve mechanism suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.

C. Washer Type: 1. Brass with hydroscopic fiber discs, vent ports, adjustable cap for manual shut-off, and integral spring loaded ball check valve.

B/A #09100194 15120-5 2.11 AIR SEPARATORS

A. Dip Tube Fitting: For 125 psig operating pressure; to prevent free air collected in boiler from rising into system.

B. In-line Air Separators: Cast iron for sizes 1-1/2 inch and smaller, or steel for sizes 2 inch and larger; tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Section VIII; for 125 psig operating pressure.

C. Combination Air Separators/Strainers: Steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Section VIII; for 125 psig operating pressure, with integral bronze strainer, tangential inlet and outlet connections, and internal stainless steel air collector tube.

2.12 STRAINERS

A. Size 2 inch and Smaller: 1. Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

B. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: 1. Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

C. Size 5 inch and Larger: 1. Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

2.13 PUMP SUCTION FITTINGS

A. Fitting: Angle pattern, cast-iron body. Threaded for 2 inch and smaller, flanged for 2-1/2 inch and larger. Rated for 175 psig working pressure, with inlet vanes, cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch diameter openings, disposable fine mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer, and permanent magnet located in flow stream and removable for cleaning.

B. Accessories: Adjustable foot support, blow-down tapping in bottom, gage tapping in side.

2.14 COMBINATION PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES

A. Valves: Straight or angle pattern, flanged cast-iron valve body with bolt-on bonnet for 175 psig operating pressure, non-slam check valve with spring-loaded bronze disc and seat, stainless steel stem, and calibrated adjustment permitting flow regulation.

B/A #09100194 15120-6 2.15 FLOW CONTROLS

A. Construction: Brass or bronze body with union on inlet, and outlet, temperature and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet.

B. Calibration: Control within 5 percent of design flow over entire operating pressure.

C. Control Mechanism: Stainless steel or nickel plated brass piston or regulator cup, operating against stainless steel helical or wave formed spring.

D. Accessories: In-line strainer on inlet and ball valve on outlet.

2.16 RELIEF VALVES

A. Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated capacities ASME certified and labeled.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - METERS

A. Install Work in accordance with State of Michigan standards.

3.2 INSTALLATION - THERMOMETERS AND GAGES

A. Install one pressure gage for each pump, locate taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump; pipe to gage.

B. Install gage taps in piping

C. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide needle valve or ball valve to isolate each gage. Extend nipples to allow clearance from insulation.

D. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inches for installation of thermometer sockets. Allow clearance from insulation.

E. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges.

F. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or sensor sockets.

G. Locate duct-mounted thermometers minimum 10 feet downstream of mixing- dampers, coils, or other devices causing air turbulence.

H. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.

B/A #09100194 15120-7 I. Install static pressure gages to measure across filters and filter banks, (inlet to outlet). On multiple banks, provide manifold and single gage.

J. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale.

K. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

L. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.

3.3 INSTALLATION - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Locate test plugs adjacent to control device sockets as indicated on Drawings.

B. Where large air quantities accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes.

C. Install manual air vents at system high points.

D. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, install vent tubing to nearest drain.

E. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to expansion tank.

F. Provide drain and hose connection with valve on strainer blow down connection.

G. Provide pump suction fitting on suction side of base mounted centrifugal pumps. Remove temporary strainers after cleaning systems.

H. Provide combination pump discharge valve on discharge side of base mounted centrifugal pumps.

I. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports.

J. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low-pressure side of reducing valves, heat exchangers, and expansion tanks.

K. Select system relief valve capacity greater than make-up pressure reducing valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected equipment.

L. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.

M. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of individual vent areas.

B/A #09100194 15120-8 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test for strength of glycol and water solution and submit written test results.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean and flush glycol system before adding glycol solution.

3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Remove thermostatic elements from steam traps during temporary and trial usage, and until system has been operated and dirt pockets cleaned of sediment and scale.

B. Do not install hydronic and steam pressure gauges until after systems are pressure tested.

END OF SECTION

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A #09100194 15120-9

SECTION 15125-PIPING EXPANSION COMPENSATION

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Flexible pipe connectors. 2. Expansion joints. 3. Expansion compensators. 4. Pipe alignment guides. 5. Swivel joints. 6. Pipe anchors.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports: Product and installation requirements for piping hangers and supports. 2. Section 15070 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration, Seismic Control: Product and installation requirements for vibration isolators used in piping systems. 3. Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping: Product and installation requirements for piping used in domestic water systems. 4. Section 15180 - Heating and Cooling Piping: Product and installation requirements for piping used in heating and cooling systems.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. 3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

B. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide structural work and equipment required for expansion and contraction of piping. Verify anchors, guides, and expansion joints provide and adequately protect system.

B. Expansion Compensation Design Criteria: 1. Installation Temperature: 50 degrees F. 2. Hot Water Heating System Temperature: 140 degrees F. 3. Domestic Hot Water: 140 degrees F. 4. Heat Pump Loop: 90 degrees F. 5. Safety Factor: 30 percent.

B/A #09100194 15125-1

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of piping systems, including flexible connectors, expansion joints, expansion compensators, loops, offsets and swing joints.

B. Product Data: 1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid. 2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maximum expansion compensation.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Indicate results of inspection by manufacturer’s representative.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flexible pipe connectors, expansion joints, anchors, and guides.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit adjustment instructions.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept expansion joints on site in factory packing with shipping bars and positioning devices intact. Inspect for damage.

B/A #09100194 15125-2

C. Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings, pipe end protection, and packaging in place until installation.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS

A. Steel Piping: 1. Inner Hose: Stainless Steel. 2. Exterior Sleeve: Double braided stainless steel. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig WSP and 450 degrees F. 4. Joint: As specified for pipe joints. 5. Size: Use pipe-sized units. 6. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line.

B. Copper Piping: 1. Inner Hose: Bronze 2. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig WSP and 450 degrees F. 4. Joint: As specified for pipe joints. 5. Size: Use pipe sized units 6. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center line

2.2 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Stainless Steel Bellows Type: 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig WSP and 400 degrees F. 2. Maximum Compression: 1-3/4 inch. 3. Maximum Extension: 1/4 inch. 4. Joint: As specified for pipe joints. 5. Size: Use pipe sized units 6. Application: Steel piping 3 inch and smaller.

B. External Ring Controlled Stainless Steel Bellows Type: 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig WSP and 400 degrees F. 2. Maximum Compression: 15/16 inch. 3. Maximum Extension: 5/16 inch. 4. Maximum Offset: 1/8 inch. 5. Joint: Flanged 6. Size: Use pipe sized units 7. Accessories: Internal flow liner. 8. Application: Steel piping 3 inch and larger.

C. Double Sphere, Flexible Compensators: 1. Body: Neoprene and nylon. 2. Working Pressure: 150 psi 3. Maximum Temperature: 250 degrees F. 4. Maximum Compression: 3/4 inch 1 inch.

B/A #09100194 15125-3

5. Maximum Elongation:1/2 inch. 6. Maximum Offset: 1/2 inch. 7. Maximum Angular Movement: 30 degrees. 8. Joint: Tapped steel flanges. 9. Size: Use pipe sized units 10. Accessories: Control rods. 11. Application: Steel piping 2 inch and larger.

D. Two-ply Bronze Bellows Type: 1. Construction: Bronze with anti-torque device, limit stops, internal guides. 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig WSP and 400 degrees F. 3. Maximum Compression: 1-3/4 inch. 4. Maximum Extension: 1/4 inch. 5. Joint: As specified for pipe joints. 6. Size: Use pipe sized units 7. Application: Copper piping.

E. Low Pressure Compensators with two-ply Bronze Bellows: 1. Working Pressure: 75 psig. 2. Maximum Temperatures: 250 degrees F. 3. Maximum Compression: 1/2 inch. 4. Maximum Extension: 5/32 inch. 5. Joint: Soldered. 6. Size: Use pipe sized units 7. Application: Copper or steel piping 2 inch and smaller.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Pipe Alignment Guides: Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard pipe, frame with four mounting holes, clearance for minimum 1 inch thick insulation, minimum 3 inch travel.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install Work in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, or ASME B31.9.

B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration isolation. Refer to Section 15070. Provide line size flexible connectors.

C. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indicated otherwise.

D. Rigidly anchor pipe to building structure. Provide pipe guides to direct movement only along axis of pipe. Erect piping so strain and weight is not on cast connections or apparatus.

B/A #09100194 15125-4

E. Provide support and anchors for controlling expansion and contraction of piping. Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required. Refer to Section 15060 for pipe hanger installation requirements.

F. Provide grooved piping systems with minimum one joint per inch pipe diameter instead of flexible connector supported by vibration isolation. Grooved piping systems need not be anchored.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Furnish inspection services by flexible pipe manufacturer's representative for final installation and certify installation is in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and connectors are performing satisfactorily.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15125-5

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A #09100194 15125-6

SECTION 15130 -PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. System lubricated circulators. 2. In-line circulators. 3. Base mounted pumps.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15070 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration, and Seismic Control: Product requirements for vibrations isolators installed with pumps. 2. Section 15120 - Piping Specialties: Product and execution requirements for piping specialties installed in hydronic systems adjacent to pumps. 3. Section 15140 - Domestic Water Piping: Pumps for use in domestic water systems. 4. Section 15150 - Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: Sewage ejectors for use with sanitary systems. 5. Section 15160 - Storm Drainage Piping: Sump pumps for use with storm drainage systems. 6. Section 15180 - Heating and Cooling Piping: Execution requirements for connection to pumps specified by this section. 7. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electrical connections to pumps specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.

B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide pumps to operate at system fluid temperatures indicated on Drawings without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Submit also, manufacturer model number, dimensions, service sizes, and finishes. B/A #09100194 15130-1

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application, selection, and hookup configuration with pipe and accessory elevations. Submit hanging and support requirements and recommendations.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit installation instructions, servicing requirements, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Protect systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year warranty on equipment provided and installed.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish two set of mechanical seals for pump model.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM LUBRICATED CIRCULATORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett. 2. Armstrong. B/A #09100194 15130-2

3. Flo-Fab. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected with multiple speed wet rotor motor for in-line mounting, for 140 psig maximum working pressure, 230 degrees F maximum water temperature.

C. Casing: Cast iron or Bronze with flanged pump connections.

D. Impeller, Shaft, Rotor: Stainless Steel.

E. Bearings: Metal Impregnated carbon (graphite) and ceramic.

F. Motor: Impedance protected, single speed.

G. Electrical Characteristics and Components: 1. Motors: See pump schedule.

2.2 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett. 2. Armstrong. 3. Flo-Fab. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, with resiliently mounted motor for in-line mounting, oil lubricated, for 125 psig maximum working pressure.

C. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged pump connections.

D. Impeller: Stamped brass or cast bronze, keyed to shaft.

E. Bearings: Two, oil lubricated bronze sleeves.

F. Shaft: Alloy or stainless steel with copper or bronze sleeve, integral thrust collar.

G. Seal: Carbon rotating against stationary ceramic seat, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature.

H. Drive: Flexible coupling.

I. Electrical Characteristics and Components: 1. Motors: 1750 rpm unless indicated otherwise. 2. Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.

B/A #09100194 15130-3

2.3 BASE MOUNTED PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell& Gossett. 2. Armstrong. 3. Flo-Fab. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, radial or horizontal split casing, for 175 psig maximum working pressure.

C. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.

D. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft.

E. Bearings: Permanently lubricated roller or ball bearings.

F. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper, bronze, or stainless steel shaft sleeve.

G. Seal: Carbon rotating against stationary ceramic seat, 225 degrees F maximum continuous operating temperature.

H. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard.

I. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel with integral drain rim.

J. Electrical Characteristics and Components: 1. Wiring Terminations: Furnish terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide pumps to operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

B. Install long radius reducing elbows or reducers between pump and piping. Support piping adjacent to pump so no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base mounted pumps, install supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over.

C. Install pumps on vibration isolators. Refer to Section 15070.

B/A #09100194 15130-4

D. Install flexible connectors at or near pumps where piping configuration does not absorb vibration. Refer to Section 15120.

E. Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer and pump suction fitting on pump suction, and line sized combination pump discharge valve on pump discharge. Refer to Section 15120.

F. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump so no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and larger.

G. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.

H. Provide drains for bases and seals.

I. Check, align, and certify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.

J. Install base mounted pumps on concrete housekeeping base, with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place.

K. Lubricate pumps before start-up.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect for alignment of base mounted pumps.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15130-5

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A #09100194 15130-6

SECTION 15140 -DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Domestic water piping, within 5 feet of building. 2. Domestic water piping, above grade. 3. Unions and flanges. 4. Water pressure reducing valves. 5. Relief valves. 6. Strainers. 7. Hose bibs. 8. Recessed valve box. 9. Backflow preventers. 10. Water hammer arrestors. 11. Thermostatic mixing valves. 12. Diaphragm Type Compression Tank. 13. In-Line Circulator Pumps.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports and firestopping for placement by this section. 2. Section 15070 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration, and Seismic Control: Product requirements for vibration isolators for placement by this section. 3. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification: Product requirements for pipe identification and valve tags for placement by this section. 4. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation: Product and execution requirements for pipe insulation. 5. Section 15110 - Valves: Product requirements for valves for placement by this section. 6. Section 15120 - Piping Specialties: Product requirements for piping specialties for placement by this section. 7. Section 15125 - Piping Expansion Compensation: Execution requirements for pipe expansion devices for placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI Z21.22 - Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems.

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

B/A#09100194 15140-1

3. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. 4. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. 5. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels. 6. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

C. American Society of Sanitary Engineering: 1. ASSE 1010 - Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters. 2. ASSE 1011 - Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. 3. ASSE 1012 - Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent. 4. ASSE 1013 - Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers. 5. ASSE 1019 - Performance Requirements for Wall Hydrants, Freezeless, Automatic Draining, AntiBackflow Types.

D. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 3. ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 4. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 5. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 6. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes. 7. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 8. ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 9. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 10. ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications.

E. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding.

F. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C104 - American National Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.

B/A#09100194 15140-2

3. AWWA C110 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Grey- Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in. (75 mm through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids. 4. AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 5. AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. 6. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.

G. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves. 3. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 4. MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 5. MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 6. MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 7. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 8. MSS SP 85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded. 9. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 10. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.

H. Plumbing and Drainage Institute: 1. PDI WH201 - Water Hammer Arrester Standard.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturer's catalog information. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. 3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load capacity. 4. Domestic Water Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 5. Pumps: Submit pump type, capacity, certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for pumps, valves and accessories.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

B/A#09100194 15140-3

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves and equipment.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts list, exploded assembly views and recommended maintenance intervals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan code.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept valves and equipment on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year warranty on all products and equipment provided and installed.

B/A#09100194 15140-4

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish two packing kits for each size valve, two loose keys for outside hose bibs and two pump seals for each pump model.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151. 1. Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile gray iron, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with rods. 3. Jackets: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket.

B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper. 2. Joints: Compression connection or Brazed, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F.

C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B42, annealed. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F.

2.2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F.

2.3 UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with soldered brazed joints. 3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.

B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, forged steel, slip-on flanges. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, slip-on bronze flanges. 3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets.

B/A#09100194 15140-5

2.4 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, double union ends.

B. 2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 85, cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged.

2.5 RELIEF VALVES

A. Pressure Relief: 1. ANSI Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated.

B. Temperature and Pressure Relief: 1. ANSI Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME certified and labeled.

2.6 STRAINERS

A. 2 inch and Smaller: Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

B. 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16-inch stainless steel perforated screen.

C. 5 inch and Larger: Class 125, flanged iron body, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

2.7 HOSE BIBS

A. Freezeless Hose Bib (HB-1): 1. Manufacturers: a. Woodford Model 65. b. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2. Automatic draining with anit-siphon vacuum breaker. ASSE standard 1019-B approved. ¾ inch inlet and outlet, hardened steel operating stem and one-piece valve plunger to control both flow and drain functions. Exterior finish to be chrome plated. Loose tee key to be furnished with each hydrant.

2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Febco. 2. Watts. 3. Zurn. 4. Conbraco.

B/A#09100194 15140-6

5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: 1. Comply with ASSE 1013. 2. Bronze body, with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs. 3. Two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve opening under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non- threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.

C. Double Check Valve Assemblies: Comply with ASSE 1012; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent.

2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. ASSE 1010; copper construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI WH- 201.

B. Pre-charged suitable for operation in temperature range 34 to 250 degrees F and maximum 150 psi working pressure.

2.10 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES

A. Master Mixing Valves (MV-1) 1. Manufacturers: a. Lawler Model 801. b. Armstrong. c. Powers. d. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2. Valve: ASSE 1017; Thermostatic mixing valve with liquid filled motor, bronze body construction with replaceable corrosion resistant components, stainless steel sliding piston control mechanism. Valve shall be equipped with union end stops, check valve inlets, and removable stainless steel strainers. 3. Capacity: Minimum 1 gpm; 50 gpm at 45 psi differential. 4. Accessories: a. Check valve on inlets. b. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet. c. Stem thermometer on outlet. d. Strainer stop checks on inlets

B. Point of Use Mixing Valves 1. Manufacturers: a. Lawler Series 310. b. Armstrong. c. Powers.

B/A#09100194 15140-7

d. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2. Valve: ASSE 1070; Thermostatic mixing valve with liquid filled motor, bronze body construction with replaceable corrosion resistant components, stainless steel sliding piston control mechanism. Valve shall be equipped with stop and check valve inlets. Valve shall maintain temperature set point with fluctuating inlet temperatures and pressures, adjustable set point with high limit stop. 3. Locations: a. All accessible plumbing fixtures. b. All locations required for code compliance.

2.11 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS

B. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; pre-charge to 12 psig.

2.12 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett. 2. Armstrong. 3. Flo-Fab. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Casing: Bronze rated for 125 psig working pressure.

C. Impeller: Bronze or Plastic.

D. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two, permanently oil lubricated bearings.

E. Seal: Carbon rotating against stationary ceramic seat.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

3.3 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install hangers and supports in accordance with Section 15060.

B/A#09100194 15140-8

3.4 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Verify connection size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.

B. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 4 ft of cover.

C. Establish minimum separation from sanitary sewer piping in accordance with bar code.

D. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.

E. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Specification.

F. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping, level bedding materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 4 inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent maximum density.

G. Install pipe on prepared bedding.

H. Route pipe in straight line.

I. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.

J. Install shutoff and drain valves at locations indicated on Drawings in accordance with Section 15110.

K. Pipe Cover and Backfilling: 1. Backfill trench in accordance with Specification.

3.5 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Install non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

C. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more space than necessary.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

E. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points.

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 15125.

G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15080.

B/A#09100194 15140-9

H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08310.

I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

J. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.

K. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09900.

L. Install domestic water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.

M. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 15060.

N. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

P. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.

Q. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

R. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

S. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when functioning to isolate equipment.

T. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.

U. Provide flow controls in water circulating systems as indicated on Drawings.

V. Install potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs.

W. Pipe relief from valves, back-flow preventers and drains to nearest floor drain.

X. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to lavatories sinks and washing machine outlets.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements.

B/A#09100194 15140-10

3.7 CLEANING

A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

B. Verify pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).

C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder and tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain residual from 50 to 80 mg/L.

D. Bleed water from outlets to obtain distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets.

E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

F. When final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.

G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual concentration is equal to incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.

H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 5 2 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 15140-11

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

B/A#09100194 15140-12

SECTION 15150 -SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sanitary sewer piping buried within 5 feet of building. 2. Sanitary sewer piping above grade. 3. Floor drains. 4. Cleanouts.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports for placement by this section. 2. Section 15070 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration, and Seismic Control: Product requirements for vibration isolators for placement by this section. 3. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification: Product requirements for pipe identification for placement by this section. 4. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation: Product and execution requirements for pipe insulation. 5. Section 15110 - Valves: Product requirements for valves for placement by this section. 6. Section 15125 - Piping Expansion Compensation: Execution requirements for pipe expansion devices for placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A112.21.1 - Floor Drains. 2. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 3. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 4. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 5. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings (DWV). 6. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV. 7. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 2. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 3. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 4. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

B/A #09100194 15150-1

Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 5. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 6. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 7. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 8. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 9. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.

C. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute: 1. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. 2. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.

D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers catalog information. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. 3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information including load capacity. 4. Sanitary Drainage Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 5. Pumps: Submit pump type, capacity, certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and equipment.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean-outs.

B/A #09100194 15150-2

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit frequency of treatment required for interceptors. Include, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for pumps and equipment.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan code.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year warranty for all products and equipment installed.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight, bell and spigot ends. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A74. 2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum.

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint ends. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40, PVC. B/A #09100194 15150-3

2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 Solvent cement.

2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785 Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241 SDR-26 for not less than 150 psi pressure rating, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40, PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 Solvent cement.

2.3 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Co. 2. Wade. 2. Zurn. 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Floor Drain (FD-1): ASME A112.21.1; epoxy coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, trap primer, and 6” round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer. Zurn Z415B.

C. Floor Drain (FD-2): Same as FD-1; with sediment bucket and 4” diameter funnel.

2.5 CLEANOUTS

A. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Galvanized cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round scored cover with gasket in service areas and round depressed cover with gasket to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.

B. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated cover with gasket, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.

C. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

B/A #09100194 15150-4

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

3.3 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Verify connection size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.

B. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 4 ft of cover.

C. Establish minimum separation from other services in accordance with local code.

D. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.

E. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Specification.

F. Install pipe to elevation as indicated on Drawings.

G. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping, level bedding materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 4 inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent maximum density.

H. Install pipe on prepared bedding.

I. Route pipe in straight line.

J. Pipe Cover and Backfilling: 1. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 02301.

3.4 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients.

B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Provide clearances at cleanout for snaking drainage system.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

E. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

F. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

G. Install piping to maintain headroom. Do not spread piping, conserve space.

B/A #09100194 15150-5

H. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 15125.

J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Refer to Section 15080.

K. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08310.

L. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.

M. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

N. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09900.

O. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

P. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.

Q. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping.

R. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test sanitary waste and vent piping system in accordance with applicable code.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15150-6

SECTION 15160 -STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Storm water piping buried within 5 feet of building. 2. Storm water piping above grade. 3. Roof drains. 4. Overflow drains. 5. Downspout nozzles. 6. Cleanouts.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME A112.21.2M - Roof Drains. 2. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers catalog information. 2. Storm Drainage Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and equipment.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

B/A#09100194 15160-1

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean-outs.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for pumps and equipment.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan code.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material. 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.2 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034, PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. B/A#09100194 15160-2

2.3 ROOF DRAINS

A. Manufacturers: 1. J.R. Smith. 2. Wade. 3. Zurn. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Roof Drain (RD-1): 1. Assembly: ASME A112.21.2M. 2. Body: Lacquered cast iron with sump. 3. Strainer: Removable cast iron dome. 4. Accessories: Coordinate with roofing type, refer to Section: a. Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop. b. Adjustable under deck clamp. c. Roof sump receiver. d. Waterproofing flange. e. Controlled flow weir. f. Leveling frame. g. Adjustable extension sleeve for roof insulation. h. Perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof. i. Perforated stainless steel ballast guard extension.

C. Overflow Drain (OD-1): 1. Assembly: ASME A112.21.2M. 2. Body: Lacquered cast iron with sump. 3. Strainer: Removable cast iron dome. 4. Pipe extended to 2 inches above flood elevation. 5. Accessories: Coordinate with roofing type, refer to Section: a. Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop. b. Adjustable under deck clamp. c. Roof sump receiver. d. Waterproofing flange. e. Controlled flow weir. f. Leveling frame. g. Adjustable extension sleeve for roof insulation. h. Perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof. i. Perforated stainless steel ballast guard extension.

2.4 DOWNSPOUT NOZZLES (DN-1)

A. Manufacturers: 1. J.R. Smith. 2. Wade Model 3940. 3. Zurn. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Bronze body and wall flange round with straight bottom section. B/A#09100194 15160-3

2.5 CLEANOUTS

A. Interior Finished Floor Areas: Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round scored cover with gasket in service areas and round depressed cover with gasket to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.

B. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated cover with gasket, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.

C. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Caulked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

3.3 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install hangers and supports in accordance with Section 15060.

3.4 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Verify connection size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.

B. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 4 ft of cover.

C. Establish minimum separation from other services in accordance with local code.

D. Coordinate pipe elevations prior to installation.

E. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping, level bedding materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 4 inches compacted depth; compact to 95 percent maximum density.

F. Install pipe on prepared bedding. B/A#09100194 15160-4

G. Route pipe in straight line.

3.5 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING

A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients.

B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Provide clearance at cleanout for snaking drainage system.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

E. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

F. Install piping to maintain headroom. Group piping to conserve space.

G. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 15125.

I. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. Refer to Section 15080.

J. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08310.

K. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.

L. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

M. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 15060.

N. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 15060.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements.

B. Test storm drainage piping system in accordance with applicable code.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 15160-5

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

B/A#09100194 15160-6

SECTION 15180 -HEATING AND COOLING PIPING

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Heating water piping, buried. 2. Heating water piping, above ground. 3. Heat pump water piping, above grade. 4. Equipment drains and over flows. 5. Unions and flanges.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports, sleeves, for placement by this section. 2. Section 15070 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration, and Seismic Control: Product requirements for Vibration Isolation for placement by this section. 3. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification: Product requirements for pipe identification for placement by this section. 4. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation: Product requirements for Piping Insulation for placement by this section. 5. Section 15110 - Valves: Product requirements for valves for placement by this section. 6. Section 15120 - Piping Specialties: Product and execution requirements for piping specialties used in heating and cooling piping systems. 7. Section 15125 - Piping Expansion Compensation: Product and execution requirements for expansion compensation devices use in heating and cooling piping systems. 8. Section 15130 - Pumps: Product and execution requirements for pumps used in heating and cooling piping systems. 9. Section 15185 - Chemical Water Treatment: Product and execution requirements for cleaning and chemical treatment of heating and cooling piping systems.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 2. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 3. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 4. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 5. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 6. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. 7. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

B/A#09100194 15180-1

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. A216/A216M - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High- Temperature Service. 3. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 4. ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 5. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 6. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 7. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 8. ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 9. ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications.

C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. 2. AWWA C110 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Grey- Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in. (75 mm through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids. 3. AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 4. AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.

E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves. 3. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 4. MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 5. MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 6. MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 7. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 8. MSS SP 85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded. 9. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 10. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.

B/A#09100194 15180-2

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in open systems.

B. Provide flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or other apparatus.

C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.

D. Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

E. Use globe or ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

F. Use spring loaded check valves on discharge of hot water and heat pump water pumps.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

B. Test Reports: Indicate results of piping system pressure test.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures and isolation.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves equipment and accessories.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for installation and changing components, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.

B/A#09100194 15180-3

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9 standard for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures.

B. Perform Work in accordance with applicable authority for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate trenching excavating bedding backfilling of buried piping systems with Specification.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year warranty on all products and equipment installed.

B/A#09100194 15180-4

1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish two packing kits for each size and valve type.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 HEAT PUMP WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; welded for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, black, grooved ends. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M carbon steel, grooved ends. 2. Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings meeting ASTM F1476. a. Housing Clamps: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, enamel coated, compatible with steel piping sizes, rigid type. b. Gasket: Elastomer composition for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F to 230 degrees F. c. Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F.

2.2 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASME B16.4, cast iron. 2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; flanged for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized, grooved ends. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M carbon steel, grooved ends. 2. Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings meeting ASTM F1476. a. Housing Clamps: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, enamel coated, compatible with steel piping sizes, rigid or flexible type. b. Gasket: Elastomer composition for operating temperature range from -30 degrees F to 230 degrees F. c. Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper. B/A#09100194 15180-5

2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F.

2.3 UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150 malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with soldered. 3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 4. PVC Piping: PVC. 5. CPVC Piping: CPVC.

B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150 forged steel, slip-on flanges. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, slip-on bronze flanges. 3. PVC Piping: PVC flanges. 4. CPVC Piping: CPVC flanges. 5. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets.

C. PVC Pipe Materials: For connections to equipment and valves with threaded connections, furnish solvent-weld socket to screwed joint adapters and unions, or ASTM D2464, Schedule 80, threaded, PVC pipe.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 15185.

3.3 INSTALLATION - INSERTS

A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.

B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.

B/A#09100194 15180-6

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4 inches and larger.

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 15060.

3.5 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Verify connection size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.

B. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 4 ft of cover.

C. Establish minimum separation from other services in accordance with local code.

D. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly.

E. Install heating water piping in accordance with ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9.

G. Install pipe on prepared bedding.

H. Route pipe in straight line.

I. Install piping specialties in accordance with Section 15120.

J. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.

K. Install shutoff and drain valves at locations indicated on Drawings in accordance with Section 15110.

3.6 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install heating water and heat pump water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.

B. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

E. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 15060. B/A#09100194 15180-7

F. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping.

G. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 15075.

H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section 15125.

I. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08310.

J. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. 1. Slope steam piping one inch in 40 feet in direction of flow. Use eccentric reducers to maintain bottom of pipe level. 2. Slope steam condensate piping one inch in 40 feet. Provide drip trap assembly at low points and before control valves. Run condensate lines from trap to nearest condensate receiver. Provide loop vents over trapped sections.

K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

L. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09900.

M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

N. Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section 15080.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Test heating water and chilled water piping systems in accordance with ASME B31.9.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 15180-8

SECTION 15184 -REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Refrigerant piping. 2. Unions, flanges, and couplings. 3. Refrigerant moisture and liquid indicators. 4. Valves. 5. Refrigerant strainers. 6. Refrigerant pressure regulators. 7. Refrigerant pressure relief valves. 8. Refrigerant solenoid valves. 9. Refrigerant expansion valves. 10. Electronic expansion valves.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Product requirements for painting for placement by this section. 2. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports, sleeves, and firestopping for placement by this section. 3. Section 15075 – Mechanical Identification: Product requirements for pipe identification for placement by this section. 4. Section 15080 – Mechanical Insulation: Product requirements for Piping Insulation for placement by this section. 5. Section 15180 – Heating and Cooling Piping: Piping materials for refrigerant systems. 6. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers. 2. ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 2. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. 3. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. 4. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.

D. ASTM International:

B/A#09100194 15184-1

1. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 2. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. 3. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 4. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products.

E. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

F. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems.

B. Provide flanges, unions, or couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, or couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves or equipment.

C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.

D. Flexible Connectors: Use at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb vibration.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. 2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. 3. Refrigerant Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information including capacity, component sizes, rough-in requirements, and service sizes for the following: a. Refrigerant moisture and liquid indicators. b. Refrigerant strainers. c. Refrigerant pressure regulators. d. Refrigerant pressure relief valves.

B/A#09100194 15184-2

e. Refrigerant filter-driers. f. Refrigerant solenoid valves. g. Refrigerant expansion valves. h. Electronic expansion valves.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures and isolation.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, equipment and refrigerant accessories.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for installation and changing components, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.5 code for installation of refrigerant piping systems.

B. Perform Work in accordance with authority having jurisdiction for welding hanger and support attachments to building structure.

C. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan code.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Dehydrate and charge refrigeration components including piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment. Maintain seal until connected into system.

C. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

B/A#09100194 15184-3

D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.

1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

1.11 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

1.14 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish two refrigerant oil test kits each containing everything required for conducting one test.

1.15 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish two refrigerant filter-dryer cartridges of each type.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F.

2.2 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS

A. 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.

B. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Copper Piping: Bronze.

B/A#09100194 15184-4

2. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene.

C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.

2.3 REFRIGERANT MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co. 2. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div. 3. Sporlan Valve Co. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Indicators: 1. Port: Single, UL listed. 2. Body: Copper or brass, flared or solder ends. 3. Sight glass: Color-coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap. 4. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig 5. Maximum working temperature: 200 degrees F.

2.4 VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co. 2. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div. 3. Sporlan Valve Co. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet solder or flared ends. 2. Phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and hand wheel. 3. Stainless steel spring, nylon seats, disc with positive back seating. 4. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig. 5. Maximum working temperature: 275 degrees F.

C. Packed Angle Valves: 1. Forged brass or nickel-plated forged steel, solder or flared ends. 2. Forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat with back seating, molded stem packing. 3. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig. 4. Maximum working temperature: 275 degrees F.

D. Ball Valves: 1. Two piece forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals, soldered ends. 2. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig. 3. Maximum working temperature: 300 degrees F.

B/A#09100194 15184-5

E. Service Valves: 1. Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, flared or solder ends. 2. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.

F. Refrigerant Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: a. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co. b. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div. c. Sporlan Valve Co. d. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2. Globe Type: a. Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide and disc holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc. b. Maximum working pressure: 425 psig. c. Maximum working temperature: 300 degrees F. 3. Straight Through Type: a. Spring, neoprene seat. b. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig. c. Maximum working temperature: 250 degrees F.

2.5 REFRIGERANT STRAINERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co. 2. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div. 3. Sporlan Valve Co. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements

B. Straight Line or Angle Line Type: 1. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass. 2. Maximum working pressure: 430 psig.

C. Straight Line, Non-Cleanable Type: 1. Steel shell, copper plated fittings, stainless steel wire screen.

2.6 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co. 2. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div. 3. Sporlan Valve Co. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Brass body, stainless steel diaphragm, direct acting, adjustable over 0 to 80 psig range, for maximum working pressure of 450 psig.

B/A#09100194 15184-6

2.7 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co. 2. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div. 3. Sporlan Valve Co. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Straight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and stamped with ASME UV and National Board Certification NB; for standard 300 psig setting; selected to ASHRAE 15.

2.8 REFRIGERANT SOLENOID VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co. 2. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div. 3. Sporlan Valve Co. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Valve: ARI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass or steel body and internal parts, synthetic seat, stainless steel stem and plunger assembly, integral strainer, with flared, solder, or threaded ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 450 300 psig. Stem designed to allow manual operation in case of coil failure.

C. Coil Assembly: UL 429, UL listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil, moisture and fungus proof, with surge protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction box with pilot light.

2.9 REFRIGERANT EXPANSION VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co. 2. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div. 3. Sporlan Valve Co. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Angle or Straight Through Type: ARI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal or external equalizer, bleed hole, mechanical pressure limit (maximum operating pressure MOP feature), adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb and remote bulb well.

C. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10 degrees F superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and oversized at part load.

2.10 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co.

B/A#09100194 15184-7

2. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div. 3. Sporlan Valve Co. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Valve: 1. Brass bodies with flared or solder connection, needle valve with floating needle and machined seat, stepper motor drive.

C. Evaporation Control System: 1. Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case, proportional integral control with adaptive superheat, maximum operating pressure function, pre- selection allowance for electrical defrost and hot gas bypass.

D. Refrigeration System Control: Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case, with proportional integral control of valve, on/off thermostat, air temperature alarm (high and low), solenoid valve control, liquid injection adaptive superheat control, maximum operating pressure function, night setback thermostat, timer for defrost control.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 15060.

3.4 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.

B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.

C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 15060.

B/A#09100194 15184-8

E. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 15075.

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08310.

H. Arrange refrigerant piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.

I. Flood refrigerant piping system with nitrogen when brazing.

J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds. Refer to Section 05120.

K. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09900.

L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

M. Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section 15080.

N. Provide replaceable cartridge filter-dryers, with isolation valves and bypass with valve.

O. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line.

P. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator.

Q. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.

R. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.

S. Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant.

T. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME B31.5.

3.5 INSTALLATION - REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES

A. Refrigerant Liquid Indicators: 1. Install line size liquid indicators in main liquid line downstream of condenser. 2. When receiver is provided, install line size liquid indicators in liquid line downstream of receiver. 3. Install line size liquid indicators downstream of liquid solenoid valves.

B. Refrigerant Valves:

B/A#09100194 15184-9

1. Install service valves on compressor suction and discharge. 2. Install gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet. 3. Install gage taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet. 4. Install check valves on compressor discharge. 5. Install check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems. 6. Install refrigerant charging valve in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve.

C. Strainers: 1. Install line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve. 2. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, install single main liquid-line strainer. 3. On steel piping systems, install strainer in suction line. 4. Install shut-off valves on each side of strainer.

D. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers. Install relief valve discharge piping to terminate outdoors.

E. Filter-Dryers: 1. Install permanent filter-dryers in low temperature systems. 2. Install permanent filter-dryer in systems containing hermetic compressors. 3. Install replaceable cartridge filter-dryer vertically in liquid line adjacent to receivers. 4. Install replaceable cartridge filter-dryer upstream of each solenoid valve.

F. Solenoid Valves: 1. Install in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-down compressor control. 2. Install in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems. 3. Install in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line when system shuts down.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements 01700 - Execution Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.

C. Pressure test refrigeration system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psig using electronic leak detector.

D. Repair leaks.

E. Retest until no leaks are detected.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 15184-10

SECTION 15185 -CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. System cleaner. 2. Closed system treatment (water). 3. By-pass Feeder. 4. System Filter. 5. Antifreeze. 6. Glycol Charging System.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15180 – Heating and Cooling Piping.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system schematic, equipment locations, and controls schematics, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. Product Data: Submit chemical treatment materials, chemicals, and equipment including electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit placement of equipment in systems, piping configuration, and connection requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturers Field Reports: Indicate start-up of treatment systems when completed and operating properly. Indicate analysis of system water after cleaning and after treatment.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and piping, including sampling points and location of chemical injectors.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on chemical feed pumps, agitators, and other equipment including spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs. Include step by step instructions on test procedures including target concentrations.

B/A #09100194 15185-1

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan code for addition of non- potable chemicals to building systems and for discharge to public sewers.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.

1.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year warranty on all products and equipment installed.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish monthly technical service visits, for one year starting at Date of Substantial Completion, to perform field inspections and make water analysis on site. Detail findings in writing on proper practices, chemical treating requirements and corrective actions needed. Submit two copies of field service report after each visit.

B. Furnish laboratory and technical assistance services during this maintenance period.

C. Furnish on site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency shutdown to properly evaluate success of water treatment program, and make recommendations in writing based upon these inspections.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish chemicals for treatment and testing during warranty period.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM CLEANER

A. Manufacturers: 1. Chem-Treat. 2. Dow Chemical.

B/A #09100194 15185-2

3. Union Carbide. 4. Enerco 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products; sodium tri-Poly phosphate and sodium molybdate.

C. Biocide; chlorine release agents including sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite, or microbiocides including quaternary ammonia compounds, tributyl tin oxide, methylene bis (thiocyanate), or isothiazolones.

2.2 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT (WATER)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Chem-Treat. 2. Dow Chemical. 3. Union Carbide. 4. Enerco 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Corrosion inhibitors; boron-nitrite, sodium nitrite and borax, sodium totyltriazole, low molecular weight polymers, phosphonates, sodium molybdate, or sulfites.

2.3 BY-PASS (POT) FEEDER

A. Five (5) gallon chemical feeder with quick opening cap for working pressure of 175 psig.

2.4 ANTIFREEZE SYSTEM

A. Geothermal Heat Pump Loop shall be provided with a complete antifreeze charge. This contractor shall furnish a premix antifreeze solution using propylene glycol. When the system is fully charged, the system shall be 20% antifreeze solution by volume. The premix solution shall be furnished in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be inhibited with a neutralizing agent to guarantee a PH of not less than 9. Acceptable manufacturers: Dow Chemical, Union Carbide, Enerco, and Chem-Treat.

2.5 Glycol Charging (GF-1)

A. Mixing Tank: 50 gallon polyethylene drum with fittings suitable for filling and pump for charging, 5 gallon graduated markings; molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator, and liquid level switch.

B. Controller: Digital display of system pressure with adjustable fill pressure set points.

B/A #09100194 15185-3

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Operate, fill, start and vent systems prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Concentration: 1. As recommended by manufacturer.

B. Heat Pump Water Systems: 1. Circulate for 48 hours, then drain systems as quickly as possible. 2. Refill with clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain. 3. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.

C. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and acceptance of Architect/Engineer.

D. Flush open systems with clean water for one hour minimum. Drain completely and refill.

E. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.

F. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is completed. Include disassembly of components as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install Work in accordance with State of Michigan code.

3.4 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT

A. Provide one 5 gal. feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves and interconnecting piping. Install around balancing valve downstream of circulating pumps as indicated on Drawings.

B. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Furnish two hour training course for operating personnel, instruction to include installation, care, maintenance, testing, and operation of water treatment systems. Arrange course at start up of systems.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15185-4

SECTION 15195 -GAS PIPING

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Natural gas piping above grade. 2. Unions and flanges. 3. Strainers. 4. Natural gas pressure regulators. 5. Natural gas pressure relief valves. 6. Gas Valve box.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports: Product requirements for pipe hangers and supports for placement by this section. 2. Section 15075 - Mechanical Identification: Product requirements for valve and pipe identification for placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 2. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. 3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. 4. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 3. ASTM B68 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube, Bright Annealed. 4. ASTM B75 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube. 5. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 6. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. 7. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. 8. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

B/A #09100194 15195 - 1

C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.

F. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.

G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 842 - Valves for Flammable Fluids.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems.

C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.

D. Use plug or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

B/A #09100194 15195 - 2

3. Piping Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information including capacity, rough-in requirements, and service sizes for the following: a. Strainers. b. Natural gas pressure regulators. c. Natural gas pressure relief valves.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves piping system, and system components.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for valves and gas pressure regulators installation instructions, spare parts lists, and exploded assembly views.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform natural gas Work in accordance with NFPA 54.

B. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures.

C. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan standard.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience approved by manufacturer.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect piping and fittings from soil and debris with temporary end caps and closures. Maintain in place until installation. Furnish temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

B/A #09100194 15195 - 3

1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate trenching excavating bedding backfilling of buried piping systems with requirements of Specification.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year warranty on all products and equipment installed.

1.13 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish two packing kits for each type and size valve.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; welded for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.

2.2 UNIONS AND FLANGES

2.3 STRAINERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Mueller Steam Specialty. 2. O.C. Keckley Company. 3. Spirax Sarco, Inc. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B/A #09100194 15195 - 4

B. 2 inch and Smaller: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

C. 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

D. 5 inch and Larger: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

2.4 NATURAL GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. Product Description: Spring loaded, general purpose, self-operating service regulator including internal relief type diaphragm assembly and vent valve. Diaphragm case can be rotated 360 degrees in relation to body. 1. Temperatures: minus 20 degrees F to 150 degrees F. 2. Body: Steel. 3. Spring case, lower diaphragm casing, union ring, seat ring and disk holder: Aluminum. 4. Disk, diaphragm, and O-ring: Nitrile. 5. Maximum inlet pressure: 150 psig 6. Furnish sizes 2 inches and smaller with threaded ends.

2.5 NATURAL GAS PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

A. Product Description: Spring loaded type relief valve. 1. Body: Aluminum. 2. Diaphragm: Nitrile. 3. Orifice: Brass. 4. Maximum operating temperature: 150 degrees F. 5. Inlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Outlet or Vent Connection: Same size as inlet connection.

2.6 GAS VALVE BOX

A. Manufacturers: 1. Metcraft Model A606. 2. Substitutions: Section 01600 – Product Requirements.

B. Valve box: Master gas valve box, fully recessed type 304 stainless steel bead blasted. Front flange and door to be polished satin finish with 3/16” plexiglass window. Continuous piano hinge on door with keyed lock. “Master Gas Valve” label on front of door.

C. Gas valve box shall house the lock-out type master shut-off valve, and the emergency solenoid shut-off valve.

B/A #09100194 15195 - 5

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.3 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 15060.

3.4 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54.

B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.

D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

F. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 15060.

G. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping.

H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

I. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with Section 08310.

J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, weld, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer.

K. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility company.

L. Install vent piping from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weatherproof hood.

B/A #09100194 15195 - 6

M. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not pre-finished, ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09900.

N. Install identification on piping systems including underground piping. Refer to Section 15075.

O. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

P. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.

Q. Install gas pressure regulator vent full size opening on regulator and terminate outdoors.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services. Pressure test natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15195 - 7

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A #09100194 15195 - 8

SECTION 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Water closets. 2. Lavatories. 3. Lavatory Insulation Kit 4. Sinks. 5. Bathtub. 6. Service sinks.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature for plumbing fixtures.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit literature and parts list.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan Code.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS (WC)

A. Manufacturers: 1. American Standard. 2. Crane. 3. Eljer. 4. Kohler 5. Toto 6. Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Bowl: See Drawing Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

C. Flush Valve: See Drawing Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

D. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts. Olsonite 95SSC.

B/A #09100194 15410 - 1

2.2 LAVATORIES (L)

A. Manufacturers: 1. American Standard. 2. Crane. 3. Eljer. 4. Kohler. 5. Toto. 6. Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Lavatory Fixture: See Drawing Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

C. Trim: See Drawing Plumbing Fixture Schedule. Chrome plated supply fitting with open grid strainer, water economy aerator. Chrome plated brass P-trap and arm with escutcheon. Provide ADA trap, waste insulation, and ASSE1070 thermostatic mixing valve as required for ADA compliance. Provide screw-driver check-stops.

D. Wall Mounted Carrier (as required): Cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs.

2.3 LAVATORY INSULATION KIT

A. Manufacturers: 1. Truebro. 2. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Where Lavatories require insulation for ADA compliance, furnish the following: Safety Covers conforming to ANSI A177.1 and consisting of insulation kit of molded closed cell vinyl construction, 3/16 inch thick, white color, for insulating tailpiece, P-trap, valves, and supply piping. Furnish with weep hole and angle valve access covers.

2.4 SINKS (S)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Dayton 2. Elkay 3. Just. 4. Willoughby. 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Bowl: See Drawing Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

B/A #09100194 15410 - 2

C. Trim: See Drawing Plumbing Fixture Schedule. ASME A112.18.1; vandal resistant aerator, Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon, screwdriver stop, rigid supplies.

2.5 BATHTUB (BT)

A. Manufacturers: 1. American Standard 2. Kohler 3. Toto 4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Cabinet: See Drawing Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

C. Trim: Concealed shower supply with single lever pressure balanced thermostatic mixing valves, bent shower arm with flow control and adjustable spray ball joint shower head and escutcheon.

D. Trim (ADA): ASME A112.18.1; Concealed shower supply with pressure balanced mixing valve, integral service stops, single lever, hand held shower with 60 inch flexible hose, vacuum breaker and 24” slide bar. Provide stainless steel horizontal L-shaped grab bar, and L-shaped fold-up cushioned set.

2.6 SERVICE SINKS (SS)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Eagle Group 2. Elkay 3. Just 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Bowl: See Drawing Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

C. Trim: See Drawing Plumbing Fixture Schedule.

D. Accessories: 5 feet of 1/2 inch diameter plain end reinforced rubber hose.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this section.

B. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough in and installation.

B/A #09100194 15410 - 3

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install Work in accordance with State of Michigan Code.

B. Install each fixture with chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies with screwdriver stops, reducers, and escutcheons.

C. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15410 - 4

SECTION 15480 -DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Commercial gas-fired water heaters.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation: Field applied insulation for domestic water heaters. 2. Section: 15140 - Domestic Water Piping: Supply connections to domestic water heaters. 3. Section 15195 - Gas Piping: Execution requirements for gas piping connections specified by this section. 4. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI Z21.10.3 - Gas Water Heaters - Vol. III Storage, with Input Ratings Above 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous Water Heaters.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME PTC 25 - Pressure Relief Devices. 2. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels.

D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.

E. United States Department of Energy: 1. DOE 10 CFR - Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate heat exchanger dimensions, size of taps, and performance data. Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, taps, and drains.

B/A #09100194 15480 - 1

B. Product Data: Submit dimensioned drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. Indicate pump type, capacity and power requirements. Submit certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Submit electrical characteristics and connection locations.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit mounting and support requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit replacement part numbers and availability.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to ASME for construction of water heaters. Provide boilers registered with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors.

B. Water Heater Performance Requirements: Equipment efficiency not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when tested in accordance with ANSI Z21.10.3.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Products storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept water heaters on site in original labeled cartons. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect heat exchangers and tanks with temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

B/A #09100194 15480 - 2

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide 18 month full warranty including all parts and labor from the date of substantial completion.

B. The pressure vessel shall be guaranteed against thermal shock for 10 years with a maximum temperature differential rating across the water heater of 100 °F.

C. The combustor and exhaust pipes (heat exchanger) shall be guaranteed against flue gas corrosion for a period of 5 years.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Aerco. 2. Fulton. 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Construction: Gas fired, condensing fire-tube design with positive pressure discharge. Burner shall have a minimum of 5:1 turndown. Heat exchanger/combustion chamber shall be a copper lined helical or Duplex Stainless Steel, fire tube design, baffle free, and warranted to withstand thermal shock. Working pressure shall be rated for 150 psig with a 150 psig relief valve.

C. Controls: 1. Provide with water heater controller/sequencer to control operation, staging, lead/lag, equal runtime, and maximize efficient operation. 2. Water heater controller/sequencer shall be provided capable of full communication with the EMCS in either Lon, BacNet, or Modbus protocols without any additional hardware, software, or programming.

D. Capacity: See plans.

E. The water heater shall be designed for operation in a condensing mode. The water heater shall have a minimum acceptable fuel-to-water efficiency of 90% at a return water temperature of 40°F and at the full rated input capacity of the water heater. Overall efficiency at the low fire rated input capacity will be 98%.

F. Venting: Provide manufacture approved venting materials.

2.2 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS

A. Water heater(s) shall be 120/1/60.

B/A #09100194 15480 - 3

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over water heaters.

B. Install water heater on concrete housekeeping pad, minimum 3-1/2 inches high and 6 inches larger than water heater base on each side.

C. Connect natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54.

D. Connect natural gas piping to water heater, full size of water heater gas train inlet. Arrange piping with clearances for burner removal and service.

E. Connect domestic hot water piping to supply and return water heater connections.

F. Install the following piping accessories. Refer to Section 15140. 1. On supply: a. Thermometer well and thermometer. b. Strainer. c. Pressure gage. d. Shutoff valve. 2. On return: a. Thermometer well and thermometer. b. Pressure gage. c. Shutoff valve.

G. Install the following piping accessories on natural gas piping connections. Refer to Section 15195. 1. Strainer. 2. Pressure gage. 3. Shutoff valve. 4. Pressure reducing valve.

H. Install discharge piping from relief valves and drain valves to nearest floor drain.

I. Install circulator and diaphragm expansion tank on water heater.

J. Install water heater trim and accessories furnished loose for field mounting.

K. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.

L. Install control wiring between water heater control panel and field mounted control devices.

M. Connect flue to water heater outlet, full size of outlet.

B/A #09100194 15480 - 4

N. The water heater shall be CSA approved as a direct vent water heater. A conventional chimney or stack shall not be required. Direct venting shall be accomplished with AL-29-4C stainless steel, single (or double) wall. Vent piping shall be installed in accordance with applicable national and local codes and per the water heater manufacturers’ recommendations.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15480 - 5

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

B/A #09100194 15480 - 6 SECTION 15540 FUEL-FIRED HEATERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Gas fired unit heaters.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15061 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for hangers for placement by this section. 2. Section 15072 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for vibration isolators for placement by this section. 3. Section 15195 - Facility Natural-Gas Piping: Product requirements for natural gas piping connected to gas-fired heaters. 4. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electrical connections specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI Z83.8 - Gas Unit Heaters.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 2. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 3. NFPA 211 - Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature and data indicating rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.

B/A #09100194 15540 - 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Gas-Fired Unit Heater Performance Requirements: Conform to minimum efficiency prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when tested in accordance with ANSI Z83.8.

B. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan code.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept heaters and controls on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Reznor. 2. Modine. 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, heat exchanger, burner, controls, and accessories: 1. Heating fuel: Natural gas fired. 2. Discharge Louvers: Individually adjustable horizontal louvers to match cabinet finish. 3. Gas Control: Single stage. 4. Ignition System: Electric direct ignition. 5. Control Voltage: 24 volt, 60 hertz. 6. Location: Suspended overhead.

B/A #09100194 15540 - 2 C. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, easily removed and secured access panels, insulated or double panel construction.

D. Supply Fan: Propeller type with direct drive.

E. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel welded construction.

F. Gas Burner: Power-vented with non-corrosive air blower with permanently lubricated motor.

G. Gas Burner Safety Controls: 1. Thermocouple sensor: Prevents opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven and stops gas flow on ignition failure. 2. Flame rollout switch: Installed on burner box and prevents operation. 3. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de-energizes burner on excessive bonnet temperature, automatic reset.

H. Controls: 1. Room Thermostat: Adjustable, low voltage, to control burner operation, and supply fan to maintain temperature setting.

I. Venting: Provide manufacture approved venting materials.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify space is ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with NFPA 90B and NFPA 54.

B. Installation - Natural Gas Piping: 1. Connect natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. 2. Connect natural gas piping to unit, full size of unit gas train inlet. Arrange piping with clearances for burner service. 3. Install the following piping accessories on natural gas piping connections. Refer to Section 15195. a. Strainer. b. Pressure gage.

B/A #09100194 15540 - 3 c. Shutoff valve. d. Pressure reducing valve.

C. Install vent connections in accordance with NFPA 211 and manufacturer’s instructions. Install vents, stacks, and combustion air ducting.

D. Install unit heaters with vibration isolation. Refer to Section 15072.

E. Provide hangers and supports for suspended units. Refer to Section 15061.

F. Provide connection to electrical power systems. Refer to Section 16150.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15540 - 4 SECTION 15739

SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Split System Air Conditioning Units

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15070 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration, and Seismic Control: Vibration isolators. 2. Section 15180 - Heating and Cooling Piping: Execution requirements for connection to drain piping specified by this section. 3. Section 15184 - Refrigerant Piping: Execution requirements for connection to refrigerant piping specified by this section. 4. Section 15910 - Direct Digital Controls: Controls remote from unit. 5. Section 15940 - Sequence of Operation: Sequences of operation applying to units in this section. 6. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Electrical connection to units.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment. 2. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 3. ARI 340/360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment. 4. ARI 365 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Condensing Units.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. 2. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

C. ASTM International: 1. ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.

E. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

B/A#09100194 15739 - 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit data indicating: 1. Cooling and heating capacities. 2. Dimensions. 3. Weights. 4. Rough-in connections and connection requirements. 5. Duct connections. 6. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 7. Controls. 8. Accessories.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan code.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept units and components on site in factory protective containers, with factory shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect units from weather and construction traffic by storing in dry, roofed location.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Furnish five year manufacturers warranty for compressors.

B. Furnish 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions for this maintenance period. Furnish capability of response time within hours.

B/A#09100194 15739 - 2 1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish one set for each unit of filters.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier Corp. 2. Lennox International 3. McQuay International 4. Rheem Manufacturing 5. The Trane Company 6. York International 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Split system consisting of air handling unit and condensing unit including cabinet, evaporator fan, refrigerant cooling coil, compressor, refrigeration circuit, condenser, electric heating coil, hot water heating coil, steam heating coil, air filters, controls, air handling unit accessories, condensing unit accessories, and refrigeration specialties.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify concrete pad for condensing unit is ready for unit installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION - AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to condensate drainage system. Refer to Section 15180.

B. Install components furnished loose for field mounting.

C. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Division 16.

3.3 INSTALLATION - CONDENSING UNIT

A. Install refrigerant piping from unit to condensing unit. Install refrigerant specialties furnished with unit.

B. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant.

B/A#09100194 15739 - 3 C. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.

D. Install control wiring between air handling unit, condensing unit, and field installed accessories.

E. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Division 16.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

B. Do not operate air handling units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 15739 - 4 SECTION 15740 -HEAT PUMPS

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Packaged Rooftop Heat Pumps. 2. Air Handling Units 3. Water to Air Heat Pumps.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15072 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for vibration isolators for placement by this section. 2. Section 15180 - Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements for condenser water and drain piping specified by this section. 3. Section 15184 - Refrigerant Piping: Execution requirements for refrigerant piping specified by this section. 4. Section 15670 - Refrigerant Condensing Units: Product requirements for condensing units used with air cooled units included in this section. 5. Section 15820 - Duct Accessories: Product requirements for flexible connections for placement by this section. 6. Section 15860 - Air Cleaning Devices: Product requirements for Air Filters for placement by this section. 7. Section 15910 - Direct Digital Controls: Execution requirements for connecting units to controls remote from unit specified in this section. 8. Section 15940 - Sequence of Operation: Sequences of operation applying to units in this section. 9. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electrical connection to units specified by this section. 10. Section 16227 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment: Product requirements for electric motors for placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

B. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:

B/A #09100194 15740 - 1 1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.

C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.

D. International Organization for Standardization: 1. ISO 13256-1 - Water-Source Heat Pumps - Testing and Rating for Performance - Part 1: Water-to-Air and Brine-to-Air Heat Pumps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Coefficient of Performance (COP), heat pump, heating - Ratio of rate of heat delivered to rate of energy input, in consistent units, for complete heat pump system, including compressor and, if applicable, auxiliary heat, under designated operating conditions.

B. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) - Ratio of net cooling capacity in Btu/h to total rate of electric input in watts under designated operating conditions.

C. Heating Seasonal Performance Factor (HSPF) - Total heating output of heat pump during its normal annual usage period for heating (in Btu) divided by total electric energy input during the same period.

D. Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio (SEER) - Total cooling output of an air conditioner during its normal annual usage period for cooling (in Btu) divided by total electric energy input during the same period (in Wh).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, rough-in connections, and duct connections of manufactured products and assemblies. Indicate electrical service with connection requirements.

C. Product Data: Submit drawings indicating capacity, weights, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Indicate electrical characteristics.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B/A #09100194 15740 - 2 B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls separate from units.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Water Cooled Equipment: 1. Cooling Performance Requirements: Conform to minimum EER prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when tested in accordance with ISO 13256- 1. 2. Heating Performance Requirements: Conform to minimum COP prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when tested in accordance with ISO 13256- 1.

B. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270.

C. Outside Air Damper Leakage: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.

D. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan Code.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept heat pump units on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect heat pump units from damage by providing temporary covers until construction is complete in adjacent space. Protect rooftop heat pump units from damage by storing off roof until roof mounting curbs are in place.

1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

B/A #09100194 15740 - 3 1.10 WARRANTY

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B. Furnish five year manufacturers warranty for Compressors.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish one set of filters fan belts for each unit.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOFTOP HEAT PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. AAON. 2. Annexaire 3. Innovent. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements

B. Product Description: Packaged rooftop unit shall include compressors, evaporator coils, filters, supply fans, dampers, water-cooled condensers, reheat coil, exhaust fans, energy recovery wheels, and unit controls.

C. Cabinet: Constructed of insulated R-13 foam double wall galvanized steel panel with thermal breaks, baked enamel finish, access doors or removable access panels with quick fasteners. Minimum 18 gage structural members, with access doors or removable panels of minimum 20 gage.

D. Supply Fans 1. Unit shall include direct drive, unhoused, backward curved, plenum supply fans. 2. Blowers and motors shall be dynamically balanced and mounted on rubber isolators. 3. Motors shall be standard efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated for 200,000 hours service with external lubrication points.

E. Exhaust Fans 1. Exhaust dampers shall be sized for 100% relief. 2. Fans and motors shall be dynamically balanced. 3. Motors shall be standard efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated for 200,000 hours service with external lubrication points.

B/A #09100194 15740 - 4 4. Access to exhaust fans shall be through double wall, hinged access doors with quarter turn handles.

F. Final Air Filters: MERV 13 minimum.

G. Roof Mounting Curb: 14 inches high, galvanized steel, channel frame with gaskets, nailer strips.

H. Supply Air Coil: 1. Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and galvanized steel end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled. 2. Coils shall be furnished with a factory installed thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Cooling coils shall include double sloped 304 stainless steel drain pans

I. Refrigeration System 1. Unit shall be factory charged with R-410A refrigerant. 2. Compressors shall be scroll type with thermal overload protection, independently circuited, and carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty. 3. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated service compartment which can be accessed without affecting unit operation. Lockable hinged compressor access doors shall be fabricated of double wall, rigid polyurethane foam insulated panels to prevent the transmission of noise outside the cabinet. 4. Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan with rubber vibration isolators. 5. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow control. 6. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant safety controls, Schrader type service fittings on both the high pressure and low pressure sides, and factory installed liquid line filter driers. 7. Unit shall include a variable capacity scroll compressor on the lead refrigeration circuit which shall be capable of modulation from 10-100% of its capacity. 8. Lead refrigeration circuit shall be provided with hot gas reheat coil, modulating valves, electronic controller, supply air temperature sensor and a dehumidification control signal terminal. 9. Unit shall be configured as a water-source heat pump. Each refrigeration circuit shall each be equipped with a factory installed liquid line filter drier with check valve, reversing valve, and thermal expansion valves on both the indoor coil and refrigerant-to-water heat exchanger. Reversing valve shall energize during the heat pump heating mode of operation.

B/A #09100194 15740 - 5 10. Each capacity stage shall be equipped with a 5 minute off, delay timer to prevent compressor short cycling. 11. Each capacity stage shall be equipped with an adjustable, 20 second delay timer to prevent multiple capacity stages from starting all at once.

J. Water-Cooled Condensers 1. Water-cooled condensing section shall contain plate type, heat exchangers located in an insulated vestibule. Heat exchangers shall be circuited in a counter flow arrangement to the refrigerant system. Plates shall be stainless steel. Each heat exchanger shall be provided with a removable and cleanable type, basket filter on the waterside circuit. Field piping connections shall be made at each plate heat exchanger within the condensing section of the rooftop unit. Maximum operating pressure on the water side of the condenser shall be 125 psi. 2. Each heat exchanger circuit shall have a factory installed ball valve for water balancing. 3. Each heat exchanger circuit shall have a flow switch that shuts down the compressors if water flow to the condenser is interrupted. 4. Each heat exchanger shall have a factory installed compressor head pressure control to allow operation below 65°F condenser water temperature.

K. Energy Recovery 1. Unit shall contain a factory mounted and tested energy recovery wheel. The energy recovery wheel shall be mounted in a rigid frame containing the wheel drive motor, drive belt, wheel seals and bearings. Frame shall slide out for service and removal from the cabinet. 2. Wheels shall be wound continuously with one flat and one structured layer in an ideal parallel plate geometry providing laminar flow and minimum pressure drop-to-efficiency ratios. The layers shall be effectively captured in stainless steel wheel frames or aluminum and stainless steel segment frames that provide a rigid and self-supporting matrix. 3. Wheels shall be provided with removable energy transfer matrix. Wheel frame construction shall be a welded hub, spoke and rim assembly of stainless, plated and/or coated steel and shall be self-supporting without matrix segments in place. Segments shall be removable without the use of tools to facilitate maintenance and cleaning. Wheel bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 life in excess of 400,000 hours. Rim shall be continuous rolled stainless steel and the wheel shall be connected to the shaft by means of taper locks. 4. The energy recovery cassette shall be an Underwriters Laboratories Recognized Component for electrical and fire safety. The wheel drive motor shall be an Underwriters Laboratory Recognized. Thermal performance shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers

B/A #09100194 15740 - 6 5. Unit shall include pleated panel outside air pre-filters with a MERV rating of 7 and a final filter with a MERV reating of 13, upstream of the wheels. Unit shall include pleated panel exhaust air filters with a MERV rating of 13, upstream of the wheels. 6. Total energy recovery wheels shall be coated with silica gel desiccant permanently bonded by a process without the use of binders or adhesives, which may degrade desiccant performance. The substrate shall be lightweight polymer and shall not degrade nor require additional coatings for application in marine or coastal environments. Coated segments shall be washable with detergent or alkaline coil cleaner and water. Desiccant shall not dissolve nor deliquesce in the presence of water or high humidity. 7. Unit shall include energy recovery wheel defrost control which includes an adjustable temperature sensor and timer wired to periodically stop the wheel rotation.

L. Controls 1. The unit shall include a factory installed microprocessor based unit controller which controls all functions and operation of the unit including the compressor(s), supply fan motor, exhaust fan outside air dampers, and energy recovery wheel. 2. The unit controller shall provide full 2-way communication/integration with EMCS via BacNet or LON.

2.2 AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. Manufacturers: 1. AAON. 2. Annexaire 3. Innovent. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements

B. Product Description: Modular air handling unit shall include compressors, evaporator coils, filters, supply fans, dampers, water-cooled condensers, reheat coil, exhaust fans, energy recovery wheels, and unit controls.

D. Supply Fans

B/A #09100194 15740 - 7 1. Unit shall include direct drive, unhoused, backward curved, plenum supply fans. 2. Blowers and motors shall be dynamically balanced and mounted on rubber isolators. 3. Motors shall be standard efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated for 200,000 hours service with external lubrication points.

F. Final Air Filters: MERV 13 minimum.

G. Supply Air Coil: 1. Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and galvanized steel end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled. 2. Coils shall be furnished with a factory installed thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Cooling coils shall include double sloped 304 stainless steel drain pans

H. Refrigeration System 1. Unit shall be factory charged with R-410A refrigerant. 2. Compressors shall be scroll type with thermal overload protection, independently circuited, and carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty. 3. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated service compartment which can be accessed without affecting unit operation. Lockable hinged compressor access doors shall be fabricated of double wall, rigid polyurethane foam insulated panels to prevent the transmission of noise outside the cabinet. 4. Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan with rubber vibration isolators. 5. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow control. 6. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant safety controls, Schrader type service fittings on both the high pressure and low pressure sides, and factory installed liquid line filter driers. 7. Unit shall include a variable capacity scroll compressor on the lead refrigeration circuit which shall be capable of modulation from 10-100% of its capacity.

B/A #09100194 15740 - 8 8. Lead refrigeration circuit shall be provided with hot gas reheat coil, modulating valves, electronic controller, supply air temperature sensor and a dehumidification control signal terminal. 9. Unit shall be configured as a water-source heat pump. Each refrigeration circuit shall each be equipped with a factory installed liquid line filter drier with check valve, reversing valve, and thermal expansion valves on both the air coil and refrigerant-to-water heat exchanger. Reversing valve shall energize during the heat pump heating mode of operation. 10. Each capacity stage shall be equipped with a 5 minute off, delay timer to prevent compressor short cycling. 11. Each capacity stage shall be equipped with an adjustable, 20 second delay timer to prevent multiple capacity stages from starting all at once.

I. Water-Cooled Condensers 1. Water-cooled condensing section shall contain plate type, heat exchangers located in an insulated vestibule. Heat exchangers shall be circuited in a counter flow arrangement to the refrigerant system. Plates shall be stainless steel. Each heat exchanger shall be provided with a removable and cleanable type, basket filter on the waterside circuit. Field piping connections shall be made at each plate heat exchanger within the condensing section of the unit. Maximum operating pressure on the water side of the condenser shall be 125 psi. 2. Each heat exchanger circuit shall have a factory installed ball valve for water balancing. 3. Each heat exchanger circuit shall have a flow switch that shuts down the compressors if water flow to the condenser is interrupted. 4. Each heat exchanger shall have a factory installed compressor head pressure control to allow operation below 65°F condenser water temperature.

J. Energy Recovery 1. Unit shall contain a factory mounted and tested energy recovery wheel. The energy recovery wheel shall be mounted in a rigid frame containing the wheel drive motor, drive belt, wheel seals and bearings. Frame shall slide out for service and removal from the cabinet. 2. Wheels shall be wound continuously with one flat and one structured layer in an ideal parallel plate geometry providing laminar flow and minimum pressure drop-to-efficiency ratios. The layers shall be effectively captured in stainless steel wheel frames or aluminum and stainless steel segment frames that provide a rigid and self-supporting matrix. 3. Wheels shall be provided with removable energy transfer matrix. Wheel frame construction shall be a welded hub, spoke and rim assembly of stainless, plated and/or coated steel and shall be self-supporting without matrix segments in place. Segments shall be removable without the use of tools to facilitate maintenance and cleaning. Wheel bearings shall be

B/A #09100194 15740 - 9 4. The energy recovery cassette shall be an Underwriters Laboratories Recognized Component for electrical and fire safety. The wheel drive motor shall be an Underwriters Laboratory Recognized. Thermal performance shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers and AHRI Standard 1060, Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment. Cassettes shall be listed in the AHRI Certified Products. 5. Unit shall include pleated panel outside air pre-filters with a MERV rating of 7 and a final filter with a MERV reating of 13, upstream of the wheels. Unit shall include pleated panel exhaust air filters with a MERV rating of 13, upstream of the wheels. 6. Total energy recovery wheels shall be coated with silica gel desiccant permanently bonded by a process without the use of binders or adhesives, which may degrade desiccant performance. The substrate shall be lightweight polymer and shall not degrade nor require additional coatings for application in marine or coastal environments. Coated segments shall be washable with detergent or alkaline coil cleaner and water. Desiccant shall not dissolve nor deliquesce in the presence of water or high humidity. 7. Unit shall include energy recovery wheel defrost control which includes an adjustable temperature sensor and timer wired to periodically stop the wheel rotation.

K. Controls 1. The unit shall include a factory installed microprocessor based unit controller which controls all functions and operation of the unit including the compressor(s), supply fan motor, exhaust fan outside air dampers, and energy recovery wheel. 2. The unit controller shall provide full 2-way communication/integration with EMCS via BacNet or LON.

2.3 AIR HANDLING UNIT WITH REMOTE CONDENSER

A. Manufacturers: 1. AAON. 2. Annexaire 3. Innovent. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements

B. Product Description: Modular air handling unit shall include evaporator coils, filters, supply fans, dampers, reheat coil, exhaust fans, energy recovery wheels,

B/A #09100194 15740 - 10 C. Cabinet: Constructed of insulated R-13 foam double wall galvanized steel panel with thermal breaks, baked enamel finish, access doors or removable access panels with quick fasteners. Minimum 18 gage structural members, with access doors or removable panels of minimum 20 gage.

F. Final Air Filters: MERV 13 minimum.

H. Energy Recovery 1. Unit shall contain a factory mounted and tested energy recovery wheel. The energy recovery wheel shall be mounted in a rigid frame containing the wheel drive motor, drive belt, wheel seals and bearings. Frame shall slide out for service and removal from the cabinet. 2. Wheels shall be wound continuously with one flat and one structured layer in an ideal parallel plate geometry providing laminar flow and minimum pressure drop-to-efficiency ratios. The layers shall be effectively captured in stainless steel wheel frames or aluminum and stainless steel segment frames that provide a rigid and self-supporting matrix.

B/A #09100194 15740 - 11 3. Wheels shall be provided with removable energy transfer matrix. Wheel frame construction shall be a welded hub, spoke and rim assembly of stainless, plated and/or coated steel and shall be self-supporting without matrix segments in place. Segments shall be removable without the use of tools to facilitate maintenance and cleaning. Wheel bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 life in excess of 400,000 hours. Rim shall be continuous rolled stainless steel and the wheel shall be connected to the shaft by means of taper locks. 4. The energy recovery cassette shall be an Underwriters Laboratories Recognized Component for electrical and fire safety. The wheel drive motor shall be an Underwriters Laboratory Recognized. Thermal performance shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers and AHRI Standard 1060, Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment. Cassettes shall be listed in the AHRI Certified Products. 5. Unit shall include pleated panel outside air pre-filters with a MERV rating of 7 and a final filter with a MERV reating of 13, upstream of the wheels. Unit shall include pleated panel exhaust air filters with a MERV rating of 13, upstream of the wheels. 6. Total energy recovery wheels shall be coated with silica gel desiccant permanently bonded by a process without the use of binders or adhesives, which may degrade desiccant performance. The substrate shall be lightweight polymer and shall not degrade nor require additional coatings for application in marine or coastal environments. Coated segments shall be washable with detergent or alkaline coil cleaner and water. Desiccant shall not dissolve nor deliquesce in the presence of water or high humidity. 7. Unit shall include energy recovery wheel defrost control which includes an adjustable temperature sensor and timer wired to periodically stop the wheel rotation.

I. Remote Condensing Unit (CC-1) 1. Cabinet a. Factory painted galvanized sheet construction with hinged service doors. 2. Refrigeration System a. Unit shall be factory charged with R-410A refrigerant. b. Compressors shall be scroll type with thermal overload protection, independently circuited, and carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty. c. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated service compartment which can be accessed without affecting unit operation. Lockable hinged compressor access doors shall be fabricated of double wall, rigid polyurethane foam insulated panels to prevent the transmission of noise outside the cabinet. d. Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan with rubber vibration isolators.

B/A #09100194 15740 - 12 e. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow control. f. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant safety controls, Schrader type service fittings on both the high pressure and low pressure sides, and factory installed liquid line filter driers. g. Unit shall include a variable capacity scroll compressor on the lead refrigeration circuit which shall be capable of modulation from 10-100% of its capacity. h. Lead refrigeration circuit shall be provided with hot gas reheat coil, modulating valves, electronic controller, supply air temperature sensor and a dehumidification control signal terminal. i. Unit shall be configured as a water-source heat pump. Each refrigeration circuit shall each be equipped with a factory installed liquid line filter drier with check valve, reversing valve, and thermal expansion valves on both the air coil and refrigerant-to-water heat exchanger. Reversing valve shall energize during the heat pump heating mode of operation. j. Each capacity stage shall be equipped with a 5 minute off, delay timer to prevent compressor short cycling. k. Each capacity stage shall be equipped with an adjustable, 20 second delay timer to prevent multiple capacity stages from starting all at once. 3. Water-Cooled Condensers a. Water-cooled condensing section shall contain plate type, heat exchangers located in an insulated vestibule. Heat exchangers shall be circuited in a counter flow arrangement to the refrigerant system. Plates shall be stainless steel. Each heat exchanger shall be provided with a removable and cleanable type, basket filter on the waterside circuit. Field piping connections shall be made at each plate heat exchanger within the condensing section of the unit. Maximum operating pressure on the water side of the condenser shall be 125 psi. b. Each heat exchanger circuit shall have a factory installed ball valve for water balancing. c. Each heat exchanger circuit shall have a flow switch that shuts down the compressors if water flow to the condenser is interrupted. d. Each heat exchanger shall have a factory installed compressor head pressure control to allow operation below 65°F condenser water temperature.

J. Controls 1. The unit shall include a factory installed microprocessor based unit controller which controls all functions and operation of the unit including the compressor(s), supply fan motor, exhaust fan outside air dampers, and energy recovery wheel. 2. The unit controller shall provide full 2-way communication/integration with EMCS via BacNet or LON.

B/A #09100194 15740 - 13 2.4 WATER TO AIR HEAT PUMP

A. Manufacturers: 1. Climate Master. 2. FHP Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Water Furnace International. 4. Carrier. 5. McQuay. 6. Trane. 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements

B. Product Description: Packaged, self-contained, factory assembled, pre-wired unit, consisting of cabinet, compressor, condensing coil, evaporator fan, evaporator coil, air filters, and controls; fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil.

C. Assembly: Up flow or Horizontal flow air delivery, in draw-through configuration as indicated on Drawings.

D. Cabinet: 1. Frame and Panels: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed access-doors or panels. 2. Insulation: Minimum 1/2-inch thick acoustic duct liner for lining cabinet interior. 3. Drain Pan: Stainless steel construction.

E. Supply Air Fan: 1. Fan: Direct drive, double width, double inlet, forward curved centrifugal fan, statically and dynamically balanced, resiliently mounted.

F. Compressor: Hermetically sealed, 3600 rpm maximum resiliently mounted with positive lubrication and internal motor protection.

G. Supply Air Coil: 1. Direct expansion coiling coil of copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with epoxy coating. 2. Refrigeration circuit with expansion device, and charging valves.

H. Condenser: 1. Water Cooled Condenser: Co-Axial, copper tube in copper tube or shell and tube with copper tubes in steel shell with water temperature actuated water-regulating valve.

I. Air Filters: Easily removed 2 inch thick disposable type 30% efficiency based on ASHRAE 52.1.

B/A #09100194 15740 - 14 J. Controls: Factory wired and tested. Each water source heat pump controlled by full-communicating microprocessor based controller with resident control logic. Furnish controller with the following features: 1. 24 volt AC control transformer with integral circuit breaker 2. Random start 3. Anti-short cycle protection 4. Condensate overflow safeties 5. Brownout protection. 6. Furnish status for the following: a. Heating or cooling b. Occupied or unoccupied cycle c. Fan d. Filter 7. Capability of full communication with the EMCS via BacNet or LON Interface. 8. Illuminated LEDs on unit controller to show status and diagnostic information.

K. Zone sensor: Shall have override button, temperature adjustment, and digital temperature display.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

C. Verify concrete housekeeping pad is sized and located correctly.

D. Verify piping rough-in is at correct location.

E. Verify electrical rough-in is at correct location.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install rooftop units on factory built roof-mounting curb with watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level.

B. Install unit on concrete housekeeping pad, minimum 3-1/2 inches high and 6 inches larger than unit on each side. Refer to Section 03300.

B/A #09100194 15740 - 15 C. Connect units to supply and return ductwork with flexible connections. Refer to Section 15820.

D. Install the following piping accessories on condenser water piping connections. Refer to Section 15180. 1. On inlet: a. Thermometer well for temperature limit controller. b. Thermometer well and thermometer. c. Strainer. d. Flow switch. e. Flexible pipe connection. f. Pressure gage. g. Shut-off valve. 2. On outlet: a. Thermometer well and thermometer. b. Flexible pipe connection. c. Pressure gage. d. Shut-off and Balancing valve.

E. Install condensate piping from drain pan to nearest floor drain or hub outlet.

F. Install accessories furnished loose for field mounting.

G. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.

H. Install control wiring between unit control panel and field mounted control devices.

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers’ field services.

B. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing and checkout.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units.

C. Vacuum clean coils and inside of cabinets.

D. Touch up marred or scratched surfaces of factory finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer.

B/A #09100194 15740 - 16 E. Install new throwaway filters in units after Substantial Completion.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.

B. Demonstrate unit operation and maintenance.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for starting and adjusting.

B. Protect finished surfaces of cabinets with protective covers during remainder of construction.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15740 - 17

B/A #09100194 15740 - 18

SECTION 15810 -DUCTS

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Duct Materials. 2. Flexible ducts. 3. Insulated flexible ducts. 4. Single wall spiral round ducts. 5. Single wall spiral flat oval ducts. 6. Double wall insulated ducts. 7. Transverse duct connection system. 8. Casings. 9. Ductwork fabrication. 10. Duct cleaning.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Product requirements for concrete for placement by this section. 2. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating specified by this section. 3. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports: Product requirements for hangers, supports and sleeves for placement by this section. 4. Section 15820 - Duct Accessories: Product requirements for duct accessories for placement by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A90/A90M - Standard Test Method for Weight Mass of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings. 3. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 4. ASTM A568/A568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for. 5. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 6. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold- Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.

B/A #09100194 15810 - 1

7. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 8. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 2. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 3. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards. 2. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 3. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is not permitted except by written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and flexible.

B. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B and NFPA 96 standards.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B/A #09100194 15810 - 2

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers.

C. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant.

1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, lock- forming quality, having G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90/A90M.

B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A1008/A1008M.

C. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength.

D. Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A167, Type 304. 316.

E. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.

F. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded.

2.2 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Product Description: Two ply vinyl film supported by helical wound spring steel wire. 1. Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative. 2. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F.

B/A #09100194 15810 - 3

2.3 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Product Description: Two ply vinyl film supported by helical wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg negative. 2. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F. 4. Thermal Resistance: 4.2 square feet-hour-degree F per BTU.

2.4 SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 2. Semco Incorporated. 3. Tangent Air Corp. 4. Universal Spiral Air. 5. Eastern Sheet Metal. 6. LaPine Metal Products. 7. Lindab.

2.5 SINGLE WALL SPIRAL FLAT OVAL DUCTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 2. Semco Incorporated. 3. Tangent Air Corp. 4. Spiral Mfg. Co., Inc. 5. Universal Spiral Air. 6. Eastern Sheet Metal. 7. LaPine metal Products. 8. Lindab. 9. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct constructed of galvanized steel; rated for 10 inches wg pressure.

C. Joints: Either fully welded or bolted flange with gasket material in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Construct duct with the following minimum gauges: Major Axis Dimension Gauge 1. 7 inches to 24 inches 24 2. 25 inches to 48 inches 22 3. 50 inches to 70 inches 20 4. 72 inches to 82 inches 18 5. 84 inches and larger 16

E. Construct fittings with the following minimum gauges:

B/A #09100194 15810 - 4

Major Axis Fitting Dimension Gauge 1. 7 inches to 36 inches 20 2. 37 inches to 60 inches 18 3. 62 inches and larger 16

2.6 TRANSVERSE DUCT CONNECTION SYSTEM

A. Product Description: SMACNA "E" rated, SMACNA "F" rated or SMACNA "J" rated rigidity class connection, interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner clips.

2.7 CASINGS

A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and construct for operating pressures indicated.

B. Reinforce access door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles. Furnish hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection.

C. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Furnish 16 gage back facing and 22 gage perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers. Construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb./cu ft minimum glass fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gage.

2.8 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and support rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and as indicated on Drawings. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

B. Fabricate and support round ducts with longitudinal seams in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible (Round Duct Construction Standards), and as indicated on Drawings. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.

B/A #09100194 15810 - 5

E. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.

F. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45- degree lateral wye takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Ductwork to be sealed to SMACNA seal class A.

B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

C. Use crimp joints with or without bead or beaded sleeve couplings for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller.

D. Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with Section 15060.

E. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

G. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swing so fan static pressure holds door in closed position.

H. Casings: Install floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. Refer to Section 03300. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, furnish liner of 18 gage galvanized expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields.

I. Install kitchen range hoods in accordance with NFPA 96.

J. All exposed ductwork in finished spaces shall be spiral construction and paintable.

3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Install openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Install pitot tube openings for testing of systems. Install pitot tube complete with metal can with spring device or screw to prevent air leakage.

B/A #09100194 15810 - 6

Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside metal ring.

B. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.

C. Connect air terminal units to supply ducts directly or with five foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air flow, clean one half of system completely before proceeding to other half. Protect equipment with potential to be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.

3.5 SCHEDULES DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE

AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Supply Steel

Return and Relief Steel, Aluminum

General Exhaust Steel, Aluminum

Outside Air Intake Steel

Combustion Air Steel

DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE

AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS

Constant Volume Supply Low

Return and Relief Low

General Exhaust Low

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15810 - 7

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

B/A #09100194 15810 - 8

SECTION 15820 -DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Back-draft dampers. 2. Combination fire-and-smoke dampers. 3. Duct access doors. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Smoke dampers. 6. Volume control dampers. 7. Flexible duct connections 8. Duct test holes.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15810 - Ducts: Requirements for duct construction and pressure classifications. 2. Section 15910 - Direct Digital Controls: Execution and Product requirements for connection and control of Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers for placement by this section. 3. Section 16150 - Wiring Devices: Execution requirements for connection of electrical Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 2. NFPA 92A - Recommended Practice for Smoke-Control Systems.

B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service. 2. UL 555 - Fire Dampers. 3. UL 555S - Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of access doors.

B/A #09100194 15820 - 1

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan standard.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work where appropriate with building control Work.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish two of each size and type of fusible link.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 BACK-DRAFT DAMPERS

A. Product Description: Multi-Blade, back-draft dampers: Parallel-action, gravity- balanced, Galvanized 16 gage thick steel, or extruded aluminum. Blades, maximum 6 inch width, center pivoted, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges. Blades linked together in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin. Furnish dampers with adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

B/A #09100194 15820 - 2

B. Fabrication: Rigid and close fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, furnish minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12 inches square, secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 18 inches Square: Furnish two hinges and two sash locks. 3. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 4. Larger Sizes: Furnish additional hinge. 5. Access panels with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.3 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and manufacturer’s condition of listing. Permanently mark dampers for use in dynamic systems.

B. Ceiling Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125 inch ceramic fiber on top side, with locking clip.

C. Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and lightweight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket.

D. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Furnish stainless steel closure springs and latches for closure under airflow conditions. Configure with blades out of air stream.

E. Multiple Blade Dampers: 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil- impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock.

F. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F with adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers.

2.4 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 5555.

B. Dampers: UL Class 1 multiple blade type fire damper, normally open automatically operated by electric actuator.

C. Electro Thermal Link: Fusible link melting at 165 degrees F; 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz; UL listed and labeled.

2.5 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated on Drawings.

B/A #09100194 15820 - 3

B. Splitter Dampers: 1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in both dimensions, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. 2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod. 3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw. 4. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.

C. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized frame channel with suitable hardware.

D. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, furnish end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, furnish oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. Furnish closed end bearings on ducts having pressure classification over 2 inches wg.

E. Quadrants: 1. Furnish locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches furnish regulator at both ends.

2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated on Drawings.

B. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.

2.7 DUCT TEST HOLES

A. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Furnish extended neck fittings to clear insulation.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify rated walls are ready for fire damper installation.

B. Verify ducts and equipment installation are ready for accessories.

C. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

B/A #09100194 15820 - 4

3.2 INSTALLATION.

A. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15810 for duct construction and pressure class.

B. Install back-draft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated on Drawings.

C. Install duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and as indicated on Drawings. Install at locations for cleaning kitchen exhaust ductwork in accordance with NFPA 96. Install minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access. Review locations prior to fabrication.

D. Install temporary duct test holes required for testing and balancing purposes. Cut or drill in ducts. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

E. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers and smoke dampers at locations as indicated on Drawings. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

F. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92A.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate re-setting of fire and smoke dampers to Owner's representative.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15820 - 5

B/A #09100194 15820 - 6 SECTION 15830 FANS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Downblast centrifugal roof fans. 2. Ceiling fans. 3. Roof ventilators.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15072 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for resilient mountings and snubbers for fans for placement by this section. 2. Section 15081 - HVAC Insulation: Product requirements for power ventilators for placement by this section. 3. Section 15810 - Ducts: Product requirements for hangers for placement by this section. 4. Section 15820 - Duct Accessories: Product requirements for duct accessories for placement by this section. 5. Section 15910 - Direct Digital Controls: Controls remote from unit. 6. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Execution and product requirements for connecting equipment specified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association: 1. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. ABMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

B. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook. 2. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans. 3. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating. 4. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. 5. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.

C. American Refrigeration Institute: 1. ARI 1060 - Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment Certification Equipment Program.

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:

B/A #09100194 15830 - 1 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. 2. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 705 - Power Ventilators.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit data on each type of fan and include accessories, fan curves with specified operating point plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal.

B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300,and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.

C. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705.

D. Balance Quality: Conform to AMCA 204.

E. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan code.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years experience.

B/A #09100194 15830 - 2 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.

1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DOWNBLAST CENTRIFUGAL ROOF FANS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck Corp. 2. Loren Cook Company 3. Penn Ventilation 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Fan Unit: Downblast type. direct drive, with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor; aluminum wire bird screen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets.

C. Motor: Open drip proof.

D. Roof Curb: 12 inch high of aluminum construction with continuously welded seams, built-in cant strips, 1 inch insulation and curb bottom, and factory installed nailer strip.

E. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in fan housing for thermal overload protected motor, NEMA 1 enclosure.

F. Accessories: 1. Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked. 2. Fan speed controller.

2.2 CEILING FANS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck Corp. 2. Loren Cook Company

B/A #09100194 15830 - 3 3. Penn Ventilation 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Centrifugal Fan Unit: Direct driven with galvanized steel housing lined with 1/2 inch acoustic insulation, resilient mounted motor, gravity backdraft damper in discharge opening, integral outlet duct collar.

C. Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor.

D. Grille: Molded white plastic.

E. Wheel: Centrifugal forward curved type constructed of injection molded or polypropylene resin.

F. Motor: Open drip proof type with permanently lubricated sealed bearings and thermal overload protection.

G. Accessories: 1. Wall cap with rectangular duct inlet. 2. Rubber-in-shear vibration isolator.

2.3 GRAVITY ROOF VENTILATORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck Corp 2. Loren Cook Company 3. Penn Ventilation 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Square type, with aluminum housing; aluminum wire bird screen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets.

C. Roof Curb: 12 inch high of aluminum construction with continuously welded seams, built-in cant strips, 1 inch insulation and curb bottom, and factory installed nailer strip.

D. Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked.

B/A #09100194 15830 - 4 PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify roof curbs are installed and dimensions are as instructed by manufacturer.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Furnish roof curbs for installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Secure roof fans and gravity ventilators with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb.

B. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof and wall exhaust fans and gravity ventilators used in relief air applications.

C. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling fans and as indicated on Drawings.

D. Install safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.

E. Install backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated on Drawings. Refer to Section 15820.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. Vacuum clean coils and inside of fan cabinet.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

B. Do not operate fans for until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15830 - 5

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

B/A #09100194 15830 - 6

SECTION 15850 -AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Diffusers. 2. Registers 3. Grilles.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Execution and product requirements for Painting of ductwork visible behind outlets and inlets specified by this section. 2. Section 15820 - Duct Accessories: Volume dampers for inlets and outlets. 3. Section 15905 - HVAC Instrumentation: Operators for adjustable louvers. 4. Section 15910 - Direct Digital Controls: Operators for adjustable louvers.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.: 1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets.

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors: 1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit sizes, finish, and type of mounting. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Test and rate diffuser, register, and grille performance in accordance with ASHRAE 70.

B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500.

B/A #09100194 15850 - 1

C. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan standard.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

2.1 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS (S-1, S-2, S-3)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carnes. 2. E. H Price Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Titus Model TMS. 6. Tuttle & Bailey. 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Type: Square, stamped, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern.

C. Frame: As shown on drawings. In plaster ceilings, furnish plaster frame and ceiling frame.

D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish.

2.2 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES (S-4)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carnes 2. E. H Price Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Titus Model 300R. 6. Tuttle & Bailey. 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 1-3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face, double deflection.

C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.

D. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, with factory baked enamel off-white finish.

B/A #09100194 15850 - 2

E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face.

2.3 CEILING GRID CORE EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES (E-1, E-2, R-1, R-2, R-3)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carnes 2. E. H Price Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Titus Model 50F. 6. Tuttle & Bailey 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Type: Fixed grilles of 1/2 x 1/2 x 1/2 inch louvers.

C. Fabrication: Aluminum with baked enamel off-white finish.

D. Frame: Refer to plans for frame type. Channel lay-in frame for suspended grid ceilings, 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting for other locations.

E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed-blade type with removable key operator, operable from face for grilles in drywall ceilings only.

2.4 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES (E-3, R-3)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carnes. 2. E. H Price Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Titus Model 350RL. 6. Tuttle & Bailey 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Type: Streamlined blades, 1-1/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, 35° fixed deflection, horizontal face.

C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.

D. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, with factory baked enamel off-white finish.

E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed-blade type with removable key operator, operable from face.

B/A #09100194 15850 - 3

2.5 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES (R-4)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carnes. 2. E. H Price Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Titus Model 350RL. 6. Tuttle & Bailey 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Type: Streamlined blades, 1-1/8 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, 35° fixed deflection, horizontal face.

C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.

D. Fabrication: Steel with 16 gage minimum frames and 14 gage minimum blades, support bars on 6 inch centers, with factory baked enamel off-white finish.

E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed-blade type with removable key operator, operable from face.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify inlet and outlet locations.

C. Verify ceiling wall systems are ready for installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.

B. Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, whether or not dampers are furnished as part of diffuser, grille, and register assembly. Refer to Section 15820.

C. Paint visible portion of ductwork behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09900.

3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

B/A #09100194 15850 - 4

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15850 - 5

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A #09100194 15850 - 6

SECTION 15910 - ENERGY MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for a complete and operating Energy Management Control System (EMCS), utilizing Direct Digital Controls as shown on the drawings and as described herein. B. This section describes the Systems Integration scope of work for the project. This section also coordinates the responsibilities of the Mechanical and Electrical trade contractors pertaining to control products or systems, furnished by each trade, that will be integrated by this Division C. All labor, material, equipment and software not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, required to meet the functional intent of this specification, shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The entire Energy Management Control System (EMCS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers communicating via LonMark/LonTalk and/or BACnet communication protocols to Network Area Controllers (NAC) which will communicate BACnet TCP/ IP or OBIX TCP/IP to the owner’s, supervisory EMCS server software. B. The Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) shall be based on the a framework that provides an open automation infrastructure that integrates diverse systems and devices (regardless of manufacturer, communication standard or software) into a unified platform that can be easily managed in real time over the Internet using a standard Web browser. Systems not developed on an open TCP/IP server framework platform are unacceptable.

1.3 SUBMITTAL A. Eight copies of shop drawings of the entire control system shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturers catalog data sheets and installation instructions. Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a system. Terminal identification for all control wiring shall be shown on the shop drawings. A complete written Sequence of Operation shall also be included with the submittal package.

B. Submittal shall also include a complete point list of all connected points to the DDC system.

B/A #09100194 15910-1

C. Upon completion of the work, provide a complete set of ‘as-built’ drawings and application software on magnetic floppy disk media or compact disk. Drawings shall be provided as AutoCAD™ or Visio™ compatible files. Eight copies of the ‘as-built’ drawings shall be provided in addition to the documents on USB drive media or compact disk. 1.4 DIVISION OF WORK A. The Division 23 Contractor shall be responsible for the complete Energy Management Control System (EMCS) including all controllers Interoperable LonWorks Controllers (ILC), Interoperable BACnet Controllers (IBC), control devices, control panels, controller programming, controller programming software, controller input/output wiring, power wiring, interlock and safety wiring, graphical user interface, Graphical User Interface (GUI), Graphical Development Tool (GDT), Network Area Controller(s) (NAC), server software, controller software and programming of the NAC and server, development of all graphical screens, setup of schedules, logs and alarms, global server software control applications, system integration and coordination of the NAC and server software to the Wide Area Network. B. Ethernet LAN wiring, and Ethernet routing devices if applicable. The EMCS shall provide a single point Ethernet connection utilizing OBIX TCP/IP to the OWNER’S WAN. 1.5 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. The Division 26 Contractor shall be responsible for all Lighting Control Panels (LCP), Power Distribution Control Panels (PDCP), metering devices, control devices, control panels, controller programming, controller programming software, controller input/output wiring, power wiring, interlock and safety wiring, graphical user interface, controller programming software, controller network wiring, , Ethernet LAN wiring, and Ethernet routing devices if applicable. 1.6 AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS A. All products of the EMCS shall be provided with the following agency approvals. Verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products shall be provided with the submittal package. Systems or products not currently offering the following approvals are not acceptable. 1. UL-916; Energy Management Systems 2. ULC; UL - Canadian Standards Association 3. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices

1.7 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT A. Software licensing for the NAC and server software shall give the Owner the capability to control their system and determine which contractors can bid and engineer their system. B. It shall be possible to insure the Owner can prevent unauthorized partners from accessing the system for engineering changes.

B/A #09100194 15910-2

C. Software licensing shall have the freedom to individually manage authorized parties and independent parties. D. The software licensing shall have no restrictions on which brand of NAC, server software or System Programming tools can interact with the system. Station Compatibility must = ALL and Tool Compatibility must = ALL. E. The Owner shall accept the manufacturer's standard software and firmware licensing agreement as a condition of this contract. Such license shall grant use of all programs and application software to Owner as defined by the manufacturer's license agreement, but shall protect manufacturer's rights to disclosure of trade secrets contained within such software. 1.8 ADDED POINT AND MEMORY CAPACITY A. The EMCS software/firmware provided shall have the capacity for an unlimited number of NACs. Systems requiring future upgrades to accomplish this are not acceptable; capacity shall be provided at the time of bid. B. Total system point capacity shall have the capacity for an unlimited number of future points. Systems requiring future upgrades to accomplish this are not acceptable; capacity shall be provided at the time of bid. 1.9 TESTING AND BALANCING A. Control Contractor shall be responsible for adjusting and readjusting the control systems as required to obtain the desired control sequencing and intent of the specifications. Refer to Section 23 05 93 and requirement that system balance be accomplished twice. B. If proper sequencing or system functions cannot be achieved with the controls, as installed, and additional controls are required, the required additional controls shall be added at the expense of the Control Contractor. 1.10 ON-LINE SERVICE A. This contractor shall provide a breakout price as part of their proposal the cost to provide on-line service assistance to include but not be limited to: 1. Programming changes or modifications, including changes and adjustments to control algorithms 2. Graphic changes or modifications as requested by the owner or consulting engineer. 3. Operator assistance to include short (1 hour or less) refresh training on system diagnostics and operation, i.e., system optimizations, scheduling, trending or operator setup. 4. Consulting engineer assistance to include assistance on control system optimization.

1.11 SERVICE AGREEMENT

B/A #09100194 15910-3

A. Provide a separate cost breakout for a service agreement covering a 5-year period starting at the end of the 1-year guarantee and warranty date. Service agreement shall include costs for on-call, 24-hour service on an hourly basis. B. Must cover the following areas as a minimum: 1. Coordinate delivery of service. 2. Provide technical assistance for system programs and strategies in a timely fashion. 3. Quality assurance program. 4. Preventative maintenance program that supports all front end and filed equipment. Frequency should be quarterly as a minimum. That program should include but not be limited to: a) Database diagnostics. b) Maintain backup of database. c) Operational inspection of field cabinets. d) Ensure that front-end equipment is operating properly. 5. Provide and load system software upgrades and documentation as available. 6. Provide upgrades for software other than system software required for field or remote communication. 7. Provide system services bulletins and proprietary information as available to enhance Owner’s ability to maximize system effectiveness and utilization.

1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent equipment damage. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather. 1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of the EMCS digital controllers shall provide documentation supporting compliance with ISO-9001 (Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation and Servicing). Product literature provided by the EMCS digital controller manufacturer shall contain the ISO-9001 Certification Mark from the applicable registrar. B. The successful bidder shall have a minimum of five “certified” engineers that have successfully completed a software programming program accredited by the EMCS system manufacturer. Copies of actual certificates may be requested and must be supplied within 24 hours of the request. C. The successful bidder shall maintain a fully staffed office, complete with a spare parts inventory within a 50-mile radius of the customer. The distance shall adequately meet the on-site service needs of the customer and will not impact the future service cost to this owner. D. Demonstrate minimum of 5 years experience with similar project scope and budget. 1.14 INTEGRATION QUALITY ASSURANCE

B/A #09100194 15910-4

A. The successful bidder shall demonstrate successful implementation of multiple and various system integrations. Integrations shall be fully accessible from a non- proprietary web browser and should include, but not limited to the following: 1. Proprietary system integration. a. Johnson Controls b. Honeywell c. Siemens d. York 2. Lighting. 3. Power a. Substations b. Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS) c. Static Transfer Switches (STS) 4. Back-up Power – Generators 5. Microsoft Outlook 6. Un-interruptible Power Supplies (UPS) 7. Computer Room Air Conditioning; Liebert Units, other CRAC units. 8. Laboratory

1.15 SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE A. Acronyms used in this specification are as follows: EMCS Energy Management Control System NAC Network Area Controller ILC Interoperable LonWorks Controller IBC Interoperable BACnet Controller GUI Graphical User Interface WBI Web Browser Interface PMI Power Measurement Interface DDC Direct Digital Controls LAN Local Area Network WAN Wide Area Network OOT Object Oriented Technology PICS Product Interoperability Compliance Statement (Owner’s) Department of Information Technology

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.1 GENERAL A. The Energy Management Control System (EMCS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable stand-alone digital controllers, Network Area Controllers, server software server, Graphical User Interface, Web Browser Clients, printers, network devices and other devices as specified herein. B. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions and data contained in the overall EMCS.

B/A #09100194 15910-5

2.2 COMPUTER HARDWARE (PERSONAL COMPUTER) A. The personal computer shall be a Dual Core Processor based computer (minimum processing speed of 2.0 GHz with 2 GB RAM and a 160-gigabyte minimum hard drive). It shall include a 32X CD-ROM drive, a CD/RW drive, 2-parallel ports, 2-asynchronous serial ports and 2-USB ports. A minimum 17” flat panel LCD monitor shall also be included. B. A system alarm printer shall be provided. The alarm printer shall be laser type with the ability to hold alarms until a full page alarm printout is available. The full page hold feature may be overridden anytime the operator “clicks” the print alarm command.

2.3 OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURES A. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed control system with the capability to integrate SNMP, LonWorks, BACnet IP, BACnet MSTP, Modbus TCP/IP or Modbus RTU communication protocols in one open, interoperable system.

B. The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence to industry standards including ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-1995, BACnet and LonMark to assure interoperability between all system components is required. For each LonWorks device that does not have LonMark certification, the device supplier must provide an XIF file for the device. For each BACnet device, the device supplier must provide a PICS document showing the installed device’s compliance level. Minimum compliance is Level 3; with the ability to support data read and write functionality. Physical connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet or MSTP. For each Modbus device supplier must provide a Registry of data points available on the system.

C. All components and controllers supplied under this contract shall be true “peer-to- peer” communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass data shall not be acceptable.

D. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using standard Web browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. An Open Data Base Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for all database access. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable.

E. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s

B/A #09100194 15910-6

internal Intranet network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable.

2.4 INTEROPERABLE LONWORKS CONTROLLER (ILC) A. Controls shall be microprocessor based Interoperable LonMark or LonWorks Controllers (ILC). Where possible, all Interoperable LonWorks Controllers shall bear the applicable LonMark interoperability logo on each product delivered. B. HVAC control shall be accomplished using LonMark based devices where the application has a LonMark profile defined. Where LonMark devices are not available for a particular application, devices based on LonWorks shall be acceptable. Publicly available specifications for the Applications Programming Interface (API) must be provided to OWNERS for each LonWorks / LonMark controller defining the programming or setup of each device. The Division 15 contractor shall provide all programming, documentation and programming tools necessary to set up and configure the supplied devices per the specified sequences of operation. C. The Division 23 contractor shall run the LonWorks network trunk to the nearest Network Area Controller (NAC). Coordinate locations of the NAC with the LonMark devices to ensure that maximum network wiring distances, as specified by the LonWorks wiring guidelines, are not exceeded. A maximum of 126 devices may occupy any one LonWorks trunk and must be installed using the appropriate trunk termination device. All LonWorks and LonMark devices must be supplied using FTT-10A LonWorks communications transceivers. D. The Network Area Controller (NAC), will provide all scheduling, alarming, trending, and network management for the LonMark / LonWorks based devices. E. The ILCs shall communicate with the NAC at a baud rate of not less than 78.8K baud. The ILC shall provide LED indication of communication and controller performance to the technician, without cover removal. F. All ILCs shall be fully application programmable and shall at all times maintain their LONMARK certification, if so certified. Controllers offering application selection only (non-programmable), require a 10% spare point capacity to be provided for all applications. All control sequences within or programmed into the ILC shall be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained. G. The Division 23 contractor supplying the ILCs shall provide documentation for each device, with the following information at a minimum: 1. Network Variable Inputs (nvi’s); name and type 2. Network Variable Outputs (nvo’s); name and type 3. Network configuration parameters (nci, nco); name and type

H. It is the responsibility of the Division 23 contractor to ensure that the proper Network Variable Inputs and Outputs (nvi and nvo) are provided in each ILC, as required by the point charts.

B/A #09100194 15910-7

I. The supplier of any programmable ILC shall provide one copy of the manufacturer’s programming tool, with documentation, to the owner.

2.5 INTEROPERABLE BACnet CONTROLLER (IBC) A. Controls shall be microprocessor based Interoperable BACnet Controllers (IBC) in accordance with the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995. IBCs shall be provided for Unit Ventilators, Fan Coils, Heat Pumps, Variable Air Volume (VAV) Terminals and other applications as shown on the drawings. The application control program shall be resident within the same enclosure as the input/output circuitry, which translates the sensor signals. The system supplier must provide a PICS document showing the installed systems compliance level to the ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995, to OWNER’S. B. The IBCs shall communicate with the NAC via an Ethernet connection at a baud rate of not less than 10 Mbps or via the RS485 connection at a baud rate of not less than 38 kbps. C. The IBC Sensor shall connect directly to the IBC and shall not utilize any of the I/O points of the controller. The IBC Sensor shall provide a two-wire connection to the controller that is polarity and wire type insensitive. The IBC Sensor shall provide a communications jack for connection to the BACnet communication trunk to which the IBC controller is connected. The IBC Sensor, the connected controller, and all other devices on the BACnet bus shall be accessible by the POT. D. All IBCs shall be fully application programmable and shall at all times maintain their BACnet Level 3 compliance. Controllers offering application selection only (non-programmable), require a 10% spare point capacity to be provided for all applications. All control sequences within or programmed into the IBC shall be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery, to be retained. E. The Division 23 contractor supplying the IBC’s shall provide documentation for each device, with the following information at a minimum: 1. BACnet Device; MAC address, name, type and instance number 2. BACnet Objects; name, type and instance number

F. It is the responsibility of the Division 23 contractor to ensure that the proper BACnet objects are provided in each IBC, as required by the point charts. 2.6 NETWORKS A. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be a 100 Megabits/sec Ethernet network supporting TCP/IP, BACnet IP, Modbus, Java, XML, and HTTP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems B. Local area network minimum physical and media access requirements: 1. Ethernet; IEEE standard 802.3 2. Cable; 10 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5E or 6

B/A #09100194 15910-8

3. Minimum throughput; 10 Mbps, with ability to increase to 100 Mbps

2.7 NETWORK ACCESS A. OWNER’S WAN / LAN Access

1. Contractor must adhere to OWNER’S policy and requirements to obtain OWNER’S WAN access. 2.8 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC) / ROUTER A. The following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 1. Tridium Vykon AX 2. Honeywell WEBBS

B. The Division 23 contractor shall supply one or more Network Area Controllers (NAC) as part of this contract. Number of area controllers required is dependent on the type and quantity of devices provided under Divisions 23 and 26. It is the responsibility of the Division 23 contractor to coordinate with the Division 26 contractors to determine the quantity and type of devices. C. The Network Area Controller (NAC) shall provide the interface between the ILC, IBC and the Network server software, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices connected to the Energy Management Control System. It shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide: 1. Calendar functions 2. Scheduling 3. Trending 4. Alarm monitoring and routing 5. Time synchronization 6. Integration of LonWorks controller data, Modbus controller data and BACnet controller data 7. Network Management functions for all LonWorks based devices

D. The Network Area Controller must provide the following hardware features as a minimum: 1. Two Isolated Ethernet Ports – 10/100 Mbps 2. One RS-232 port 3. One RS-485 port 4. One LonWorks Interface Port – 78KB FTT-10A 5. Battery Backup 6. Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity) 7. The NAC must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 0 to 55°C

B/A #09100194 15910-9

8. The NAC must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0 and 70°C 9. The NAC must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing

E. The NAC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 16 simultaneous users.

F. Event Alarm Notification and actions 1. The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers. 2. The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up telephone connection, or wide-area network. 3. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but limited to: a. To alarm b. Return to normal c. To fault 4. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc. 5. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node. 6. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate password control. 7. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated. 8. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user: a. Screen message text b. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to route and email alarms based on: 1. Day of week 2. Time of day 3. Recipient 9. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message 10. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s) 11. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer 12. The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum): a. Time and date b. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.) c. Equipment (air handler #, access way, etc.) d. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement. e. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.

B/A #09100194 15910-10

13. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that purpose. 14. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or classes of alarms defined by the user. 15. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server (if configured in the system) and shall be available for review by the user. 16. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters. 17. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided and available for review by the user. 18. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available for review by the user.

G. Data Collection and Storage 1. The NAC shall have the ability to collect data for any object and store this data for future use. 2. The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the NAC that shall have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties: 3. Designating the log as interval or deviation. 4. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and the sample collection interval. 5. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object. 6. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the log and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out basis. 7. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a user-defined event or action. 8. All log data shall be stored in a relational database and the data shall be accessed from a standard Web Browser. 9. All log data, when accessed from the Network server software (NS), shall be capable of being manipulated using standard SQL statements. 10. All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats: a. HTML b. XML c. Plain Text d. Comma or tab separated values 11. Systems that do not provide log data in HTML and XML formats at a minimum shall not be acceptable. 12. The NAC shall have the ability to archive its log data to a Network server software on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following archiving properties, at a minimum: a. Archive on time of day b. Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size) c. Archive when log has reached it’s user-defined capacity of data stores d. Provide ability to clear logs once archived

B/A #09100194 15910-11

H. Audit Logs 1. Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the NAC. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive the log based on time to the Network server software. For each log entry, provide the following data: a. Time and date b. User ID c. Change or activity: i.e., Change set-point, add or delete objects, commands, etc.

I. Database Back-Up and Storage 1. The NAC shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The database shall be backed up based on a user-defined time interval. 2. Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be stored on the Network server software. The age of the most recently saved database is dependent on the user-defined database save interval. 3. The NAC database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user viewing and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML format is supported.

2.9 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE (GUI) A. The graphical component of the EMCS is of critical importance and should consider the following descriptions and graphic representations to be the minimum acceptable. Enhanced graphics shall include detailed 2-dimensional building site and floor plan graphics, 3-dimentional equipment graphics with fan, damper and valve animations providing operators an aid to comprehending complex system operation. Every graphic page shall contain a tabular and cascading menu navigational structure, established in an HTML frame based format to allow immediate “one-click” access to other building systems without the need to back up through the navigational tree. B. Navigation is done through the use of an HTML-based menu bar. The contents of the menu bar shall be customized to match the specific requirements of each building, while retaining the same general categories for consistency and familiarity. 1. The menu bar shall employ cascading menus. With this navigation concept, the operator shall not be more than two mouse button operations from any view. Some examples of the operator screens follow. 2. Displays shall provide real-time information with visual display of alarm condition by change of color and/or flashing text/color background. 3. Displays can be viewed from a non-proprietary, commercial Web Browser. 4. Points that have been defined as data-writes, either as a digital (on/off) or analog (change value) point type, will be setup such that an operator, by right-

B/A #09100194 15910-12

clicking the data object or graphic, will be able to command a digital value, or modify an analog value. Operators shall view equipment status from the menu. Menu items shall include headings for major equipment categories such as Air Handling Units, Boiler, Chillers, Zone Control, Lighting, etc. Cascading menus from each major category, shall allow the operator to select a particular piece of equipment; i.e. AHU-1 or Chiller. 5. A maximum of 40 points will be provided in a single status display screen. Points that have been defined as data-writes, either as a digital (on/off) or analog (change value) point type, shall be setup such that an operator, by right- clicking the data object or graphic, shall be able to command a digital value, or modify an analog value.

2.10 CUSTOM GRAPHICS A. Home Page

1. The building site overview shall provide a “mouse over” function to highlight the floor plan area to be accessed as a navigational aid. Room numbers and/or names will be included at the owner’s request. Critical data points, i.e. Outdoor Air Temperature, Outdoor Air Relative Humidity, Hot Water Supply Temperature, Chilled Water Supply Temperature or National Weather Service data will be continuously visible, in real time, within the HTML frame on all screens. Additional points may be added or deleted at the owner’s request without cost.

B. Floor Plans

1. Detailed floor plans shall be created with a vector drawing program accurately depicting the actual building layout to include all rooms, walls, and hallways. All space sensors shall be accurately placed in their actual locations and tagged with their real time space temperature and equipment each is associated with, i.e. 72.5°F/RTU-1, 74.2°/AHU-1, 73.4°/TU-1. Floor plans too large to be practically shown with data points will provide a “mouse over” function to highlight the floor plan area to be accessed. Room numbers and/or names will be included at the owner’s request.

C. Mechanical Systems

1. Detailed graphics for each mechanical system will include; RTUs, Boilers, HW Piping and Pumps, UVs, AC, and EFs as a minimum. Mechanical systems will include on-screen access to their respective set-points, trend logs and schedule. All time schedules will be setup as directed by the owner prior to final job turnover. 2. Dynamic trends of all data points shall be set up (specification will be followed as to actual number of trend points possible) prior to final job turnover. Each trend will be available directly on screen for quick trend access.

B/A #09100194 15910-13

3. Data points will be shown for all relevant inputs and outputs and be positioned near the actual device. Analog and digital parameters will be able to be modified directly from the equipment screen.

D. Schedules

1. Graphical schedules shall allow the operator to adjust time of day schedules by dragging the On Event slider. An unlimited number of On/Off events shall be allowed for each schedule and schedules can be linked into a Master/Slave scheduling scheme. Schedules shall allow the user to add/edit/delete holiday and special event schedules. Schedules shall be included for each major piece of equipment.

E. Logging

1. Logs shall be provided for all points defined as requiring collection and archiving of their real-time values. Log data will be provided in HTML, XML, comma- and tab-separated value, and plain-text formats. 2. Setup parameters for each log include; log intervals, number of collection samples, log collection times and archive times, delta logging with change value selection, etc. 3. For every log, the data shall be viewable in both tabular and chart formats. 4. Logs shall be archived to the server software daily at a user specified time of day. Archive data shall be available from the creation time of the log until the last archive time. 5. For every log, the data can be viewed in both tabular and chart formats. 6. Logs and archives will be accessible from a Web Browser (Internet Explorer 5.0 or greater). 7. Analog Logs: Value Collected every 15 minutes for a log total of 2 days.

2.11 GRAPHIC TEMPLATES

A. All graphics will be saved as templates for future use by the owner at their site. The templates will be licensed such that any future use by another contractor will be made available without additional cost to the owner or that contactor.

2.12 WEB BROWSER CLIENTS

A. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™. Systems requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client machine, or manufacturer-specific browsers shall not be acceptable. B. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific

B/A #09100194 15910-14

machine requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web browser to function with the EMCS, shall not be acceptable. C. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions: 1. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented. 2. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format. 3. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the NAC or server software, without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable. 4. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual “refresh” of the Web page. 5. Users shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following: a. Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points in a graphical manner. 1. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. 2. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. b. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop- up menu. No entry of text shall be required. c. View logs and charts d. View and acknowledge alarms e. Setup and execute SQL queries on log and archive information 6. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator. 7. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link.

2.13 SERVER SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS AND HARDWARE A. The server software shall be provided. The server software shall support all TCP/IP connected to the Energy Management Control System Router. B. The Network server software shall provide the following functions, at a minimum: 1. Global Data Access: The server software shall provide complete access to distributed data defined anywhere in the system.

B/A #09100194 15910-15

2. Distributed Control: The server software shall provide the ability to execute global control strategies based on control and data objects in any Energy Management Control System in the network, local or remote. 3. The server software shall include a master clock service for its subsystems and provide time synchronization for all Energy Management Control System. 4. The server software shall accept time synchronization messages from trusted precision Atomic Clock Internet sites and update its master clock based on this data. 5. The server software shall provide scheduling for all Energy Management Control Systems and their underlying field control devices. 6. The server software shall provide demand limiting that operates across all Energy Management Control System. The server software must be capable of multiple demand programs for sites with multiple meters and or multiple sources of energy. Each demand program shall be capable of supporting separate demand shed lists for effective demand control. 7. The server software shall implement the BACnet Command Prioritization scheme (16 levels) for safe and effective contention resolution of all commands issued to Energy Management Control Systems. Systems not employing this prioritization shall not be accepted. 8. Each Energy Management Control System supported by the server software shall have the ability to archive its log data, alarm data and database to the Network server software, automatically. Archiving options shall be user- defined including archive time and archive frequency. 9. The server software shall provide central alarm management for all Energy Management Control Systems supported by the server software. Alarm management shall include: 1. Routing of alarms to display, printer, email and pagers 2. View and acknowledge alarms 3. Query alarm logs based on user-defined parameters 10. The server software shall provide central management of log data for all Energy Management Control System supported by the server software. Log data shall include process logs, runtime and event counter logs, audit logs and error logs. Log data management shall include: 1. Viewing and printing log data 2. Exporting log data to other software applications 3. Query log data based on user-defined parameters

C. Server software Hardware Requirements: supplied by 1. The system integrator will be responsible for loading and testing the software on the PC. 2. The system integrator will coordinate with the owner for testing and authorization.

2.14 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING A. The Graphical Development Tool (GDT) shall provide the ability to perform system programming and graphic display engineering as part of a complete software

B/A #09100194 15910-16

package. The programming toolset will be provided to the owner as part of this project. The programming software shall be the same programming toolset as used by the contractor’s engineers when programming this project. Access to the programming functions and features of the GDT shall be through password access as assigned by the system administrator. B. The GDT shall be available in two versions; a thick-client version licensed to the computing platform on which it is installed and a thin-client version, capable of providing the complete set of engineering functions through a standard Web Browser. Programming and development tools not capable of providing all engineering and application development functions with a standard Web Browser are not acceptable. C. A library of control, application, and graphic objects shall be provided to enable the creation of all applications and user interface screens. Applications are to be created by selecting the desired control objects from the library, dragging or pasting them on the screen, and linking them together using a built in graphical connection tool. Completed applications may be stored in the library for future use. Graphical User Interface screens shall be created in the same fashion. Data for the user displays is obtained by graphically linking the user display objects to the application objects to provide “real-time” data updates. Any real-time data value or object property may be connected to display its current value on a user display. All graphics must be created with a vector 3-D imaging software package, i.e., Dream Weaver, Illustrator, Cool 3-D or other commercially available graphics package.

D. Programming Methods 1. Provide the capability to copy objects from the supplied libraries, or from a user-defined library to the user’s application. Objects shall be linked by a graphical linking scheme by dragging a link from one object to another. Object links will support one-to-one, many-to-one, or one-to-many relationships. Linked objects shall maintain their connections to other objects regardless of where they are positioned on the page and shall show link identification for links to objects on other pages for easy identification. Links will vary in color depending on the type of link; i.e., internal, external, hardware, etc. 2. Configuration of each object will be done through the object’s property sheet using fill-in the blank fields, list boxes, and selection buttons. Use of custom programming, scripting language, or a manufacturer-specific procedural language for configuration will not be accepted. 3. The software shall provide the ability to view the logic in a monitor mode. When on-line, the monitor mode shall provide the ability to view the logic in real time for easy diagnosis of the logic execution. When off-line (debug), the monitor mode shall allow the user to set values to inputs and monitor the logic for diagnosing execution before it is applied to the system. 4. All programming shall be done in real-time. Systems requiring the uploading on the owner’s IT network, and downloading of database objects shall not be allowed.

B/A #09100194 15910-17

5. The system shall support object duplication within a customer’s database. An application, once configured, can be copied and pasted for easy re-use and duplication. All links, other than to the hardware, shall be maintained during duplication.

2.15 OBJECT LIBRARIES A. A standard library of objects shall be included for development and setup of application logic, user interface displays, system services, and communication networks. B. The objects in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into the user’s database and shall be organized according to their function. In addition, the user shall have the capability to group objects created in their application and store the new instances of these objects in a user-defined library. C. In addition to the standard libraries specified here, the supplier of the system shall maintain an on-line accessible (over the Internet) library, available to all registered users to provide new or updated objects and applications as they are developed. D. All control objects shall conform to the control objects specified in the BACnet specification. E. The library shall include applications or objects for the following functions, at a minimum: 1. Scheduling Object. The schedule must conform to the schedule object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 7-day plus holiday & temporary scheduling features and a minimum of 10 on/off events per day. Data entry to be by graphical sliders to speed creation and selection of on-off events. 2. Calendar Object. . The calendar must conform to the calendar object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 12-month calendar features to allow for holiday or special event data entry. Data entry to be by graphical “point-and-click” selection. This object must be “linkable” to any or all scheduling objects for effective event control. 3. Duty Cycling Object. Provide a universal duty cycle object to allow repetitive on/off time control of equipment as an energy conserving measure. Any number of these objects may be created to control equipment at varying intervals 4. Temperature Override Object. Provide a temperature override object that is capable of overriding equipment turned off by other energy saving programs (scheduling, duty cycling etc.) to maintain occupant comfort or for equipment freeze protection. 5. Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization object to provide the capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also, allow equipment to be stopped before the scheduled un-occupancy time just far enough ahead to take advantage of the building’s “flywheel” effect for energy

B/A #09100194 15910-18

savings. Provide automatic tuning of all start / stop time object properties based on the previous day’s performance. 6. Demand Limiting Object. Provide a comprehensive demand-limiting object that is capable of controlling demand for any selected energy utility (electric, oil, and gas). The object shall provide the capability of monitoring a demand value and predicting (by use of a sliding window prediction algorithm) the demand at the end of the user defined interval period (1-60 minutes). This object shall also accommodate a utility meter time sync pulse for fixed interval demand control. Upon a prediction that will exceed the user defined demand limit (supply a minimum of 6 per day), the demand limiting object shall issue shed commands to either turn off user specified loads or modify equipment set points to effect the desired energy reduction. If the list of sheddable equipment is not enough to reduce the demand to below the set point, a message shall be displayed on the users screen (as an alarm) instructing the user to take manual actions to maintain the desired demand. The shed lists are specified by the user and shall be selectable to be shed in either a fixed or rotating order to control which equipment is shed the most often. Upon suitable reductions in demand, the demand-limiting object shall restore the equipment that was shed in the reverse order in which it was shed. Each sheddable object shall have a minimum and maximum shed time property to effect both equipment protection and occupant comfort. F. The library shall include control objects for the following functions. All control objects shall conform to the objects as specified in the BACnet specification. 1. Analog Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Allow high, low and failure limits to be assigned for alarming. Also, provide a time delay filter property to prevent nuisance alarms caused by temporary excursions above or below the user defined alarm limits. 2. Analog Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. 3. Binary Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. The user must be able to specify either input condition for alarming. This object must also include the capability to record equipment run-time by counting the amount of time the hardware input is in an “on” condition. The user must be able to specify either input condition as the “on” condition. 4. Binary Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Properties to enable minimum on and off times for equipment protection as well as interstart delay must be provided. The BACnet Command Prioritization priority scheme shall be incorporated to allow multiple control applications to execute commands on this object with the highest priority command being invoked. Provide sixteen levels of priority as a minimum. Systems not employing the BACnet method of contention resolution shall not be acceptable. 5. PID Control Loop Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Each individual property must be adjustable as well as to be disabled to allow proportional control only, or

B/A #09100194 15910-19

proportional with integral control, as well as proportional, integral and derivative control. 6. Comparison Object - Allow a minimum of two analog objects to be compared to select either the highest, lowest, or equality between the two linked inputs. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation. 7. Math Object - Allow a minimum of four analog objects to be tested for the minimum or maximum, or the sum, difference, or average of linked objects. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation. 8. Custom Programming Objects - Provide a blank object template for the creation of new custom objects to meet specific user application requirements. This object must provide a simple BASIC-like programming language that is used to define object behavior. Provide a library of functions including math and logic functions, string manipulation, and e-mail as a minimum. Also, provide a comprehensive on-line debug tool to allow complete testing of the new object. Allow new objects to be stored in the library for re-use. 9. Interlock Object - Provide an interlock object that provides a means of coordination of objects within a piece of equipment such as an Air Handler or other similar types of equipment. An example is to link the return fan to the supply fan such that when the supply fan is started, the return fan object is also started automatically without the user having to issue separate commands or to link each object to a schedule object. In addition, the control loops, damper objects, and alarm monitoring (such as return air, supply air, and mixed air temperature objects) will be inhibited from alarming during a user-defined period after startup to allow for stabilization. When the air handler is stopped, the interlocked return fan is also stopped, the outside air damper is closed, and other related objects within the air handler unit are inhibited from alarming thereby eliminating nuisance alarms during the off period. 10. Temperature Override Object - Provide an object whose purpose is to provide the capability of overriding a binary output to an “On” state in the event a user specified high or low limit value is exceeded. This object is to be linked to the desired binary output object as well as to an analog object for temperature monitoring, to cause the override to be enabled. This object will execute a Start command at the Temperature Override level of start/stop command priority unless changed by the user. 11. Composite Object - Provide a container object that allows a collection of objects representing an application to be encapsulated to protect the application from tampering, or to more easily represent large applications. This object must have the ability to allow the user to select the appropriate parameters of the “contained” application that are represented on the graphical shell of this container. G. The object library shall include objects to support the integration of devices connected to the Network Area Controller or server software. At a minimum, provide the following as part of the standard library included with the programming software: 1. LonMark/LonWorks devices. These devices shall include, but not be limited to, devices for control of HVAC, lighting, access, and metering. Provide

B/A #09100194 15910-20

LonMark manufacturer-specific objects to facilitate simple integration of these devices. All network variables defined in the LonMark profile shall be supported. Information (type and function) regarding network variables not defined in the LonMark profile shall be provided by the device manufacturer. 2. For devices not conforming to the LonMark standard, provide a dynamic object that can be assigned to the device based on network variable information provided by the device manufacturer. Device manufacturer shall provide an XIF file and documentation for the device to facilitate device integration. 3. For BACnet devices, provide the following objects at a minimum: a. BACnet AI b. BACnet AO c. BACnet BI d. BACnet BO e. BACnet Device

4. For each BACnet object, provide the ability to assign the object a BACnet device and object instance number.

2.16 OTHER CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE A. ETHERNET SWITCHES 1. 8 Port 10/100 MBPS Switch / Hub 2. Din Rail Mounted 3. LED communication indicators 4. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Contemporary Controls b. INTEL c. Cisco Systems

B. TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND TRANSMITTERS

1. General Sensor & Transmitter Requirements a. Provide sensors and transmitters required as outlined in the input/output summary and sequence of operation, and as required to achieve the specified accuracy as specified herein. b. Temperature transmitters shall be equipped with individual zero and span adjustments. The zero and span adjustments shall be non-interactive to permit calibration without iterative operations. Provide a loop test signal to aid in sensor calibration. c. Temperature transmitters shall be sized and constructed to be compatible with the medium to be monitored. Transmitters shall be equipped with a linearization circuit to compensate for non-linearities of the sensor and bridge and provide a true linear output signal.

B/A #09100194 15910-21

d. Temperature sensors shall be of the resistance type and shall be 10K or 20K Ohm Thermistor type. 1. Thermistors are acceptable provided the mathematical relationship of a thermistor with respect to resistance and temperature with the thermistor fitting constraints is contained with the controllers operating software and the listed accuracy’s can be obtained. Submit proof of the software mathematical equation and thermistor manufacturer fitting constants used in the thermistor mathematical/expressions. Thermistors shall be of the Thermistor (NTC) Type with a minimum of 50 ohm/C. resistance change versus temperature to insure good resolution and accuracy. Thermistors shall be certified to be stable ±0.13C. over 5 years and ±0.2C. accurate and free from drift for 5 years. e. The following accuracy’s are required and include errors associated with the sensor, lead wire and A to D conversion. 1. Point Type Accuracy Outside Air +/-3% Chilled/Hot Water +/-1% Room Temperature +/-1% Steam +/-5% Duct Temperature +/-3% 2. Sensors Used in Energy Water (BTU) or Process Calculations +/-1% 3. Sensors used in energy or process calculations shall be accurate to ±0.10C over the process temperature range. Submit a manufacturer's calibration report indicating that the calibration certification is traceable to the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Calibration Report Nos. 209527/222173.

2. Thermowells a. When thermowells are required, the sensor and well shall be supplied as a complete assembly including well head and Greenfield fitting, except where wells are to be installed under separate contract. b. Thermowells shall be pressure rated and constructed in accordance with the system working pressure c. Thermowells and sensors shall be mounted in a threadolet or 1/2" NPT saddle and allow easy access to the sensor for repair or replacement. d. Thermowells shall be constructed of the following materials: 1. Chilled and Hot Water; brass. 2. Steam; 316 stainless steel.

B/A #09100194 15910-22

3. Brine (salt solutions): marine grade stainless steel.

3. Outside Air Sensors a. Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental conditions to which they will be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield. b. Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate surrounding the sensor element. c. Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for ambient temperatures. d. Solar load sensors shall be provided in locations shown. The use of a thermistor combined with a solar compensator is acceptable. Provide calibration charts as part of the O&M Manual. 4. Duct Type Sensors a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in a hand box through a hole in the duct and be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement. A neoprene grommet (sealtite fitting and mounting plate) shall be used on the sensor assembly to prevent air leaks. b. Duct sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly including lock nut and mounting plate. Duct sensors probe shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel. c. For outdoor air duct applications, use a weatherproof mounting box with weatherproof cover and gasket.

5. Averaging Duct Type Sensors a. Where called out on the drawings and points lists, provide averaging type duct sensors. Thermistor sensors are acceptable. The sensor shall be multi-point sensitive through the length of the temperature conducting tubing. The thermistors shall be configured in a series / parallel method which creates an end result of total average resistance equal to the same span as a standard thermistor. b. Provide capillary supports at the sides of the duct to support the sensing element. 6. Acceptable Manufacturers a. Honeywell b. Johnson Controls c. ACI d. Bapi

C. RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSORS/TRANSMITTERS

1. The sensor shall be a solid state, resistance type relative humidity sensor of the Bulk Polymer Design. The sensor element shall be washable and shall resist surface contaminations.

B/A #09100194 15910-23

2. Humidity transmitter shall be equipped with non-interactive span and zero adjustments, a 2 wire isolated loop powered, 4-20ma, 0-10.0 VDC linear proportional output. 3. The humidity transmitter shall meet the following overall accuracy including lead loss and A to D conversion. a. Room Type Sensor ±2% RH b. Duct Type Sensor ±2% RH 4. Outside air relative humidity sensors shall be installed in a rain proof, perforated cover. The transmitter shall be installed in a NEMA 3R enclosure with sealtite fittings and stainless steel bushings. 5. Provide a single point humidity calibrator, if required, for field calibration. Transmitters shall be shipped factory pre-calibrated. 6. Duct type sensing probes shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel and be equipped with a neoprene grommet, bushings and a mounting bracket. 7. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Vailsala b. ACI c. Veris d. Honeywell e. Johnson Controls

D. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS AND ACCESSORIES

1. General Air and Water Pressure Transmitter Requirements: a. Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100% pressure over-range without damage and to hold calibrated accuracy when subject to a momentary 40% over-range input. b. Pressure transmitters shall provide the option to transmit a 0 to 5V dc, 0 to 10V dc, or 4 to 20 mA output signal. c. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow sensing device and shall be supplied with shutoff and bleed valves in the high and low sensing pick-up lines (3 valve manifolds). d. Provide a minimum of a NEMA 1 housing for the transmitter. Locate transmitters in accessible local control panels wherever possible. e. Low air pressure, differential pressure transmitters used for room pressurization control (i.e. laboratories, OR’s clean rooms, etc.) shall be equipped with a LED display indicating the transmitter output signal. f. Duct sensing pressure applications where the velocity exceeds 1500 fpm shall utilize a static pressure traverse probes. 2. Low Air Pressure Applications (0 to 125 Pa) a. The pressure transmitter shall be capable of transmitting a linear electronic signal proportional to the differential of the room and reference static pressure input signals with the following minimum performance specifications. 1. Span: Not greater than two times the design space DP.

B/A #09100194 15910-24

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5% of F.S. 3. Dead Band: Less than 0.3% of output. 4. Repeatability: Within 0.2% of output. 5. Linearity: Plus or minus 0.2% of span. 6. Response: Less than one second for full span input. 7. Temperature Stability: Less than 0.05% output shift per degree C change. b. The transmitter shall utilize variable capacitance sensor technology and be immune to shock and vibration. c. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Auto Tran 2. Veris 3. Setra 3. Medium to High Air Pressure Applications (125 Pa to 2500 Pa) a. The pressure transmitter shall be similar to the Low Air Pressure Transmitter except the performance specifications are not as severe. Provide differential pressure transmitters which meet the following performance requirements. 1. Zero & span: (% F.S./Deg. C): .05% including linearity, hysteresis and repeatability 2. Accuracy: 1% F.S. (best straight line) 3. Static Pressure Effect: 0.5% F.S. (to 700 KPa) 4. Thermal Effects: <±.05% F.S. /Deg. C. over 5C. to 40C. (calibrated at 22C.) b. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Auto Tran 2. Veris 3. Setra

E. LOW DIFFERENTIAL, WATER PRESSURE APPLICATIONS (0 KPa to 5 KPa)

1. The differential pressure transmitter shall be of industrial quality and transmit a linear, 4 to 20mA output in response to variation of flow meter differential pressure or water pressure sensing points. 2. The differential pressure transmitter shall have non-interactive zero and span adjustments adjustable from the outside cover and meet the following performance specifications. a. 0 – 10 KPa input differential pressure range b. 4 - 20 mA output c. Maintain accuracy up to 20 to 1 ratio turndown d. Reference Accuracy:  0.2% of full span 3. Provide a two year warranty for each transmitter. Replace all transmitters found to be defective at no cost to the Owner during the warranty period. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Tobar

B/A #09100194 15910-25

b. Veris c. Foxboro d. Omega e. Bailey f. Modus

F. MEDIUM TO HIGH DIFFERENTIAL WATER PRESSURE APPLICATIONS (5 KPa to 700 KPa)

1. The differential pressure transmitter shall meet the low pressure transmitter specifications except the following: a. Differential pressure range 5 KPa to 700 KPa. b. Reference Accuracy: ±l% of full span (includes non-linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability) c. Warranty: 1 year. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Auto Tran b. Veris c. ACI d. Setra 3. Bypass Valve Assembly: Mount stand-alone pressure transmitters in a bypass valve assembly panel. The panel shall be constructed to NEMA 1 standards. The transmitter shall be installed in the panel with hi and low connections piped and valved. Air bleed units, bypass valves and compression fittings shall be provided

G. ELECTRONIC VALVE AND DAMPER ACTUATORS

1. General Requirements a. Electronic actuators shall be electric, direct-coupled type capable of being mounted over the shaft of the damper. They shall be UL listed and the manufacturer shall provide a 2 year unconditional warranty from the date of commissioning. Power consumption shall not exceed 8 watts or 15 VA of transformer sizing capacity per high torque actuator nor 2 watts or 4 VA for VAV actuators. Sound level shall not exceed 45 dB for high torque or 35 dB for VAV actuators. b. Electronic overload protection shall protect actuator motor from damage. If damper jams actuator shall not burn-out. Internal end switch type actuators are not acceptable. Actuators may be mechanically and electrically paralleled on the same shaft to multiply the available torque. A reversing switch shall be provided to change action from direct to reverse in relation to control signal as operation requires. c. Warranty must be two years by manufacturer on actuator as a whole and all components. d. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Siemens

B/A #09100194 15910-26

2. Control Damper Actuators a. OA (outside air), RA (return air), and EA (exhaust air) actuators shall be spring return type for safety functions. Individual battery backup or capacitor return is not acceptable. b. The control circuit shall be fully modulating using 2 - 10 volt or 4 - 20 mA signals. Accuracy and repeatability shall be within  1/21 of control signal. A 2 - 10 v or 4 - 20 mA signal shall be produced by the actuator which is directly proportional to the shaft clamp position which can be used to control actuators which are paralleled off a master motor or to provide a feedback signal to the automation system indicating damper position. Accuracy shall be within  2.5%. c. Face and bypass dampers and other control dampers shall be modulating using the same control circuit detailed above but shall not be spring return.

3. Miscellaneous Damper Actuators a. OA combustion and ventilation air intake and EA damper actuators shall be 2 position spring return closed if any water piping, coils or other equipment in the space which the damper serves needs to be protected from freezing. Otherwise drive open, drive closed type 2 position may be used. The minimum torque for any actuator shall be 5 N-m. b. Provide auxiliary switches on damper shaft or blade switch to prove damper has opened on all air handling equipment handling 100% outside air and greater than 6 KPa TSP.

4. Air Terminals a. Air terminal actuators shall be minimum 5 N-m torque and use fully modulating floating (drive open, drive closed) 3 wire control or use control circuit as detailed in control dampers depending on the controllers requirements.

5. Inlet Vanes Actuators a. Inlet vane actuators shall provide at least 150% of the minimum torque specified by the manufacturer as necessary to operate vanes properly. Either direct coupled or gear train with linkages are acceptable as required. The control loop for static control of the actuator shall operate slowly enough to avoid hunting and maintain stable control. See automation system specifications for details.

6. Combination Smoke and Fire Damper Actuators

a. Actuators shall be factory mounted and connected to the damper section and shall conform to UL 555S specifications.

H. VALVE ACTUATORS

1. Control Valves Actuators (3 inch and smaller)

B/A #09100194 15910-27

a. Actuators shall have a gear release button on all non-spring return models to allow manual setting. The actuator shall have either an insulating air gap between it and the linkage or a non-conducting thermoplastic linkage. Care shall be taken to maintain the actuator's operating temperatures and humidity within its specifications. Pipes shall be fully insulated and heat shields shall be installed if necessary. Condensation may not form on actuators and shall be prevented by a combination of insulation, air gap, or other thermal break. b. The control circuit shall be fully modulating using 2 - 10 volt or 4 - 20 mA signals. Accuracy and repeatability shall be within 1/21 of control signal. A 2 - 10 v or 4 - 20 mA signal shall be produced by the actuator which is directly proportional to the shaft clamp position which can be used to control actuators which are paralleled off a master motor or to provide a feedback signal to the automation system indicating valve position. c. Valve body and actuators shall be shipped fully assembled and tested at the valve factory prior to shipment.

2. Control Valve Actuators (4 inch and larger). a. The valve actuator shall consist of a permanent split capacitor, reversible type electric motor which drives a compound epicycle gear. The electric actuator shall have visual mechanical position indication, readable from a distance of 8 meters, showing output shaft and valve position. Unit shall be mounting directly to the valves without brackets and adapters, or readily adapted to suit all other types quarter-turn valves. b. The actuator shall have an integral terminal strip, which, through conduit entries, will ensure simple wiring to power supplies. Cable entries shall have UL recommended gland stops within the NPT hole to prevent glands from being screwed in too far and damaging cable. c. The actuator shall be constructed to withstand high shock and vibrations without operations failure. The actuator cover shall have captive bolts to eliminate loss of bolts when removing the cover from the base. One copy of the wiring diagram shall be provided with the actuator. d. The actuator shall have a self-locking gear train which is permanently lubricated at the factory. The gearing shall be run on ball and needle bearings. Actuators with 70 N-m or more output torque shall have two adjustable factory calibrated mechanical torque limit switches of the single-pole, double-throw type. The motor shall be fitted with thermal overload protection. Motor rotor shaft shall run in ball bearings at each end of motor. e. The actuator housing shall be hard anodized aluminum for full environmental protection. f. The environmental temperature range of the actuator shall be -30C to +60C. g. For intermittent on/off service, the actuator shall be rated at a 20% duty cycle (i.e., 12 minutes extended duty in every hour, or alternatively; one

B/A #09100194 15910-28

complete cycle every 2 minutes). For more frequent cycling and modulating service, an actuator shall be rated for continuous duty. The actuator rated for continuous duty shall be capable of operating 100% of the time at an ambient temperature of 40C. h. The actuator shall have an integral self-locking gear train. Motor brakes shall not be required to maintain desired valve position. Levers or latches shall not be required to engage or disengage the manual override. Mechanical travel stops, adjustable to 15 in each direction of 90 rotation shall be standard, as well as two adjustable travel limit switches with electrically isolated contacts. Additional adjustable switches shall be available as option. i. Single Phase Motor: The motor shall have Class B insulation capable of withstanding locked-rotor for 25 seconds without overheating. Wiring shall also be Class B insulation. An auto-reset thermal cut-out protector shall be embedded in the motor windings to limit heat rise to 80C in a 40C ambient. All motors shall be capable of being replaced by simply disconnecting the wires and then removing mounting bolts. Disassembly of gears shall not be required to remove the motor. j. Materials of Construction: The electric actuator shall have a pressure die- cast, hard anodized aluminum base and cover. The compound gear shall be made of die-cast, hard anodized aluminum or steel. An alloy steel worm gear shall be provided for manual override and torque limiting. Bearings for gears shall be of the ball and needle type; bronze bearings shall be used on the shafting parts. k. Accessories: 1. Potentiometer for providing continuous feedback of actuator position at the controller (for valves specified position feedback). l. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Siemens

I. CONTROL VALVES

1. Control valves shall be 2-way or 3-way pattern as shown constructed for tight shutoff and shall operate satisfactorily against system pressures and differentials. Two-position valves shall be ‘line’ size. Proportional control valves shall be sized for a maximum pressure drop of 5.0 psi at rated flow (except as may be noted on the drawings). Valves with sizes up to and including 2 inches shall be “screwed” configuration and 2-1/2 inch and larger valves shall be “flanged” configuration. Electrically controlled valves shall include spring return type actuators sized for tight shut-off against system pressures and furnished with integral switches for indication of valve position (open-closed). Three-way butterfly valves, when utilized, shall include a separate actuator for each butterfly segment. 2. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Siemens

B/A #09100194 15910-29

J. SWITCHES

1. Differential Pressure Switches a. All pressure sensing elements shall be corrosion resistant. Pressure sensing elements shall be bourdon tubes, bellows, or diaphragm type. Units shall have tamper-proof adjustable range and differential pressure settings. b. Pressure sensor switch contacts shall be snap action micro-switch type. Sensor assembly shall operate automatically and reset automatically when conditions return to normal. Complete sensor assembly shall be protected against vibration at all critical movement pivots, slides and so forth. c. Differential pressure switches shall be vented to withstand a 50% increase in working pressure without loss of calibration. d. Acceptable Manufacturers: Mercoid, Dryer, McDonnell Miller.

2. Electric Low Limit Thermostat (Freeze Stat) a. Duct type, fixed 3 degrees Celsius differential, range 0 to 15 degrees Celsius. Sensing element shall be a 7 meter long capillary tube responding to the lowest temperature sensed along any 30 cm of bulb length. Switch shall be SPDT 120/240 volts AC, rated for 10 amps at 120 volts full load. Unit shall be manually reset. Provide one low limit thermostat for each 2 square meter or fraction thereof of coil surface area. b. Provide DPST switches, 1 NO, 1 NC contact. c. Provide manual type low limit thermostat set at 2 degrees Celsius on each air handling unit. d. Provide thermostat override on air handling units for smoke control in area being served.

3. Water Flow Switches a. UL listed, suitable for all service application conditions. Body minimum working pressure rating shall equal or exceed service pressure. Switch electrical rating shall be 230 volts AC 3.7 ampere, 115 volts AC 7.4 ampere, and 125 VAC 115-230 VAC AC Pilot duty. Unit shall have two SPDT switches. Actuating flow rated shall be field adjustable for the specified and indicated service. Switch location shall preclude exposure to turbulent or pulsating flow conditions. Flow switch shall not cause pressure drop exceeding 2 psi at maximum system flow rate. b. Acceptable Manufacturer: McDonnel-Miller.

4. Strap-On Aquastat a. UL listed, provided with a suitable removable spring clip for attaching aquastat to pipe and a snap-action SPDT switch. Switch set-point shall be as indicated. Electrical rating shall be 5 amperes, 120 VAC.

5. Current Sensitive Switches: Solid state, split core current switch that operates when the current level (sensed by the internal current transformer) exceeds the

B/A #09100194 15910-30

adjustable trip point. Current switch to include an integral LED for indication of trip condition and a current level below trip set point.

K. FLOW, PRESSURE AND ELECTRICAL MEASURING APPARATUS 1. Traverse Probe Air Flow Measuring Stations a. Traverse probes shall be a dual manifolded, cylindrical, type constructed of 3003 extruded aluminum with an anodized finish to eliminate surface pitting and unnecessary air friction. The multiple total pressure manifold shall have sensors located along the stagnation plane of the approaching air flow and without the physical presence of forward projecting sensors into the airstream. The static pressure manifold shall incorporate dual offset static tips on opposing sides of the averaging manifold so as to be insensitive to flow-angle variations of as much as ±20o in the approaching airstream. b. The air flow traverse probe shall not induce a measurable pressure drop, nor shall the sound level within the duct be amplified by its singular or multiple presence in the airstream. Each airflow measuring probe shall contain multiple total and static pressure sensors placed at equal distances along the probe length. The number of sensors on each probe and the quantity of probes utilized at each installation shall comply with the ASHRAE Standards for duct traversing. c. Traverse probes shall be accurate to ±25% of the measured airflow range down to 60 Pa static pressure. d. Each flow measuring station shall be complete with its own dedicated microprocessor with a 4-line, 80 character, Alpha Numeric display and full function key pad. The panel shall be fully programmable and display calculated liters per minute directly on a LED monitor on the panel face. e. Provide 24 volt 1 phase power to each flow measuring station. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Air Monitor 2. Ultratech 3. Air Sentinel. 3. Shielded Static Pressure Sensor a. Provide for each zone where required a shielded static pressure sensor suitable for ceiling surface mounting, complete with multiple sensing ports, pressure impulse suppression chamber with minimum volume of 800 cubic centimeters, airflow shielding, and 3/8" compression takeoff fittings, all contained in a welded stainless steel casing, with polish finish on the exposed surfaces. b. These probes shall be capable of sensing the static pressure in the proximity of the sensor to within 1% of the actual pressure value while being subjected to a maximum airflow of 300 meters per minute from a radial source. c. The shielded static sensing devices shall be used for both reference and space pressure sensing.

B/A #09100194 15910-31

d. Pressure sensors used for outside air pressure reference purposes shall be equipped with a conduit seal for pneumatic tubing and bushings for a weather tight installation. 4. Static Pressure Traverse Probe a. Provide multipoint traverse probes in the duct at each point where static pressure sensing is required. b. Each duct static traverse probe shall contain multiple static pressure sensors located along the exterior surface of the cylindrical probe. Pressure sensing points shall not protrude beyond the surface of the probe. c. The duct static traverse probe shall be of 304 stainless steel construction and (except for 3/4" dia. probes with lengths of 60 cm or less) be complete with threaded end support rod, sealing washer and nut, and mounting plate with gasket and static pressure signal fitting. The static traverse probe shall be capable of producing a steady, non-pulsating signal of standard static pressure without need for correction factors, with an instrument accuracy of 21. d. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Auto Tran 2. Veris 3. Setra

L. RELAYS AND CONTACTORS 1. Relays other than those associated with digital output cards shall be general purpose, enclosed type and protected by a heat and shock resistant duct cover. Number of contacts and operational function shall be as required. 2. Solid State Relays (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than lOE9 ohms with a breakdown voltage of 1500V root mean square or greater at 60 Hz. The contact life shall be 10 x 10 E6 operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be -28 to +60C. Input impedance shall not be less than 500 ohms. Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be for 100 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relay. 3. Contactors: Contactors shall be of the single coil, electrically operated, mechanically held type. Positive locking shall be obtained without the use of hooks, latches, or semipermanent magnets. Contractor shall be double-break- silver-to-silver type protected by arcing contacts. The number of contacts and rating shall be selected for the application. Operating and release times shall be 100 milliseconds or less. Contactors shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices.

M. TEMPERATURE CONTROL PANELS 1. Furnish temperature control panels of code gauge steel with locking doors for mounting all devices as shown. Panels shall conform to NEMA 1 standards, unless otherwise indicated.

B/A #09100194 15910-32

2. Control panels shall meet all requirements of UL508A and shall be so certified. 3. All external wiring shall be connected to terminal strips mounted within the panel. 4. Provide engraved phenolic nameplates identifying all devices mounted on the face of control panels and the identification number of the panel. 5. A complete set of ‘as-built’ control drawings (relating to the controls within that panel) shall be furnished within each control panel.

N. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. ABB – No Substitutions. 2. Furnish Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) for installation by the electrical contractor (Div. 16). Drives shall be factory equipped with a LonTalk FTT- 10A communications interface. 3. The variable frequency drive (VFD) shall generate the required variable frequency through three main input voltage lines connected to an LC filter and diode bridge. This shall produce a DC voltage for an insulated gate bi-polar transistor (IGBT) bridge. The IGBT bridge shall produce a pulse-width modulated (PWM) AC voltage for the motor. A microprocessor shall control the motor according to measured signals and control commands sent from the VFD control panel. 4. The VFD enclosure shall be (NEMA 1, NEMA 12, OPEN CHASSIS). Outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 4R. 5. VFD shall be suitable for (208-240 VAC, 380-500 VAC, or 525-690 VAC). The VFD shall maintain functionality from -15% to +10% of nominal voltage at a frequency of 45-66 Hz. Ambient operating temperature range shall be 14 F to 104 F, and the humidity range: 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing). 6. The VFD shall accommodate inputs of 0-10 VDC, 4-20 mA, up to six digital inputs. VFD outputs shall include current of 0-20 mA, 500 ohm maximum with 10 bit resolution, and two programmable changeover relay outputs with switching capacity of 24 VDC, 8A; 250 VAC, 8A; and 125 VDC, 0.4A. 7. The VFD shall accommodate Modbus, LonTalk, and BACnet communications protocols for field bus control. 8. The variable frequency drive shall have separate pre-loaded user- programmable applications which can be modified using a personal computer- based commissioning tool with an optional software package, or an alphanumeric LCD user interface. Aforementioned application functionality shall include but not be limited to: a. Basic Functionality Application providing the following: 1. Control I/O signals (two (2) analog inputs, one (1) digital input, and one (1) analog output) are fixed 2. One (1) programmable digital input and one (1) programmable digital output 3. All parameters have default values, 4. No more than nine (9) parameter settings are required for startup and operation.

B/A #09100194 15910-33

b. Expanded Functionality Application providing all capabilities in the previous application as well as the following: 1. One (1) programmable digital input and all outputs are programmable 2. Frequency limit and prohibit capability 3. Programmable start/stop and reversing logic 4. Automatic restart 5. Programmable actions for motor thermal and stall protection 6. DC brake at stop c. Application that provides all previously mentioned capability as well as enabling the use of two different control and frequency sources. Each source must be programmable. d. Application which provides all functionality from the Expanded Functionality Application as well as accommodates multiple, required fixed speed references. e. PID Control Application – Uses internal PID control loop to control motor frequency as well as providing: f. Input and output phase supervision g. Programmable capability for three (3) digital inputs and all outputs h. Sleep function i. Multi-purpose Control Application – The frequency reference can be selected from analog inputs, joystick control, motor potentiometer, or a mathematical function of the analog inputs. j. Application specifically designed to control one leading variable speed drive and up to 3 auxiliary drives. 9. Variable frequency drives shall be UL listed and sized for the power and loads applied. 10. Drives shall include built-in radio frequency interference (RFI) filters and be constructed to operate in equipment rooms and shall not be susceptible to electromagnetic disturbances typically encountered in such environments. Similarly, the drives must not excessively disturb the environment within which it is used. 11. All VFDs over 3 horsepower shall be provided with an AC choke before rectifiers. All included chokes and filters shall be integrated in the factory enclosure. 12. VFDs shall be installed in strict conformance to the manufacturer’s installation instructions, and shall be rated to operate over a temperature range of 14 to 104 F. 13. VFD automatic operation shall be suitable for 4-20 ma input signal. Each VFD shall be fan cooled and have an integral keypad and alphanumeric “plain- language” display unit for user interface. The display shall indicate VFD status (RUN motor rotation, READY, STOP, ALARM, and FAULT), and shall indicate the VFD current control source (DDC input signal, keypad, or field bus control). In addition to the alphanumeric display, the display unit shall have three pilot lights to annunciate when the power is on (green), when the drive is running (green, blinks when stopping and ramping down), and

B/A #09100194 15910-34

when the drive was shut down due to a detected fault (red, fault condition presented on the alphanumeric display). 14. Three types of faults shall be monitored, “FAULT” shall shut the motor down, “FAULT Auto-reset” shall shut the motor down and try to restart it for a programmable number of tries, and “FAULT Trip” shall shut the motor down after a FAULT Auto-reset fails to restart the motor. Coded faults shall be automatically displayed for the following faults: a. Over current b. Over voltage c. Earth ground d. Emergency stop e. System (component failure) f. Under voltage g. Phase missing h. Heat sink under temperature i. Heat sink over temperature j. Motor stalled k. Motor over temperature l. Motor underload m. Cooling fan failure n. Inverter bridge over temperature o. Analog input control under current p. Keypad failure q. Other product unique monitored conditions 15. In addition to annunciating faults, at the time of fault occurrence the VFD shall capture and make available to the user certain system data for subsequent analysis during fault trouble shooting, including duration of operation (days, hours, minutes, seconds),output frequency, motor current, motor voltage, motor power, motor torque, DC voltage, unit temperature, run status, rotation direction, and any warnings. The last 30 fault occurrences shall be retained as well as the fault data listed in the previous sentence of each fault. New faults beyond 30 shall overwrite the oldest faults. 16. The display unit keypad shall allow setting operational parameters including minimum and maximum frequency, and acceleration and deceleration times. The display shall offer user monitoring of faults, frequency, unit temperature, and motor speed, current, torque, power, voltage, and temperature.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION A. All work described in this section shall be installed, wired, circuit tested and calibrated by factory certified technicians qualified for this work and in the regular employment of the Energy Management Control System manufacturer or its exclusive factory authorized installing contracting field office (representative). The installing office shall have a minimum of five years of installation experience with the manufacturer and shall provide documentation in submittal package verifying

B/A #09100194 15910-35

longevity of the installing company's relationship with the manufacturer. Supervision, calibration and checkout of the system shall be by the employees of the local exclusive factory authorized temperature control contracting field office (branch or representative). B. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as detailed on the project drawing set. C. Drawings of Energy Management Control Systems are diagrammatic only and any apparatus not shown, such as relays, accessories, etc., but required to make the system operative to the complete satisfaction of the Architect shall be furnished and installed without additional cost. D. Line and low voltage electrical connections to control equipment shown specified or shown on the control diagrams shall be furnished and installed by the Division 15 contractor in accordance with these specifications. E. Equipment furnished by the HVAC Contractor that is normally wired before installation shall be furnished completely wired. Control wiring normally performed in the field will be furnished and installed by the Division 23 contractor. F. All control devices mounted on the face of control panels shall be clearly identified as to function and system served with permanently engraved phenolic labels.

3.2 WIRING A. All electrical control wiring and power wiring to the NAC, ILC, IBC, computers and network components (routers, hubs, switches, etc.) shall be the responsibility of the Division 23, EMCS Contractor. B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the Project Electrical Specifications (Division 26), the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes. All EMCS wiring shall be installed in the conduit types specified in the Project Electrical Specifications (Division 26) unless otherwise allowed by the National Electrical Code or applicable local codes. Where EMCS plenum rated cable wiring is allowed it shall be run parallel to or at right angles to the structure, properly supported and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. 3.3 WARRANTY A. Equipment, materials and workmanship incorporated into the work shall be warranted for a period of one year from the time of system acceptance. B. Within this period, upon notice by the Owner, any defects in the work provided under this section due to faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship shall be promptly (within 48 hours after receipt of notice) repaired or replaced by the Division 23 contractor at no expense to the Owner 3.4 WARRANTY ACCESS A. The Owner shall grant to the Division 23 contractor, reasonable access to the EMCS during the warranty period.

B/A #09100194 15910-36

3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. The Division 23 contractor shall perform all necessary calibration, testing and de- bugging and perform all required operational checks to insure that the system is functioning in full accordance with these specifications. The Division 23 contractor is to coordinate the checkout of the system such that each Division has a representative present during system checkout. B. The Division 15 contractor shall perform tests to verify proper performance of components, routines, and points. Repeat tests until proper performance results. This testing shall include a point-by-point log to validate 100% of the input and output points of the DDC system operation. C. Upon completion of the performance tests described above, repeat these tests, point by point as described in the validation log above in presence of Owner's Representative, as required. Properly schedule these tests so testing is complete at a time directed by the Owner's Representative. Do not delay tests so as to prevent delay of occupancy permits or building occupancy. D. System Acceptance: Satisfactory completion is when the Temperature Control sub- contractor has performed successfully all the required testing to show performance compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. System acceptance shall be contingent upon completion and review of all corrected deficiencies. 3.6 TRAINING A. The Division 23 contractor shall provide 40 hours of instruction to the owner's designated personnel on the operation of the EMCS and describe its intended use with respect to the programmed functions specified. Operator orientation of the EMCS shall include, but not be limited to; device programming software, graphical development software, graphical user interface, the overall operation program, equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system), commands, systems generation, advisories, and appropriate operator intervention required in responding to the System's operation. B. The training shall be in three sessions as follows: 1. Initial Training: One day session (8 hours) after system is started up and at least one week before first acceptance test. Manual shall have been submitted at least two weeks prior to training so that the owners' personnel can start to familiarize themselves with the system before classroom instruction begins. 2. First Follow-Up Training: Two days (16 hours total) approximately two weeks after initial training, and before Formal Acceptance. These sessions will deal with more advanced topics and answer questions. 3. Warranty Follow Up: Two days (16 hours total) in no less than 4 hour increments, to be scheduled at the request of the owner during the one year warranty period. These sessions shall cover topics as requested by the owner such as; how to add additional points, create and gather data for trends, graphic screen generation or modification of control routines.

B/A #09100194 15910-37

PART 4 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

4.1 SUMMARY A. For each system listed, provide the sequence of operation as stated. 1. Refer to Drawings for information which indicates the components and intended control functions and devices. 2. EMCS Contractor shall be responsible for all control wiring connections, auxiliary devices and control wiring diagrams to complete the control system and attain the described sequence of operation. 3. All set-points of sensors, controllers and the like, that are not factory preset, shall be preset by the EMCS Contractor before system startup.

PART 5 POINT LISTS

5.1 SUMMARY A. The control points in the mechanical drawings shall be accessible from the GUI and/or the OWNER’S system server infrastructure. The supplier of the ILC and IBC devices shall ensure that the points listed in this table are accessible on their respective networks, by the Network Area Controller (NAC). B. The NACs shall make available to the OWNER’S TCP/IP and GUI via BACnet TCP/IP or OBIX TCP/IP all points required for the proper monitoring, maintenance, troubleshooting, alarming, scheduling, global control strategies and any other sequences called for in this specification.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15910-38

SECTION 15940 -SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes sequence of operation for: 1. Heat Pumps. 2. Heat Pump Console Units and Vertical Heat Pumps 3. Dedicated Outside Air Units. 4. Heat Pump Water Loop. 5. Exhaust fans. 6. Make-up Air Units. 7. Unit Heaters. 8. Domestic Water Heating system. 9. Domestic Water Re-circulation. 10. Generators. 11. Fire Alarm. 12. Lighting Control System 13. Electric Meters.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15910 - Direct Digital Controls: For equipment, devices, system components, and software to implement sequences of operation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate mechanical system controlled and control system components. 1. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and limits. Submit written description of control sequence. 2. Submit flow diagrams for each control system, graphically depicting control logic. 3. Submit draft copies of graphic displays indicating mechanical system components, control system components, and controlled function status and value. 4. Coordinate submittals with information requested in Section 15910.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and set points of controls, including changes to sequences made after submission of shop drawings.

B/A # 09100194 15940 - 1

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 HEAT PUMPS

A. Occupied: 1. The fans shall run continuously. A current switch shall initiate an alarm if the fan fails to start. 2. A space sensor through a controller shall operate the refrigeration components to maintain the desired space temperature. 3. On call for cooling or heating; control valve shall open allowing water flow to refrigerant heat exchanger. After delay to allow valve to fully open, refrigeration system shall start.

B. Unoccupied:

1. When the space temperature falls below the unoccupied temperature, the unit shall cycle on to maintain the unoccupied set point.

2. Unit shall switch to occupied mode when local override is pressed. Unit to remain in occupied mode for 60 minutes (adj) before returning to unoccupied mode.

3.2 HEAT PUMP CONSOLE UNITS AND VERTICAL HEAT PUMPS

A. A space sensor through a controller shall operate the fan and refrigeration components to maintain the desired space temperature.

B. On call for cooling or heating; control valve shall open allowing water flow to refrigerant heat exchanger. After delay to allow valve to fully open, refrigeration system shall start.

3.3 DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEMS (RTU-1,2 & AHU-1,2)

A. Based on adjustable time schedule and actual building occupancy, enable DOAS. Determine fan status by current sensing devices. When fan fails to start as commanded, signal alarm.

B. Safety Devices: 1. High Temperature Protection: Stop fans and close outside dampers when temperature in return air is above 300 degrees F; signal alarm. 2. Smoke Detector: Stop fans, close outside air and exhaust dampers, when smoke is detected; signal alarm.

B/A # 09100194 15940 - 2

3. Fire Alarm Shut-down: Stop fans; close outside air, return air, and relief dampers.

C. Outside Air Damper: When supply fan and exhaust fan are running, open intake and exhaust dampers. Prevent supply fan from starting until intake and exhaust dampers are open and positions are verified.

D. Discharge Air Temperature: Maintain discharge air temperature at 70 degrees F (adj.) for heating and 75 degrees F (adj.) for cooling. Monitor corridor temperature and adjust supply air temperature to maintain a minimum of 68 Degrees F (adj.)space temperature for heating and a maximum of 75 Degrees F (adj.) for cooling

E. Display: 1. System graphic. 2. System on/off indication. 3. System day/night mode. 4. Supply fan on/off indication. 5. Exhaust fan on/off indication. 6. Outside air temperature indication. 7. Fan discharge air temperature indication. 8. Fan discharge temperature control point adjustment. 9. Energy recovery wheel discharge air temperature. 10. Building static pressure indication. 11. System on/off auto switch. 12. System day/night/auto switch. 13. Supply fan on/off/auto switch. 14. Exhaust fan on/off/auto switch. 15. Supply fan airflow measurement station. 16. Exhaust fan airflow measurement station. 17. Refrigeration circuit(s) status. 18. Energy recovery wheel status. 19. Minimum of five (5) alarm points.

3.4 HEAT PUMP WATER LOOP (P-1, 2 & 3)

A. Enable building distribution pumps (P-1 & 2) continuously. A current switch shall verify pump operation. Initiate alarm if pump fails to start and begin sequence with lag pump.

B. Pumps (P-1 & 2) shall be on a lead/lag program to be switched based on equal run time.

C. Variable frequency drives shall control building distribution pumps (P-1 & 2) to maintain differential pressure set point measured between supply and return piping mains. A minimum of two (2) differential pressure (DP) sensors shall be

B/A # 09100194 15940 - 3

located within the system. EMCS shall continuously pole the DP sensors and satisfy the most demanding zone.

D. If water loop temperature falls below 25 degrees F (adj.) an alarm shall be initiated.

E. Enable system filter pump (P-3) when pumps (P-1,2) are operating. Monitor system filter differential pressure; signal alarm and stop pump (P-3) for differential pressure above 25 PSIG (adj.).

F. Display: 1. System graphic. 2. Building distribution pump on/off/auto switch. 3. Building distribution pump status. 4. Heat Pump water temperature - supply and return. 5. Differential pressure status. 6. Differential pressure adjustment. 7. Heat Pump Water Loop alarms. 8. System Filter Pump Status. 9. System Filter Differential Pressure Status. 10. System Filter Alarm

3.5 EXHAUST FANS – BOILER ROOM (EF-7)

A. Provide one stage cooling, one stage heating (UH-2) thermostat for Mechanical room.

B. On room temperature above 80 degrees F (adj.), open intake damper (MD-1) and start exhaust fan.

C. On room temperature above 90 degrees F (adj.) signal alarm.

D. Monitor and graphically display status. Signal alarm upon fan failure.

3.6 EXHAUST FANS- STORAGE ROOM (EF-1)

A. Enable fan and run continuous.

B. Monitor and graphically display status. Signal alarm upon fan failure.

3.7 MAKE-UP AIR UNITS (MAU-1,2)

A. Interlock operation of Make-up Air Unit (MAU-1) with exhaust fans (EF-2,3). Enable supply fan and run continuous. Modulate gas heat to maintain discharge air temperature of 70 Degrees F (adj.).

B/A # 09100194 15940 - 4

B. Interlock operation of Make-up Air Unit (MAU-2) with exhaust fan (EF-4). Enable supply fan and run continuous. Modulate gas heat to maintain discharge air temperature of 70 Degrees F (adj.).

C. Unit Mounted Controller shall provide general alarm to EMCS.

D. If associated exhaust fan fails to operate stop make-up air unit and signal alarm.

3.8 UNIT HEATERS (UH-1,2)

A. Single temperature thermostat cycles heater to maintain constant space temperature of 68 degrees F (adj.).

3.9 DOMESTIC WATER HEATING SYSTEM (WH-1 & 2)

A. Water heater controller shall operate water heaters with lead/lag logic based on equal run-time. Maintain 140 degree F (adj.) discharge water temperature.

B. BMS shall monitor and graphically display water heater outlet temperatures.

C. BMS shall monitor and graphically display mixing valve outlet temperatures.

3.10 DOMESTIC WATER RE-CIRCULATION (P-1)

A. Time Schedule: Start and stop circulating pumps based on time schedule (adj.). Monitor and display pump status by current sensing devices. When pump fails to start as commanded, signal alarm

3.11 GENERATORS

A. Two (2) emergency generators located on the north side of the building exterior shall communicate via Modbus, Lon, or BacNet protocols. Building controls contractor shall route communication wire to each generator or the control panel for monitoring points.

B. EMCS shall monitor and graphically display 40 points per generator, 80 points total.

3.12 FIRE ALARM

A. Fire alarm panel, located in the electrical room, shall communicate via Modbus, Lon, or BacNet Protocols.

B. EMCS shall monitor and graphically display 12 points from the fire alarm system.

3.13 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Lighting control panel shall communicate to EMCS system via Modbus, Lon, or BacNet protocol.

B/A # 09100194 15940 - 5

B. EMCS shall include: 1. Schedules a. For scheduling and grouping of relays coordinate with lighting controls contractor 10 days prior to start-up. b. Scheduling shall provide system wide overrides. Any relay, group or zone that is overridden On, before or after hours shall automatically be swept Off after a maximum of 2 hours (adj.).

C. EMCS shall display: 1. Building floor plans, indicating (where available): a. Lighting status b. Lighting switch 2. Time-of-day schedules

END OF SECTION

B/A # 09100194 15940 - 6

SECTION 15950 -TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 -GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Testing adjusting, and balancing of air systems. 2. Testing adjusting, and balancing of hydronic systems. 3. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 4. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions. 5. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15910 - Direct Digital Controls: Requirements for coordination between DDC system and testing, adjusting, and balancing work. 2. Section 15940 - Sequence of Operation: Sequences of operation for HVAC equipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Associated Air Balance Council: 1. AABC MN-1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.

C. Natural Environmental Balancing Bureau: 1. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date of each instrument.

B. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 National Standards for Total System Balance forms or NEBB Report forms.

C. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. Provide WEEKLY reports to owner/AE during test and balance.

B/A #09100194 15950 - 1

D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project.

E. Furnish reports in soft cover, letter, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with table of contents page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing report inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with AABC MN-1 National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance, ASHRAE 111, or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.

B. Prior to commencing Work, calibrate each instrument to be used.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC or NEBB.

B. Angencies: 1. Great Lakes balancing 2. Quality Air 3. International Test and Balance 4. Mechanical Testing Services

C. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor.

1.7 SEQUENCING

A. Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 -PRODUCTS

Not Used.

B/A #09100194 15950 - 2

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Verify the following: 1. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 13. Pumps are rotating correctly. 14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place or in normal position. 15. Service and balancing valves are open.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations.

B. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

B/A #09100194 15950 - 3

D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted, verify correcting adjustments have been made.

E. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system balance.

F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to obtain required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities.

B. Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts.

E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by using volume dampers located in ducts.

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.

H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.

I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.

J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage.

K. At modulating damper locations, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum airflow rate, full cooling, and at minimum airflow rate, full heating.

B/A #09100194 15950 - 4

L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to obtain required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure.

M. Medium pressure ductwork shall be leak tested and sealed to meet leakage restrictions.

3.6 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust water systems, after air balancing, to obtain design quantities.

B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow-metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in system.

C. Adjust systems to obtain specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing.

D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open or in normal position to heat transfer elements.

E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.

F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, simulate full flow in one part by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.

3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: 1. HVAC Pumps. 2. Plumbing Pumps 3. Heat Pumps (water to air). 4. Fans. 5. Dedicated Outside Air Units. 6. Make-Up Air Units. 7. Air Inlets and Outlets.

B. Report Forms 1. Title Page: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency c. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency

B/A #09100194 15950 - 5

d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Architect g. Project Engineer h. Project Contractor i. Project altitude j. Report date 2. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance b. Notable characteristics of system c. Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate building pressurization e. Nomenclature used throughout report f. Test conditions 3. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date 4. Electric Motors: a. Manufacturer b. Model/Frame c. HP/BHP and kW d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load e. RPM f. Service factor g. Starter size, rating, heater elements h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 5. V-Belt Drive: a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d. Belt, size and quantity e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual 6. Pump Data: a. Identification/number b. Manufacturer c. Size/model d. Impeller e. Service f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW

B/A #09100194 15950 - 6

h. Discharge pressure i. Suction pressure j. Total operating head pressure k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures l. Shut off, total head pressure 7. Air Moving Equipment: a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge f. Air flow, specified and actual g. Return air flow, specified and actual h. Outside air flow, specified and actual i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual j. Inlet pressure k. Discharge pressure l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore m. Number of Belts/Make/Size n. Fan RPM 8. Return Air/Outside Air Data: a. Identification/location b. Design air flow c. Actual air flow d. Design return air flow e. Actual return air flow f. Design outside air flow g. Actual outside air flow h. Return air temperature i. Outside air temperature j. Required mixed air temperature k. Actual mixed air temperature l. Design outside/return air ratio m. Actual outside/return air ratio 9. Exhaust Fan Data: a. Location b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Air flow, specified and actual f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual g. Inlet pressure h. Discharge pressure i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore j. Number of Belts/Make/Size k. Fan RPM

B/A #09100194 15950 - 7

10. Duct Traverse: a. System zone/branch b. Duct size c. Area d. Design velocity e. Design air flow f. Test velocity g. Test air flow h. Duct static pressure i. Air temperature j. Air correction factor k. Duct leakage testing for all medium ductwork 11. Air Distribution Test Sheet: a. Location/Room Number b. Grille Type c. Grille Size d. Minimum design air flow e. Maximum design air flow f. Maximum actual air flow g. Percent of design air flow

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 15950 - 8

DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL

16000 General 16060 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 16070 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16075 Identification for Electrical Systems 16080 Coordination and Arc Flash Study 16095 Minor Electrical Demolition 16100 Wiring Methods 16123 Building Wire and Cable 16130 Raceway and Boxes 16131 Cabinets and Enclosures 16133 Cable Trays 16140 Wiring Devices 16141 Floor Boxes 16150 Wiring Connections 16211 Electrical Utility Connection 16235 Packaged Engine Generator 16236 Digital Paralleling Control Switchgear 16411 Enclosed Switches 16421 Enclosed Motor Controllers 16442 Panelboards 16491 Fuses 16510 Interior Lighting Fixtures 16515 Lighting Controls 16520 Exterior Lighting Fixtures 16530 Emergency Lighting 16700 Communications Raceways 16710 Communications Circuits 16720 Integrated Security Management System 16721 Fire Alarm System

B/A#09100194 Table of Contents

SECTION 16000 -BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section is a part of the entire set of Contract Documents and shall be coordinated with the applicable provisions of the other parts.

B. The following requirements are intended as clarification of, or additions to the requirements set forth under General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 of these Specifications. Should there be any conflict between these requirements and those in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, the Contractor shall make written request for clarification of same by addendum prior to bid opening or abide by the decision of the Engineer without recourse.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Description of Work 1. The work to be executed under this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, equipment and incidental services required to complete and leave ready for operation, the equipment and systems as indicated on the drawings and hereinafter specified. All materials, supervision, etc. required for complete system, will be furnished by this Contractor. 2. Materials and installation methods shall adhere to the provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

B. Principal Items of Work, including the following: 1. Basic Electrical Requirements Section 16000 2. Grounding and Bonding Section 16060 3. Electrical Hangers and Supports Section 16070 4. Electrical Identification Section 16075 5. Minor Electrical Demotlition Section 16095 6. Wiring Methods Section 16100 7. Building Wire and Cable Section 16123 8. Raceways and Boxes Section 16130 9. Cabinets and Enclosures Section 16131 10. Cable Trays Section 16133 11. Wiring Devices Section 16140 12. Floor Boxes Section 16141 13. Wiring Connections Section 16150 14. Electrical Utility Services Section 16211 15. Engine Generator Section 16235 16. Digital Paralleling Control Switchgear Section 16236 17. Enclosed Switches Section 16411 B/A#09100194 16000-1

18. Enclosed Controllers Section 16421 19. Panelboards Section 16442 20. Fuses Section 16491 21. Interior Lighting Section 16510 22. Lighting Controls Section 16515 23. Exterior Lighting Section 16520 24. Emergency Lighting Section 16530 25. Communications Raceways Section 16700 26. Communication Circuits Section 16710 27. Integrated Security Management System Section 16720 28. Fire Alarm System Section 16721

C. Work Specified Elsewhere The Contractor shall review the drawings and specifications of all trades concerning this project to correlate equipment installing and connections.

1.3 DRAWINGS

A. The drawings indicate the location and general arrangement of all electrical work and shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit. The Contractor shall examine the drawings of other trades and shall verify the conditions governing his work at the job site. He shall arrange his work accordingly. No changes shall be made without written approval of the Engineer.

B. Field Measurements Verify the dimensions governing this work at the building site. No extra compensation will be claimed or allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings. Examine adjoining work, on which this work is dependent for perfect efficiency and report any work; which must be corrected. No waiver of responsibility for defective work shall be claimed or allowed due to the failure to report unfavorable conditions affecting this work. Generally, the drawings take precedence in all matters pertaining to the building structure; electrical drawings in all matters pertaining to electrical trades installation. However, all conflicts shall be reported to the Engineer for his review.

C. Coordination Before any equipment is installed, the Contractor shall carefully check the drawings, and all other mechanical and electrical drawings, and all job conditions and any lack of coordination between the work and the drawings or job conditions shall be immediately reported to the Engineer in writing.

D. Symbols and Abbreviations Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, all symbols and abbreviations are as indicated in "Guidelines for the Construction Industry" published by the Construction Industry Council of Southwestern Michigan, 18100 Schaefer B/A#09100194 16000-2

Highway, Detroit, Michigan 48235. Refer to symbol list on the drawings.

E. Inspection of Site 1. The Contractor shall visit the site, examine and verify the conditions under which his work must be conducted before submitting a proposal. 2. The submitting of a proposal implies that the Contractor has visited the site and is conversant with the conditions under which his work must be conducted.

1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS 1. The Contractor is responsible for walking the site and verifying existing conditions and scope of work.

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The following documents are a part of this specification and shall indicate minimum safety provisions. All work called for in these specifications and the plans that exceed minimum safety provisions shall take precedence. 1. State Construction Code - latest edition. 2. State Electrical Code 3. Michigan O.S.H.A. 4. Americans with Disabilities Act

1.6 MANUFACTURER’S DIRECTIONS

A. Install all equipment in strict accordance with all directions and recommendations furnished by the manufacturer. Where such directions are in conflict with the plans and specifications, report such conflicts to the Engineer who shall make such compromises as he deems necessary and desirable.

1.7 CUTTING AND REPAIRING

A. Where such cutting becomes necessary, employ the trade which installed the work originally to do the cutting and to restore such cut work and close openings, communicating from one compartment to another. Before any cutting or drilling of holes is attempted, notify the Engineer for approval.

1.8 DEFINITIONS

B. The terms "Contractor," "This Trade," "This Contractor," "Electrical Trade,", or "Electrical Contractor" as used in this Division of the Specifications shall be taken to mean the individual or organization that signs a subcontract or contract to perform electrical work.

B. NEMA shall mean National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

B/A#09100194 16000-3

C. NEC shall mean National Electrical Code.

D. ETL shall mean Electrical Testing Laboratories.

E. UL shall mean Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1.9 MANUFACTURER’S DRAWINGS

A. All manufacturer's drawings, catalog cuts and specifications shall be properly identified with the Engineer's project number and title. Each piece of equipment shall be properly identified as to its location and equipment number.

1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. No cutting shall be done which is likely to impair the strength of the building.

B. All openings in walls, ceilings, or floors required by the Contractor shall be in accordance with Division 1.

C. All measurements necessary for the proper installation of materials or apparatus shall be taken in the field, and cutting and patching shall be provided where necessary.

1.11 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for review shall be made prior to the purchase of materials. Submittal procedures shall be in accordance with Division 1 of these specifications, and the following: 1. Submit a minimum of eight (8) copies for distribution with product data grouped to include complete submittals of related system, products, and accessories in a single submittal. Each submittal shall be clearly marked to indicated equipment number, specification section, etc., which the submittal describes. Submittals shall be submitted within 10 days after awarded the contract. Contractor to responsible for notifying general contractor of long lead items & times upon submission of shop drawings. 2. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. 3. Submittals must be thoroughly checked by the Contractor and must contain his stamp of approval before being sent to the Architect for review. 4. Submittals not conforming to the above requirements will be returned without review and must be revised and resubmitted. 5. See Division 1 General Requirements from the Construction Manager

B. Submittal of shop drawings and product data will be accepted only when submitted by this contractor. Facsimile material will not be accepted.

C. Provide submittals for:

B/A#09100194 16000-4

1. Lighting Fixtures. 2. Conduit. 3. Wiring. 4. Panelboards. 5. Occupancy Sensors. 6. Generators/Auto Transfer Switches/Diesel Tank. 7. Wiring Devices & Covers. 8. Fire Alarm Devices 9. Lighting Controls and Relays 10. Disconnects/Combination Starters 11. Cable Tray with Layout and Support. 12. Fusing 13. Fire Stopping 14. Communications Equipment and Wiring

1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Construction Procedures, for procedures and requirements for preparation and submittal of maintenance manuals.

B. In addition to the information required by Division 1 for maintenance data, include the following information: 1. Provide four (4) sets of operating/maintenance manuals. 2. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts. 3. Manufacturer’s printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions. 4. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. 5. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

1.13 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Mark drawings to indicate; 1. Revisions to conduit size and location both exterior and interior. 2. Actual equipment locations. 3. Equipment dimensions for major electrical equipment. 4. Distribution and branch electrical circuitry. 5. Fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements. 6. Change orders. 7. Concealed control devices.

B/A#09100194 16000-5

B. The Contractor shall keep one (1) set of drawings marked with As-built conditions and provide the owner an electronic copy and (1) one complete set of As-built Drawings upon completion of the project.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.1 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

A. In all instances where drawings or specifications indicate materials or methods of higher quality than the minimum required by the referenced codes, the drawings and specification shall govern. All electrical equipment shall be UL listed or equal testing agency where applicable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONDITIONS OF COMPLETION

A. As conditions precedent to the final payment, the Contractor shall turn over to the Owner the following items: 1. All panel and cabinet keys, spare parts, operating instructions, maintenance instructions, schematics, wiring diagrams, etc. 2. A certificate of final inspection indicating approval by the inspecting authority. 3. Training on all equipment I.E. Generator, Lighting control, etc. 4. Operations and Maintenance manuals. 5. Record Drawings. 6. Spare parts or pieces are delivered and stored properly.

3.2 PAINTING

A. All other on-site painting of electrical equipment shall be provided by the Contractor. Care shall be taken to insure that all nameplates of electrical equipment shall not be painted.

B. The Contractor shall paint or touch-up any electrical equipment damaged or scratched in handling or installation or shipping from the factory.

C. All exposed iron and wood work, including angle iron, pipe supports, racks, blocks, etc., required for electrical work shall be painted by the Contractor subject to approval.

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS

A. Install all equipment in strict accordance with all directions and recommendations furnished by the manufacturer. Where such directions are in conflict with the plans

B/A #09100194 16000-6

and specifications, report such conflicts to the Engineer who shall require the work to be in accordance with design.

3.4 GUARANTEE

A. Provide general guarantee for one (1) year on all labor in approved form. Provide any special guarantees as required under the sections of the specification. Refer to guarantee requirements in General Conditions.

3.5 PERMITS

A. The Contractor shall secure all permits and inspections required for the electrical work. All permits and certificates of inspection and approval signed by the controlling building department shall be furnished in duplicate to the (General) Contractor and shall become the property of the Owner. Any fees and inspections shall be paid by the Contractor.

3.6 DAMAGE TO OTHER WORK

A. This Contractor will be held responsible for damage to work caused by his work or through the negligence of his workmen. All patching and repairing of damaged work will be done by the trade which originally installed the work, as directed by the Engineer, but the cost of same shall be paid by this Contractor.

3.7 INSPECTION AND TESTS

A. Authorized representatives of the Engineer shall have access to and the privilege of inspecting all work and materials as the work progresses. These representatives will have authority to approve or reject any work with the drawings, installation instructions, specifications, codes, and good engineering practice as a basis for any actions taken.

B. Circuits shall be phased out and connected to the panels in proper manner before energization of the equipment. Loads shall be distributed as evenly as possible on all phases. All wires shall be entirely free from grounds and short circuits.

C. Refer to additional testing adjusting requirements specified within Division 16 after energization.

3.8 RECEIPT OF PORTABLE OR DETACHABLE PARTS

A. Contractor shall retain in his possession and be responsible for all portable or detachable portions of the installation such as fuses, keys, locks, etc., until completion of the work and shall turn them over to the authorized representative and obtain itemized receipt. The receipt, together with a certificate of approval, shall be attached to the Contractor's request for final payment.

B/A #09100194 16000-7

B. Deliver all special tools and appurtenances for proper operation and maintenance of the equipment provided and request receipt for same.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 16000-8

SECTION 16060 -GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Rod electrodes. 2. Active electrodes. 3. Wire. 4. Grounding well components. 5. Mechanical connectors. 6. Exothermic connections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 2. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment.

B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Grounding systems use the following elements as grounding electrodes: 1. Metal underground water pipe. 2. Metal building frame. 3. Concrete-encased electrode. 4. Metal underground gas piping system. 5. Rod electrode. 6. Plate electrode. 7. Grounding Ring

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B/A#09100194 16060-1

B. Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections.

C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active electrodes.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements..

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide grounding materials conforming to requirements of NEC, IEEE 142, and UL labeled.

B. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan standards.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Set up a pre-installation meeting with General Contractor involved with the work being performed.

B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.

B/A#09100194 16060-2

D. Do not deliver items to project before time of installation. Limit shipment of bulk and multiple-use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. It is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to notify and coordinate with the General Contractor and other trades to be performed.

B. Complete grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel prior concrete placement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ROD ELECTRODES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. 2. Copperweld, Inc. 3. Erico, Inc. 4. O-Z Gedney Co. 5. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. 6. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: 1. Material: Copper-clad steel 2. Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3. Length: 10 feet (3.0 m).

C. Connector: Connector for exothermic welded connection or bolted.

2.2 WIRE

A. Material: Stranded copper.

B. Foundation Electrodes: 4/0 copper conductor bare.

C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Copper conductor bare.

D. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor bare.

E. Grounding Ring: 4/0 copper conductor bare.

2.3 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. 2. Copperweld, Inc. 3. Erico, Inc. 4. O-Z Gedney Co.

B/A#09100194 16060-3

5. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. 6. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Furnish materials in accordance with State of Michigan standards.

C. Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation.

2.4 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. 2. Cadweld, Erico, Inc. 3. Copperweld, Inc. 4. Thomas & Betts, Electrical. 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Exothermic materials, accessories, and tools for preparing and making permanent field connections between grounding system components.

2.5 BUSBARS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Chatsworth 2. Newton Instrument Company 3. Substitiution: Section 01600- Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Bar shall be ¼” thick by 4” wide by 12” long. The bar shall be electro tin plated and shall be insulated from its support.

C. Installation: 1. Install one (1) number 3/0 ground in a 1” conduit from each location back to main electrical service.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove paint, surface contaminants at connection points.

B/A#09100194 16060-4

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with IEEE 142.

B. Install rod electrodes at locations as indicated on Drawings. Install additional rod electrodes to achieve specified resistance to ground.

C. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view.

D. Install grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing as indicated on Drawings. Electrically bond steel together.

E. Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in fountain structures.

F. Locate busbar on plywood located in telecom/data rooms. Splices in the grounding conductor are not acceptable.

G. Install one grounding inspection well over ground rod.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing to be reviewed by General Contractor and Architect/Engineer.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Grounding and Bonding: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

D. Perform ground resistance testing in accordance with IEEE 142.

E. Perform leakage current tests in accordance with NFPA 99.

F. Perform continuity testing in accordance with IEEE 142.

G. When improper grounding is found on receptacles, check receptacles in entire project and correct. Perform retest.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16060-5

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A#09100194 16060-6

SECTION 16070 -ELECTRICAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Conduit supports. 2. Formed steel channel. 3. Spring steel clips. 4. Sleeves. 5. Mechanical sleeve seals. 6. Firestopping relating to electrical work. 7. Firestopping accessories. 8. Equipment bases and supports.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07270 – Firestopping: Product requirements and description.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Fire Stops.

B. FM Global: 1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.

C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed): 1. WH - Certification Listings.

B/A#09100194 16070-1

1.3 DEFINITIONS

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Firestopping Materials: UL 263 and UL 1479 to achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating.

B. Surface Burning: ASTM E84 and UL 723 with maximum flame spread / smoke developed rating of 25/450.

C. Firestop interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Firestopping: Conform to applicable codes for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.

B. Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01600 – Basic Electrical Requirements and requirements for submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout for cable tray with location and detail of trapeze hangers.

C. Product Data: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity. 2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.

D. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly.

E. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of hangers and supports.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: 1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components. 2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.

B/A#09100194 16070-2

G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

H. Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgements by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan standard.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum two years documented experience approved by manufacturer.

1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Convene minimum two week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.

1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F (15 degrees C).

C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials.

D. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.

B/A#09100194 16070-3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp. 2. Electroline Manufacturing Company. 3. O-Z Gedney Co. 4. Unistrut. 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads.

C. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel.

D. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten.

E. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits.

F. Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F (85 degrees C). Self locking.

2.2 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for communications wiring Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage (1.2 mm) thick galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for communications wiring Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.

C. Fire-stopping Insulation: See Specification 07270.

D. Install (1) extra sleeves in each wall where sleeve penetrations are shown. Size of extra sleeve to be the same size as the adjacent sleeve.

2.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. Hilti Corp. Model. 3. 3M fire Protection Products. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B/A#09100194 16070-4

B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only one type for each similar application. 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of ceramic fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.

C. Color: Dark gray.

2.4 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings.

B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Plywood or particle board.

C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place.

D. General: 1. Furnish UL listed products or products tested by independent testing laboratory. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated.

E. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish modular mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between conduit and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.

B/A#09100194 16070-5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.

C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.

C. Install damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.

3.3 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Unless noted otherwise, wiring above accessible ceilings may be installed without enclosed raceways but should be supported. Install cables for fire alarm, public address, clock, intercom, etc in cable tray through corridors as shown on drawings. All cables shall be installed in D-rings, bridle rings, drive rings, and beam clamps for supporting the cables independent of ceiling support wires and/or rods where not installed in conduit or cable tray. Cables and wires shall not be laid on the ceiling tiles, ceiling tee bar grid structure, or supported directly on any member not specifically intended for cable raceway use. Provide cable supports at intervals not to exceed 5 feet.

B. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps and steel ramset fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Provide wood screws.

C. Inserts: 1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. 2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. B/A#09100194 16070-6

3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches (100 mm). 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.

D. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with NEC.

E. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.

F. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers.

G. Supports: 1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts. 2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. 3. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch (25 mm) off wall. 4. Support vertical conduit at every floor. 5. For equipment in boiler room (with high ceiling area), provide floor supports as required for conduits serving equipment and outlets.

3.4 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING

A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.

B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for compliance with required fire ratings.

C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve required fire and smoke rating, to uniform density and texture.

D. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.

E. Fire Rated Surface: 1. Seal opening at floor, wall, and roof as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) void between sleeve and building element. c. Pack void with backing material.

B/A#09100194 16070-7

d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure penetrated. 2. Where cable tray and conduit penetrates fire rated surface, install firestopping product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with Architectural drawings for fire rated walls.

F. Non-Rated Surfaces: 1. Seal opening through non-fire rated floor and roof opening as follows: a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on both sides of building element. b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) void between sleeve and building element. c. Install type of firestopping material recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install escutcheons floor plates or ceiling plates where conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished ceiling. 3. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links of mechanical seal to size of conduit and tighten in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations at telecommunication rooms and data rooms. Apply sealant to both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space between sleeve and conduit.

3.5 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches (102mm) thick and extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond supported equipment. Refer to Section 03300.

B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.

C. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.

3.6 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES

A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links.

B. Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam.

C. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

D. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.

E. Extend sleeves through floors minimum of 2 inches above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. B/A#09100194 16070-8

F. Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between conduit or raceway and adjacent work with stuffing fire stopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. Also furnish 10% extra sleeves for future.

G. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Execution Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Execution Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Execution Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16070-9

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

B/A#09100194 16070-10

SECTION 16075 -ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Nameplates. 2. Labels. 3. Wire markers. 4. Conduit markers. 5. Stencils. 6. Underground Warning Tape. 7. Lockout Devices. 8. Arc Flash Labels.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01600 – Basic Electrical Requirements.

B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required. 2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.

C. Samples: 1. Submit two tags, actual size. 2. Submit two labels, actual size.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag numbers.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.

B/A#09100194 16075-1

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage.

C. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness.

D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Install labels only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Execution Requirements: Requirements for extra materials.

B. Furnish two containers of spray-on adhesive.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on white contrasting background color.

B. Letter Size: 1. 1/8 inch (3 mm) high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. ¼ inch (6 mm) high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

C. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

2.2 LABELS

A. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch (5 mm) white letters on black background.

2.3 WIRE MARKERS

A. Description: Cloth tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers.

B/A#09100194 16075-2

B. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on Drawings. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on shop drawings.

2.4 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS

A. Description: Labels fastened with adhesive.

B. Color: 1. 480 Volt System: Black lettering on white background. 2. 208 Volt System: Black lettering on white background. 3. Fire Alarm System: Red lettering on white background. 4. Telephone System: Blue lettering on white background. 5. Security System: Yellow lettering on black background. 6. PA System: Green lettering on white background.

C. Legend: 1. 480 Volt System: 480 VOLTS. 2. 208 Volt System: 208 VOLTS. 3. Fire Alarm System: FIRE ALARM. 4. Telephone System: TELEPHONE. 5. Security System: SECURITY. 6. Paging/Intercom Systems: PA SYSTEM.

2.5 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Description: 4 inch (100 mm) wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines.

2.6 ARC FLASH LABELS

A. Description: 1. 5 inch wide by 7 inch high, blank and orange self sticking label. Furnish and install a label on each panelboard and switchboard. Information for the labels to be provided from arc flash study.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09900 for stencil painting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting.

B/A#09100194 16075-3

B. Nameplate Installation: 1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. 4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive. 5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished locations. 6. Install nameplates for the following: a. Switchboards. b. Panelboards. c. Service Disconnects. d. Mechanical Equipment Disconnects. e. Auto transfer devices

C. Label Installation: 1. Install label parallel to equipment lines. 2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations. 3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. 4. Install labels over 20ft minimum.

D. Wire Marker Installation: 1. Install wire marker for each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection. 2. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run.

E. Underground Warning Tape Installation: 1. Install underground warning tape along length of each underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16075-4 SECTION 16095 -MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Removal of existing electrical equipment, wiring, and conduit in areas to be remodeled; removal of designated construction; dismantling, cutting and alterations for completion of the Work. 2. Disposal of materials. 3. Recycling of materials. 4. Storage of removed materials. 5. Identification of utilities. 6. Salvaged items. 7. Protection of items to remain as indicated on Drawings. 8. Relocate existing equipment to accommodate construction.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02221 - Building Demolition: Demolition of utilities and other underground items. 2. Section 02225 - Minor Demolition For Remodeling: Removal of designated building equipment and construction. 3. Section 08310 - Access Doors and Panels: Execution requirements for access doors and panels specified by this section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

1.3 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.

1.4 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule work to coincide with new construction.

B. Cease operations immediately when structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

B/A#09100194 16095-1 B. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied buildings.

C. Coordinate demolition work with general trades.

D. Coordinate and sequence demolition so as not to cause shutdown of operation of surrounding areas and buildings. Provide after-hour/weekend shutdown for all electrical changeovers.

E. Shut-down Periods: 1. Arrange timing of shut-down periods of in service panels with Owner. Do not shut down any utility without prior written approval. 2. Keep shut-down period to minimum or use intermittent period as directed by Owner. 3. Maintain life-safety systems in full operation in occupied facilities, or provide notice minimum 14 days in advance.

F. Identify salvage items in cooperation with Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify wiring and equipment indicated to be demolished serve only abandoned facilities.

C. Verify termination points for demolished services.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Erect, and maintain temporary safeguards for protection of the public, Owner, Contractor’s employees, and existing improvements to remain.

3.3 DEMOLITION

A. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.

B/A#09100194 16095-2 B. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit and wiring above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors and patch surfaces.

C. Remove conduit, wire, boxes, and fastening devices to avoid any interference with new installation.

D. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.

E. Reconnect equipment being disturbed by renovation work and required for continue service to nearest available panel.

F. Disconnect or shut off service to areas where electrical work is to be removed. Remove electrical fixtures, equipment, and related switches, outlets, conduit and wiring which are not part of final project.

G. Install temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction.

H. Perform work on energized equipment or circuits with experienced and trained personnel.

I. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

J. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

K. Remove exposed abandoned grounding and bonding components, fasteners and supports, and electrical identification components, including abandoned components above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut embedded support elements flush with walls and floors.

L. Clean and repair existing equipment to remain.

M. Protect and retain power to existing active equipment remaining.

N. Cap abandoned empty conduit at both ends.

O. Dispose of any equipment containing PCB’s per local ordnances.

3.4 EXISTING PANELBOARDS

A. Ring out circuits in existing panel affected by the Work. Where additional circuits are needed, reuse circuits available for reuse. Install new breakers.

B/A#09100194 16095-3 B. Tag unused circuits as spare and provide and updated schedule for the panel.

C. Where existing circuits are indicated to be reused, use sensing measuring devices to verify circuits feeding Project area or are not in use.

D. Remove existing wire no longer in use from panel to equipment.

E. Provide new updated directories where more than three circuits have been modified or rewired.

3.5 SALVAGE ITEMS

A. Remove and protect items indicated on Drawings to be salvaged and turn over to Owner.

B. Items of salvageable value may be removed as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed.

3.6 REUSABLE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Carefully remove equipment, materials, or fixtures which are to be reused.

B. Disconnect, remove, or relocate existing electrical material and equipment interfering with new installation.

3.7 RECYCLE MATERIALS

A. Separate materials able to be recycled and recycle in accordance with Section 02225.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. Remove demolished materials as work progresses. Legally dispose.

C. Keep workplace neat.

3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16095-4 SECTION 16123 -BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes building wire and cable; nonmetallic-sheathed cable; service entrance cable; armored cable; metal clad cable; and wiring connectors and connections.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Product Requirements: Provide products as follows: 1. Stranded conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. 2. Stranded conductors for control circuits. 3. Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 4. Conductor not smaller than 18 AWG for control circuits. 5. 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 100 feet. 6. 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet (160 m).

B. Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods: 1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 3. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 4. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only THHN/THWN insulation in raceway. 5. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. 6. Underground Locations: Use only building wire THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway.

C. Conductor sizes are based on copper unless indicated as aluminum or "AL". When aluminum conductor is substituted for copper conductor, size to match circuit requirements for conductor ampacity and voltage drop.

B/A#09100194 16123-1 D. Raceway and boxes are located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations where required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements.

E. Raceway Products: 1. Underground More than 5 Feet outside Foundation Wall: Use thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Use cast metal boxes or nonmetallic handhole. 2. Underground Within 5 Feet outside Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit or, thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Use cast metal boxes. 3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit or, thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Use cast metal boxes or non metallic boxes. 4. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing. Use cast metal outlet, pull, and junction boxes. 5. In Slab Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit and thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Use cast boxes. 6. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit, electrical metallic tubing, thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Use cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. 7. Concealed Dry Locations: Use electrical metallic tubing, thickwall nonmetallic conduit and nonmetallic tubing. Use sheet-metal boxes. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Use hinged enclosure for large pull boxes. 8. Exposed Dry Locations: Use electrical metallic tubing. Use sheet-metal boxes. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Use hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.

F. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2 inch unless otherwise specified.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Conductor sizes are based on copper unless indicated as aluminum or "AL".

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. Where circuiting routes are over 100 feet verify voltage drop.

B/A#09100194 16123-2 1.8 COORDINATION

A. Section 016000: Basic Electrical Requirements.

B. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine routing and lengths required.

C. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BUILDING WIRE

A. Manufacturers: 1. Diamond Wire & Cable Co. 2. Essex Group Inc. 3. General Cable Co. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

C. Conductor: Copper.

D. Insulation: 600 volt rating; thermoplastic material rated 90 degrees C.

2.2 ARMORED CABLE

A. Manufacturers: 1. Diamond Wire & Cable Co. 2. Essex Group Inc. 3. General Cable Co. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Conductor: Copper.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.

E. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.

F. Conductor Assembly Covering: Lead.

2.3 METAL CLAD CABLE

A. Manufacturers: 1. Diamond Wire & Cable Co. 2. Essex Group Inc. 3. General Cable Co. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B/A#09100194 16123-3 B. Conductor: Copper.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.

E. Armor Material: Aluminum.

F. Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape.

2.4 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Split Bolt Connectors:

B. Solderless Pressure Connectors:

C. Spring Wire Connectors:

D. Compression Connectors:

2.5 WIREWAY

A. Manufacturers: 1. Wiremold. 2. Thomas & Betts. 3. BLine. 4. Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Product Description: General purpose type wireway with hinged cover and manufacturer’s standard enamel finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Coordination with project conditions.

B. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.

C. Verify mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

D. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.

B/A#09100194 16123-4 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Route wire and cable to meet Project conditions.

B. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.

C. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16075. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.

D. Special Techniques--Building Wire in Raceway: 1. Pull conductors into raceway at same time. 2. Install building wire 4 AWG and larger with pulling equipment.

E. Special Techniques - Cable: 1. Protect exposed cable from damage. 2. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. 3. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.

F. Special Techniques - Wiring Connections: 1. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. 2. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 3. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. 4. Install split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. 5. Install solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. 6. Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller.

G. Install stranded conductors for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. However, when stranded conductors are used in lieu of solid, then install crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under screws.

3.4 WIRE COLOR

A. General 1. For wire sizes 10 AWG and smaller, install wire colors in accordance with the following: a. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. b. Orange, brown, and yellow for circuits at 277/480 volts single or three phase. 2. For wire sizes 8 AWG and larger, identify wire with colored tape at terminals, splices and boxes. Colors are as follows:

B/A#09100194 16123-5 a. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. b. Orange, brown, and yellow for circuits at 277/480 volts single or three phase.

B. Neutral Conductors: White. When two or more neutrals are located in one conduit, individually identify each with proper circuit number.

C. Branch Circuit Conductors: Install three or four wire home runs with each phase uniquely color coded.

D. Feeder Circuit Conductors: Uniquely color code each phase.

E. Ground Conductors: 1. For 6 AWG and smaller: Green. 2. For 4 AWG and larger: Identify with green tape at both ends and visible points including junction boxes.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services.

B. Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16123-6

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A#09100194 16123-7

SECTION 16130 -RACEWAY AND BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and handholes.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16133 - Cable Trays. 2. Section 16141 - Floor Boxes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. 2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. 3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC).

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. 3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 4. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. 5. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 6. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. 7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system.

B. Underground More than 5 feet outside Foundation Wall: Provide plastic coated conduit, thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast metal boxes or nonmetallic handhole.

C. Underground Within 5 feet from Foundation Wall: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic boxes.

B/A#09100194 16130-1

D. In or Under Slab on Grade: Provide thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast or nonmetallic metal boxes.

E. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide rigid steel. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, pull, and junction boxes.

F. In Slab Above Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit, or thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast nonmetallic boxes.

G. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid steel or thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.

H. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing or nonmetallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.

I. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing or thickwall nonmetallic conduit. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.

J. Mechanical equipment: Provide liquid tight flexible metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing to go from the disconnect to the equipment. Limit the flexible conduit to a maximum of 6ft.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2 inch unless otherwise specified.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit for the following: 1. Raceway fittings. 2. Wireway. 3. Pull and junction boxes.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents:

B/A#09100194 16130-2

1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inch trade size. 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.

C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Coordination with project conditions.

B. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under Section 16150.

C. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.

D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.

2.2 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT

A. Product Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil thick.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit.

2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlon Electrical Products. 2. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B/A#09100194 16130-3

B. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction.

C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.

2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.

B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.

2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron, compression set screw type.

2.6 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT

A. Product Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 (interior) 80 (exterior) PVC.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.

2.7 NONMETALLIC TUBING

A. Product Description: NEMA TC 2.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.

2.8 WIREWAY

A. Product Description: General purpose type wireway.

B. Knockouts: As required on drawings, see details.

C. Size: length as indicated on Drawings.

D. Cover: Screw cover with full gaskets.

2.9 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.

B. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed cover by box manufacturer.

B/A#09100194 16130-4

D. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140.

E. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover.

2.10 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.

B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16131.

C. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Cast aluminum. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.

D. In-Ground Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, inside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Smooth cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 3. Cover Legend: "ELECTRIC".

E. Fiberglass or Concrete composite Handholes: Die-molded, glass-fiber or concrete composite hand holes: 1. As specified on drawings. 2. Cover: Glass-fiber or concrete composite, weatherproof cover with nonskid finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Coordination with project conditions.

B. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 16060.

B. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 16070.

C. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 16075.

D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.

B/A#09100194 16130-5

3.3 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY

A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system.

B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.

C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.

D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel specified in Section 16070; provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways.

E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports

F. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

G. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 16070.

H. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.

I. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.

J. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.

K. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab Above Grade: 3/4 inch. Do not cross conduits in slab.

L. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.

M. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.

N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.

O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

P. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes.

Q. Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes.

R. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Install factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.

B/A#09100194 16130-6

S. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.

T. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses seismic, control and expansion joints.

U. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.

V. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.

W. Close ends and unused openings in wireway.

3.4 INSTALLATION - BOXES

A. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on Drawings.

B. Adjust box location up to 6 feet prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose.

C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140.

D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. Unless otherwise noted.

E. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.

F. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches separation. Install with minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.

H. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.

I. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

J. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

K. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

L. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

B/A#09100194 16130-7

M. Support boxes independently of conduit.

N. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.

O. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.

3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods in accordance with Section 07270.

B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket.

C. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaries positioned as indicated on Drawings.

D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

C. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.

C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16130-8 SECTION 16131 -CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hinged cover enclosures, cabinets, terminal blocks, and accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard data for enclosures, cabinets, and terminal blocks.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish two of each key.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman. 2. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements or equal.

B. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 steel or plastic enclosure.

C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key.

D. Furnish interior metal panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish with white enamel.

E. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel gray. B/A#09100194 16131-1 2.2 CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman. 2. Substitutions: Product Requirements or equal.

B. Furnish metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner in accordance with Section 16070.

B. Install cabinet fronts plumb.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials.

B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.

C. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16131-2 SECTION 16133 -CABLE TRAYS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cable tray.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM A924/A924M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FG 1 - Nonmetallic Cable Tray Systems. 2. NEMA VE 1 - Metal Cable Tray Systems. 3. NEMA VE 2 - Metal Cable Tray Installation Guidelines.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes.

B. Product Data: Submit fittings and accessories.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of cable tray and locations of supports.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.

B/A#09100194 16133-1 B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CABLE TRAY

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bline. 2. Cablofil 3. Hubbell. 4. Mono Systems 5. Thomas & Betts (#ETU 4008 SEID). 6. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: As specified on drawings.

C. Material: High strength steel. The tray shall be zinc plated after fabrication.

D. Construction: Cable tray shall be solid bottom ladder tray type.

E. Fittings: A complement of fittings for the cable tray shall be available.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Communications wiring, fire alarm, intercom, security are to utilize the cable tray.

B. Install metal cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 2.

C. Install fiberglass cable tray in accordance with NEMA FG 1.

D. Support trays and fasten to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 16070. Install supports at each connection point, at end of each run, and at other points to maintain spacing between supports per manufacturer’s requirements.

E. Install expansion connectors where recommended by manufacturer.

F. Install firestopping in accordance with Section 16070 to sustain ratings when passing cable tray through fire-rated elements.

G. Ground and bond metal cable tray in accordance with Section 16060. 1. Provide continuity between tray components. 2. Use anti-oxidant compound to prepare aluminum contact surfaces before assembly. 3. Install 2 AWG bare copper equipment grounding conductor through entire length of tray; bond to each component.

B/A#09100194 16133-2 4. Make connections to tray using mechanical, compression or exothermic connectors.

H. Install warning signs at 50 feet centers along cable tray, located to be visible.

I. Coordinate installation with other trades (i.e. fire protection, plumbing, HVAC contractors).

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16133-3

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A#09100194 16133-4

B/A#09100194 16133-5 SECTION 16140 -WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wall switches; wall dimmers; receptacles; multioutlet assembly; and device cover plates.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16130 - Raceway and Boxes: Outlet boxes for wiring devices. 2. Section 16141 - Floor Boxes: Service fittings for receptacles installed on floor boxes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish four of each style, size, and finish wall plate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Bryant.

B. Cooper.

C. Hubbell.

D. Leviton.

B/A#09100194 16140-1 E. Pass and Seymour.

F. Wiremold

G. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.2 WALL SWITCHES

A. Description: Specification grade, quiet type.

B. Body and Handle: 1. White plastic with toggle handle.

C. Ratings: 1. Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC. 2. Current: 20 amperes.

2.3 RECEPTACLES

A. Description: 1. Specification grade, single piece brass strap.

B. Device Body: White plastic.

C. Emergency Receptacle Device Body: Orange plastic.

D. Receptacle: NEMA Type 5-20.

2.4 GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING RECEPTACLES DESCRIPTION

A. Description: Specification Grade, single piece brass strap.

B. Device Body: White plastic.

C. Receptacle: NEMA Type 5-20.

D. Features: 1. Smart lock out action. 2. Test and reset button for positive indication. 3. Indicator light.

2.5 ISOLATED GROUND RECEPTACLES

A. Description:

1. Specification grade, single piece strap, with green triangle.

B. Device Body: White plastic. B/A#09100194 16140-2

C. Receptacle: NEMA Type 5-20.

2.6 WALL DIMMERS-FLUORESCENT

A. Description: Architectural specification grade preset slide dimmer.

B. Device Body: White Plastic.

C. Dimmer shall include on/off rocker switch and illuminated slide controller.

D. Dimmer shall be compatible with dimmable ballast.

E. Ratings: 1. Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC. 2. Watts: 600, 1000, 1200, 2000 as required.

F. Leviton Renoir or equal.

2.7 MOMENTARY SWITCHES

A. Description: Industrial specification grade, single pole, double throw, center off switch.

B. Body and handle: White plastic with toggle handle.

C. Ratings:

1. Voltage: 120-277 volts, AC. 2. Current: 20 amperes.

2.8 WALL PLATES

A. Product Description: Outlet and light switch cover plates shall be stainless steel, commercial grade, type 430.

B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with gasketed in use locking device cover, NEMA 3R.

C. Provide a blank cover plate for all data/phone outlets.

2.9 PHONE ENCLOSURE

A. Product Description: 12” wide x 16” high x 8” deep, 12 gauge steel and powder coated.

B. Provide the following options: 1. Phone jack.

B/A#09100194 16140-3 2.10 TELEPHONE BELL

A. Product description: High quality, compact telephone signaling device with the following features: 1. Adjustable tone and volume. 2. Connects to a standard RJ11 phone jack. 3. 90 dBA at 1 meter.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Coordination with project conditions.

B. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.

C. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean debris from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install devices plumb and level.

B. Install switches with OFF position down.

C. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer.

D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.

E. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.

F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw terminal. Install stranded conductor for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. When stranded conductors are used in lieu of solid, use crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place bare stranded conductors directly under device screws.

H. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.

B/A#09100194 16140-4 I. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.

3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights as specified and as indicated on drawings.

B. Install wall switch 44 inches center above finished floor.

C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches center above finished floor.

D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above counter or back splash of counter.

E. Install dimmer 44 inches center above finished floor.

F. Coordinate installation of wiring devices with underfloor raceway service fittings provided under Section 16134.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services.

B. Inspect each wiring device for defects.

C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.

D. Verify each receptacle device is energized.

E. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

F. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Final cleaning.

B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.

3.8 EXTRA EQUIPMENT OR DEVICES

A. Furnish 10% of each wiring device and covers plates to be stored on site.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16140-5

B/A#09100194 16140-6 SECTION 16141 -FLOOR BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes floor boxes; floor box service fittings; and access floor boxes.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16070 - Electrical Hangers and Supports: Firestopping electrical work. 2. Section 16130 - Raceway and Boxes. 3. Section 16134 – Metal Floor Decking 4. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles for installation in floor boxes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit catalog data for floor boxes service fittings.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of each floor box and poke- through fitting.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish two protective rings.

C. Furnish two carpet or tile rings.

B/A#09100194 16141-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR BOXES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Thomas & Betts. 2. Walker/Wiremold. 3. Hubbell Wiring Solutions. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Construction: Boxes shall consist of die cast aluminum and be UL listed. Box shall be constructed to be cast in concrete.

C. Covers: Provide pre-assembled and prewired complete floor box.

D. Devices: Floor boxes shall be provided with one duplex receptacle and one communication receptacle 1. Floor boxes shall be 665SC box 665-CST-SW with 665-RP (receptacle) & 665- 6RJ (communication) with COM75 conduit connection tied into communications conduit.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Coordination and project conditions to be performed by General Contractor.

B. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets with owner before finalized.

C. Provide saw cutting of floor and patching to install the floor boxes flush with the existing floor. Provide (2) ¾” conduits from the box up to the accessible ceiling via a new wall between room 204 & 209 in Lab Technology classroom #209.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Boxes and fittings are indicated on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 2 feet to accommodate intended purpose, but verify and coordinate with General Trades.

B. Floor Box Requirements: Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations.

C. Set floor boxes level.

D. Install boxes and fittings to preserve fire resistance rating of slabs and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 16070.

E. Install protective rings on active flush cover service fittings.

F. Coordinate installation of access floor boxes with access floor system provided. B/A#09100194 16141-2 3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Final cleaning.

B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16141-3

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A#09100194 16141-4 SECTION 16150 -WIRING CONNECTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electrical connections to equipment.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16123 - Building Wire and Cable. 2. Section 16130 - Raceway and Boxes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction.

C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment connections.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Coordination with project conditions.

B. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.

C. Determine connection locations and requirements.

D. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment.

E. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment.

B/A#09100194 16150-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CORD AND PLUGS

A. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1.

B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet furnished for equipment.

C. Cord Construction: Type SO multi-conductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.

D. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Coordination and project conditions to be performed with General Contractors.

B. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, for wiring, and to be energized.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Make electrical connections.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered.

D. Install receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.

E. Install cord and cap for field-supplied attachment plug.

F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.

G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements.

H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.

I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements.

B/A#09100194 16150-2 3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Cooperate with utilization equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout and starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. Provide personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components and configurations.

3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION SCHEDULE

A. Refer to schedules on last pages.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16150-3

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A#09100194 16150-4 SECTION 16210 -ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes arrangement with Utility Company for rework of existing electric service; payment of Utility Company charges for service; service provisions; and utility metering equipment.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete pads.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Utility Company: Consumers Power Company

B. System Characteristics: 208Y/120 volts, three phase, four wire, 60 Hertz.

C. Service Entrance: Underground.

D. Underground Service Provisions: Underground service entrance to building service entrance equipment. 1. Utility Raceway Connection: At Utility Company's pad-mounted transformer. 2. Utility Service-Entrance Conductor Connection: At Utility Company's pad-mounted transformer.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Submit Utility-Company-prepared drawings.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings.

B/A#09100194 16210-1 1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with utility company, relocation of overhead or underground lines interfering with construction. Where power lines are to be relocated, bill utility costs directly to Owner.

B. Contact utility company regarding charges related to service installation. Include utility charges in this contract.

C. Utility charges for service installation will be paid by Owner and are not part of this contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TRANSFORMER

A. The current feed from the transformer needs to be relocated to the new automatic transfer switch (ATS) that will provide emergency power to the entire facility. Provide new conduits along with a junction box off the side of the existing transformer. The conduits are to be rigid conduit and route on top of the concrete over to the ATS.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify service equipment is ready to be connected and energized.

3.2 EXISTING WORK

A. Remove exposed abandoned service entrance raceway and conductors. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

B. Disconnect abandoned service equipment and remove.

C. Maintain access to existing service equipment, boxes, metering equipment, and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.

D. Extend existing service installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations.

B/A#09100194 16210-2 E. Clean and repair existing service equipment to remain or to be reinstalled.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install service entrance conduits to building service entrance equipment. Connect service lateral conductors to service entrance conductors.

B. Coordinate switch over with other trades and provide a shutdown schedule and duration to the construction manager at a minimum of 4 weeks prior to progressing with work.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16210-3

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A#09100194 16210-4 SECTION 16235 ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes engine generator set, exhaust silencer and fittings, transfer switch, fuel fittings and day tank, remote control panel, load bank, battery, and charger.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15195 - Gas Piping: Product and execution requirements for gas piping within 5 feet of building.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 2. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 3. NEMA ICS 10 - Industrial Control and Systems: AC Transfer Switch Equipment. 4. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.

B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code. 2. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. 3. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities. 4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code 5. NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. UL 2200 – The Genset shall be listed to UL 2200 or submit to an independent third party certification process to verify compliance as installed.

B. Description: Engine generator assembly and accessories to provide source of power for Level 1 and 2 applications in accordance with NFPA 110.

C. Capacity: (2) 300 kW at elevation of feet above sea level, continuous standby rating using specified engine cooling scheme.

B/A#09100194 16235-1 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Include plan and elevation views with overall and interconnection point dimensions, fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and combustion air requirements, electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection diagrams.

C. Product Data: Submit data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points, and internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, transfer switch, battery, battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators, day tank, and remote radiator.

D. Test Reports: Indicate results of performance testing.

E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate inspections, findings, and recommendations.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions and service manuals for normal operation, routine maintenance, oil sampling and analysis for engine wear, and emergency maintenance procedures. Submit electronic and a hard copy. Submittal shall include sequence of operations.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of project.

B. Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B. Furnish five year comprehensive warranty such defective parts shall be repaired or replaced at the manufacturer’s option, free of charge for travel and labor. The warranty period shall commence when the standby power system is first placed into service, or six months after shipment, whichever comes first. Multiple warranties for individual components (engine, alternator, fuel tanks automatic transfer switches, controls, etc.) will not be acceptable. Satisfactory warranty documents must be provided at the time of the claim. Also, in the judgment of the specifying authority, the manufacturer supplying the warranty for the complete

B/A#09100194 16235-2 system must have the necessary financial strength and technical expertise with all components supplied to provide adequate warranty support.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Execution Requirements: Maintenance service.

B. Furnish service and maintenance of engine generator and transfer switch for five year from Date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish service and maintenance of generator for five years from Date of Substantial Completion including a minimum of one site visit/inspection per year & added visits as required for repair and services shall be provided under an extended 5 year comprehensive warranty covering travel, mileage, parts, & labor.

B. Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of engine generator system. Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box.

C. Furnish two of each fuel, oil and air filter element.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ENGINE

A. Manufacturers: 1. Generac. 2. Onan-Cummins. 3. MTU 4. Baldor 5. Kohler. 6. Caterpillar. 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: The prime mover shall be a liquid cooled, natural gas fueled, turbo-after cooled engine of 4-cycle design.

C. The engine is to be cooled with a unit mounted radiator, fan, water pump, and closed coolant recovery system providing visual diagnostic means to determine if the system is operating with a normal engine coolant level. The radiator shall be designed for operation in 122 degrees f, 50 degrees c ambient temperature.

D. The intake air filter(s) with replaceable element must be mounted on the unit. Full pressure lubrication shall be supplied by a positive displacement lube oil pump. The engine shall have a replaceable oil filter(s) with internal bypass and replaceable element(s). Engine coolant and oil drain extensions, equipped with

B/A#09100194 16235-3 pipe plugs, and must be provided to outside of the mounting base for cleaner and more convenient engine servicing. A fan guard must be installed for personnel safety.

E. The engine shall have a battery charging DC alternator with a transistorized voltage regulator. Remote 2-wire starting shall be by a solenoid shift, electric starter.

F. The engine fuel system shall be designed for primary operation on natural gas having a BTU content of 1000 BTU per cubic foot delivered to the unit in a vapor state. A carburetor, secondary regulator, fuel lock-off solenoid and all piping must be installed at the point of manufacturing, terminating at a single pipe opening external to the mounting base.

G. The engine shall have (a) unit mounted, thermostatically controlled water jacket heater(s) to aid in quick starting. The wattage shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. The contractor shall provide proper branch circuit from normal utility power source.

H. Sensing elements to be located on the engine for low oil pressure shutdown, high coolant temperature shutdown, low coolant level shutdown, over speed shutdown and over crank shutdown. These sensors are to be connected to the control panel using a wiring harness with the following features: wire number labeling on each end of the wire run for easy identification, each sensor connection shall be sealed to prevent corrosion and all wiring to be run in flexible conduit for protection from the environment and any moving objects.

I. Provide the following items installed at the factory:

J. The manufacturer shall supply a catalytic muffler and air/fuel ratio controller. The catalytic muffler must be part of the engine exhaust system and completely installed and tested at the factory.

K. The manufacturer shall supply its recommended stainless steel, flexible connector to couple the engine exhaust manifold to the exhaust system.

L. The engine oil pan will contain a 120vac, 150 watt, thermostatically controlled crankcase oil heater. The operating temperature to be set at 80 deg. on and 100 deg. off.

M. Engine speed shall be controlled by isochronous governor with no change in alternator frequency from no load to full load. Steady state regulation is to be 0.25%.

N. One step load acceptance shall be 100% of engine-generator set nameplate rating and meet the requirements of NFPA 110 paragraph 7.13.7

B/A#09100194 16235-4 O. The generator system shall support generator start-up and load transfer within 10 seconds.

P. Mounting: Furnish unit with suitable spring-type vibration isolators with rubber boots suitable to be mounted on building structural steel base. These unites are to be mounted on roof so manufacturer shall provide solution for vibration isolation between unit and building.

2.2 ALTERNATOR

A. The alternator shall be a 4 pole revolving field type, 12 lead, wired for 120/208 vac 3 phase, 60 hz, permanent magnet driven exciter. Photosensitive components will not be permitted in the rotating exciter. The stator shall be gear drive connected to the engine to ensure permanent alignment. The generator shall meet temperature rise standards for Class "H" insulation; operate within Class "F" standards for extended life. All leads must be extended into an AC connection panel. The alternator shall be protected by internal thermal overload protection and an automatic reset field circuit breaker.

B. One step load acceptance shall be 100% of engine-generator set nameplate rating and meet the requirements of NFPA 110 paragraph 5-13.2.6. The generator set and regulator must sustain at least 300% short circuit current for 10 seconds during 3 phase fault.

C. A NEMA 1 panel that is an integral part of the generator set must be provided to allow the installer a convenient location in which to make electrical output connections. A fully rated, isolated neutral must be included by the generator set manufacturer to insure proper sizing.

D. The electric plant (engine and alternator) shall be mounted with internal vibration isolation onto a welded steel base.

E. Two (2) mainline circuit breakers carrying the UL mark shall be factory installed. The breaker shall be mounted in the genset connection box. The line side connections are to be made at the factory. Output lugs shall be provided for load side connections. A system utilizing manual reset field circuit breakers and current transformers is unacceptable. The second breaker will be used for load bank testing.

F. An alternator strip heater shall be installed to prevent moisture condensation from forming on the alternator windings.

2.3 CONTROLS

A. The generator control system shall be a fully integrated microprocessor based control system for standby emergency engine generators meeting all requirements of NFPA 110 level 1.

B/A#09100194 16235-5 B. The generator control system shall be a fully integrated control system enabling remote diagnostics and easy building management integration of all generator functions. The generator controller shall provide integrated and digital control over all generator functions including: engine protection, alternator protection, speed governing, voltage regulation and all related generator operations. The generator controller must also provide seamless digital integration with the engine’s electronic management system if so equipped. Generator controller’s that utilize separate voltage regulators and speed governors or do not provide seamless integration with the engine management system are considered less desirable.

C. Communications shall be supported with building automation via the Modbus, Lon or backnet protocol without network cards or protocol exchangers. Optional internet and intranet connectivity shall be available.

D. The control system shall provide an environmentally sealed design including encapsulated circuit boards and sealed automotive style plugs for all sensors and circuit board connections. The use of non-encapsulated boards, edge cards, and pc ribbon cable connections are considered unacceptable.

E. Circuit boards shall utilize surface mount technology to provide vibration durability. Circuit boards that utilize large capacitors or heat sinks must utilize encapsulation methods to securely support these components.

F. A predictive maintenance algorithm that alarms when maintenance is required. The controller shall have the capability to call out to the local servicing dealer when maintenance is required.

G. Diagnostic capabilities should include time-stamped event and alarm logs, ability to capture operational parameters during events, simultaneous monitoring of all input or output parameters, callout capabilities, support for multi-channel digital strip chart functionality and 0.1msec data logging capabilities.

H. The control system shall provide pre-wired customer use I/O: 4 contact inputs, 2 analog inputs, 4 relay outputs, and communications support via RS232, RS485, and an optional modem. Customer I/O shall be software configurable providing full access to all alarm, event, data logging, and shutdown functionality. In addition, custom ladder logic functionality shall be supported to provide application support flexibility. The ladder logic function shall have access to all the controller inputs and customer assignable outputs.

I. The control panel will display all user pertinent unit parameters including: 1. Engine and alternator operating conditions 2. Oil pressure and optional oil temperature 3. Coolant temperature and level alarm 4. Fuel level (where applicable) 5. Engine speed

B/A#09100194 16235-6 6. DC battery voltage 7. Run time hours 8. Generator voltages, amps, frequency, kilowatts, and power factor 9. Alarm Status 10. Current alarm(s) condition per NFPA 110 level 1 11. Alarm Log of last twenty alarm events (date and time stamped)

J. For system reliability and security concerns, access to and manipulation of the internal operating parameters and alarm limits shall be conducted via password protected PC based software by trained personnel System configuration support shall be provided locally or remotely by the manufacturers servicing representatives.

K. The following equipment is to be provided by the engine-generator set manufacturer and shipped loose with the unit: 1. Provide NFPA 110 level 1 compliant alarm annunciator panels for remote indication per local and national code requirements. The annunciator shall be controlled using communications from the generator controller. The panel shall have an ALARM switch that when moved to the OFF position silences the audible alarm. A TEST/RESET switch must be included to verify the lights are functional and reset any condition after if has cleared. The remote annunciator shall have provision for installing a switch with the capability of starting, and stopping the standby generator set from the annunciator panel.

2.4 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Asco. 2. Generac. 3. Onan-Cummins. 4. MTU 5. Baldor 6. Kohler. 7. Caterpillar. 8. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements

B. General 1. It shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratory, Standard 1008 with fuse or circuit breaker protection. Representative production samples of the transfer switch supplied shall have demonstrated through tests the ability to withstand at least 10,000 mechanical operation cycles. One operation cycle is the electrically operated transfer from normal to emergency and back to normal. Wiring must comply with NEC table 312.6. The manufacturer shall furnish schematic and wiring diagrams for the particular automatic transfer switch and a typical wiring diagram for the entire system.

B/A#09100194 16235-7 C. Ratings and Performance 1. The automatic transfer switch shall be a 3 pole design rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of -20 degrees Fahrenheit (-30 degrees Celsius) to +140 degrees Fahrenheit (+60 degrees Celsius). Main power switch contacts shall be rated for 600 V AC minimum. The transfer switch supplied shall have a minimum withstand and closing rating when fuse protected of 200,000 amperes. Where the line side overcurrent protection is provided by circuit breakers, the short circuit withstand and closing ratings shall be 65,000 amperes RMS. These RMS symmetrical fault current ratings shall be the rating listed in the UL listing or component recognition procedures for the transfer switch. All withstand tests shall be performed with the overcurrent protective devices located external to the transfer switch.

D. Construction 1. The transfer switch shall be double throw construction, electrically and mechanically interlocked and mechanically held in both normal and emergency positions. The contactor shall allow simultaneous closure of both the normal and emergency contacts, allowing the closed transition mode of operation between two live electrical sources. The transfer switch shall be approved for manual operation. The electrical operating means shall be by electric solenoid. Every portion of the contactor is to be positively mechanically connected. No clutch or friction drive mechanism is allowed, and parts are to be kept to a minimum. This transfer switch shall not contain integral overcurrent devices in the main power circuit, including molded case circuit breakers or fuses. 2. The transfer switch electrical actuator shall have an independent disconnect means to disable the electrical operation during manual switching. Maximum electrical transfer time in either direction shall be 160 milliseconds, exclusive of time delays. Main switch contacts shall be high pressure silver alloy with arc chutes and separate arcing contacts to resist burning and pitting for long life operation.

E. Control Features and Functions: 1. Indicating Lights: Mount in cover of enclosure to indicate NORMAL SOURCE AVAILABLE, ALTERNATE SOURCE AVAILABLE, switch position. 2. Test Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to simulate failure of normal source. 3. Return to Normal Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to initiate manual transfer from alternate source to normal source. 4. Transfer Switch Auxiliary Contacts: 1 normally open; and 1 normally closed. 5. Normal Source Monitor: Monitor each line of normal source voltage and frequency; initiate transfer when voltage drops below 85 percent or frequency varies more than 3 percent from rated nominal value.

B/A#09100194 16235-8 6. Alternate Source Monitor: Monitor alternate source voltage and frequency; inhibit transfer when voltage is below 85 percent or frequency varies more than 3 percent from rated nominal value. 7. In-Phase Monitor: Inhibit transfer until source and load are within electrical degrees. 8. Switched Neutral: Non-Overlapping contacts. 9. Load shedding: Capable of load shedding.

F. Automatic Sequence of Operation: 1. Initiate Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: Upon initiation by normal source monitor. 2. Time Delay To Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: 0 to 10 seconds, adjustable. 3. Initiate Transfer Load to Alternate Source: Upon initiation by normal source monitor and permission by alternate source monitor. 4. Time Delay Before Transfer to Alternate Power Source: 0 to 10 seconds, adjustable. 5. Initiate Retransfer Load to Normal Source: Upon permission by normal source monitor. 6. Time Delay Before Transfer to Normal Power: 0 to 10 seconds, adjustable; bypass time delay in event of alternate source failure.

G. Time Delay Before Engine Shut Down: 0 to 10 minutes, adjustable, of unloaded operation.

H. Engine Exerciser: Start engine every 30 days; run for 30 minutes before shutting down. Bypass exerciser control when normal source fails during exercising period.

I. Alternate System Exerciser: Transfer load to alternate source during engine exercising period.

J. Enclosure: 1. Enclosure: ICS 10, Type 12. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Engine-Generator Control Panel: NEMA 250, Type 1 generator-mounted freestanding wall-mounted control panel enclosure with engine and generator controls and indicators. Furnish provision for padlock and the following equipment and features: 1. Frequency Meter: 45-65 Hz. range, 3.5 inch dial. 2. AC Output Voltmeter: 3.5 inch dial, 2 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch. 3. AC Output Ammeter: 3.5 inch dial, 2 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch.

B/A#09100194 16235-9 4. Output voltage adjustment. 5. Push-to-test indicator lamps, one each for low oil pressure, high water temperature, overspeed, and overcrank. 6. Engine start/stop selector switch. 7. Engine running time meter. 8. Oil pressure gage. 9. Water temperature gage. 10. Auxiliary Relay: 3PDT, operates when engine runs, with contact terminals prewired to terminal strip. 11. Additional visual indicators and alarms in accordance with by NFPA 110. 12. Remote Alarm Contacts: Factory wire SPDT contacts to terminal strip for remote alarm functions in accordance with NFPA 110.

B. (2) Remote Annunciator Panels: Locate one panel in lower level of the building in the maintenance office and the second one is to be located in the front lobby space adjacent to the receptionist in main entrance to the building. Surface mounted panel with painted finish. Furnish alarm horn, and indicators and alarms as follows: 1. High battery voltage (alarm). 2. Low battery voltage (alarm). 3. Low fuel (alarm). 4. System ready. 5. Anticipatory-high water temperature. 6. Anticipatory-low oil pressure. 7. Low coolant temperature. 8. Switch in off position (alarm). 9. Overcrank (alarm). 10. Emergency stop (alarm). 11. High water temperature (alarm). 12. Overspeed (alarm). 13. Low oil pressure (alarm). 14. Line power available. 15. Generator power available. 16. Lamp test and horn silence switch.

C. Exhaust Silencer: Critical type silencer, with muffler companion flanges and flexible stainless steel exhaust fitting, the exhaust silencer(s) shall be provided of the size as recommended by the manufacturer. The silencer(s) shall be mounted within the weather protective enclosure for reduced exhaust noise and provide a clean, smooth exterior design. It shall be connected to the engine with a flexible, seamless, stainless steel exhaust connection. A rain cap will terminate the exhaust pipe. All components must be properly sized to assure operation without excessive back pressure when installed.

D. Batteries: Heavy duty, lead-acid storage batteries, 170 ampere-hours minimum capacity. Match battery voltage to starting system. Furnish cables and clamps.

B/A#09100194 16235-10 E. Battery Tray: Treated for electrolyte resistance, constructed to contain spillage.

F. Battery Charger: Provide an automatic dual rate battery charger. The automatic equalizer system shall monitor and limit the charge current to 10 amps. The output voltage is to be determined by the charge current rate. The charger must be protected against a reverse polarity connection. The battery charger is to be factory installed on the generator set. Due to line voltage drop concerns, a battery charger mounted in the transfer switch will be unacceptable.

G. Emergency Stop Switch. Switch shall be red “mushroom-head” push button, keyed to reset. Depressing the emergency stop switch shall cause the generator set to immediately shut down and be locked out from automatic starting. Provide a Lexan cover over pushbutton to provide added accidental activation. Verify location on drawings.

H. Sound attenuated weather protective enclosure. The engine-generator set shall be factory enclosed in a heavy gauge steel enclosure constructed with 14 gauge corner posts, uprights and headers. The roof shall be made of aluminum, aid in the runoff of water and include a drip edge. The enclosure shall be coated with electrostatically applied powder paint, baked and finished to manufacturer’s specifications. The enclosure is to have large, hinged doors to allow access to the engine, alternator and control panel. The doors must lift off without the use of tools. Each door will have lockable hardware with identical keys. Padlocks do not meet this specification.

I. Software: Provide owner with a CD version of software.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide shop inspection and testing of completed assembly.

B. Make completed engine-generator assembly available for inspection at manufacturer’s factory prior to packaging for shipment. Notify Owner and Architect/Engineer at least seven days before inspection is allowed.

C. Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer’s test facility. Notify Owner at least seven days before inspections and tests are scheduled.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 16075.

B. Ground and bond generator and other electrical system components in accordance with Section 16060.

B/A#09100194 16235-11 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturer’s field services.

B. Prepare and start up engine-generator assembly.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed to meet specified ratings.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Clean engine and generator surfaces. Replace oil and fuel filters with new.

3.5 START UP

A. The supplier of the generator and associated items covered herein shall provide factory trained technicians to start and verify the completed installation and to perform an initial startup inspection to include: 1. Ensuring the engine starts (both hot and cold) within the specified time. 2. Verification of engine parameters within specification. 3. Verify no load frequency and voltage, adjusting if required. 4. Test all automatic shutdowns of the engine-generator. 5. Test operation of smoke purge system with generator running. 6. Perform a load test of the generator; ensuring full load frequency and voltage are within specification by using building load.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Furnish 8 hours of instruction for four persons, to be conducted at project site with manufacturer's representative. The engineer shall be notified in advance and shall have the option to witness the training.

B. The complete installation shall be tested for compliance with the specification following completion of all site work and start up. Testing shall be conducted by representatives of the manufacturer. The engineer shall be notified in advance and shall have the option to witness the tests.

C. Installation acceptance tests to be conducted on-site shall include a “cold start” test, a two hour full load test, and a one step rated load pickup test in accordance with NFPA 110. Provide a resistive load bank and make temporary connection for a full load test. Provide written results to owner and engineer.

B/A#09100194 16235-12 D. Perform a power failure test on the entire installed system. This test shall be conducted by opening the power supply from the utility service; and observing proper operation of the system for at least 2 hours. Coordinate timing and obtain approval for start of test with site personnel. Power failure test shall include the operation of the smoke purge system.

E. Perform a power failure test for state fire marshals office to witness; test shall also include the operation of smoke purge system.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16235-13 SECTION 16236 DIGITAL GENERATOR PARALLELING CONTROL SWITCHGEAR

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes :A complete digital power control and distribution system to automatically start and parallel two (2) engine generator sets

B. The switchgear lineup shall be free-standing and shall be based on a modular design principle. The lineup shall contain the necessary number of standard control modules and standard distribution modules (sections), including optional accessories. All modules and optional accessories shall be selectable through a catalog ordering matrix which will allow for integrated selection of items into a complete paralleling switchgear lineup.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The Engine-Generator Control Switchgear and all related components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest edition of the following applicable standards: 1. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) a. C37.20.1 - Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear b. C37.51 - Testing of Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear Assemblies 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. NFPA – 70 - National Electrical Code b. NFPA – 99 - Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities c. NFPA – 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) a. UL 1558 - Switchgear Assemblies 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a. NEMA SG-5 - Power Switchgear Assemblies 5. International Standards Organization (ISO) a. ISO 9001:2000

1.3 QUALIFIACTIONS

A. Equipment manufacturer who has produced this type of equipment for a period of at least five (5) years and is certified under ISO 9001:2000.

B/A#09100194 16236-1 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit capacity, dimensions, weights, details, and wiring configuration Sequence of Operation

C. Bill of Material

D. Mechanical Drawings: 1. Dimensional plans and elevations, with front view, side views and other pertinent elevation views. 2. Conduit entrance locations and dimensions within all assemblies for both bottom and top entrance. 3. Door details. 4. Circuit breaker ratings. 5. Weight of equipment. 6. Assembly ratings including: a. Short circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 7. Cable terminal sizes. 8. Base plan showing dimensions of base with anchoring provisions.

E. Electrical Drawings: 1. Typical AC Three-Line Schematic diagrams with all components cross referenced. 2. Typical DC Schematic diagrams with all components cross referenced. 3. Typical equipment interconnect drawings showing terminal points and external device function.

F. Major component product data sheets.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. ASCO 346. 2. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. The enclosures shall be, freestanding, floor supported, with front and rear access. Removable lifting eyes shall be supplied for lifting purposes. Adequate number of anchor bolt-holes spaced to place the base in direct contact with the concrete pad when bolted. All doors shall be pan type and be provided with sufficient hinges

B/A#09100194 16236-2 to support the door and components for minimum deflection and wobbling when opening or closing. Front doors shall be supplied with a lockable handle. All door locks shall be keyed alike to operate from a single key, with one key supplied for each lock. All panel covers are secured with captive screws as necessary.

B. The complete assembly shall be degreased, and thoroughly cleaned through a three stage aqueous process. The finish shall be ANSI-61, light gray, electrostatically charged polyester powder paint process, minimum 1.5 mils in density. Finish shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor environments

2.3 BUS

A. Shall be silver plated copper and shall have a maximum current density of 1000 amperes per square inch.

B. Bus shall have a minimum bracing level not less than 100,000 amperes.

C. A full capacity neutral bus shall be provided when it is indicated on the drawings (3 Phase, 4 Wire Systems).

D. A copper ground bus shall be provided.

2.4 WIRING/TERMINATIONS

A. Control wiring 600 volt, UL 1015 or SIS. Use solder less compression screw type connectors for terminating all wires. Current transformer circuit terminations shall be ring tongue compression type. Other circuits shall be ring tongue compression type where feasible, otherwise they shall be spade type applied with the proper tooling.

B. Control wires shall be numbered every six (6) inches and visible next to the terminals. Low level signal circuits shall be provided with shielded wire to minimize electromagnetic interference. Shielded wire grounded at one point.

C. Current transformer circuits are connected through shorting terminal blocks.

2.5 POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. The generator and distribution circuit breakers shall be draw-out low voltage power circuit breakers with interrupting current ratings no less than 100KAIC and will be UL 1066 rated. The draw-out feature shall provide for connected, test and disconnected positions. In the connected position the main line and load terminals and all auxiliary control contacts and circuitry shall be connected and the breaker shall be fully operable. In the test position, the breaker auxiliary control contacts and circuitry only shall be connected to permit automatic operation of the complete control system without actually connecting the generator to the main bus. In the disconnect position, main and auxiliary control contacts and circuitry shall be completely disconnected. The breaker draw-out

B/A#09100194 16236-3 mechanism shall be mechanically interlocked with the breaker to permit draw-out operation only when the breaker main contacts are open.

B. The generator circuit breakers shall be furnished with electronic trip units, with Adjustable Long Delay, Short Delay and Instantaneous over current trips and Ground Fault Alarm.

C. The distribution circuit breakers shall be furnished with electronic trip units and rated as described on the drawings.

2.6 DIGITAL PARALLELING CONTROL SYSTEM (DPCS)

A. Engine Generator Control– The controls are the ASCO 346 Series Digital Paralleling Controls and will be equipped with the following functions: Each engine generator control shall have its own dedicated processor and controls performing functions such as start/stop, synchronizing, load sharing, VAR/PF sharing, without depending upon master controller, or any other generator controllers.

B. Generator processor redundancy will be standard. In the event of a processor ever going down, a backup processor shall immediately take over and control the operation of the engine generator controller I/O.

C. Door Mounted Control station with the following controls for each Engine Generator: 1. Five Position Engine Control Selector Switch a. Lockout/Reset - In this position, the engine shall not be capable of starting and/or running. If the engine was shutdown due to the operation of a protective device, the shutdown malfunction shall be reset when the switch is moved to this position. If the engine is running when the switch is moved to this position, it shall immediately shutdown. b. Off/Cool-down - In this position, the engine shall shutdown after a cool-down period. c. Automatic - In this position, the engine control shall be in readiness for fully automatic operation upon receipt of a start signal. d. Test Off-Line - When placed in this position, the engine shall start and run as if a start signal were received except it shall not be connected to the bus unless a start signal is received. When returned to the Automatic position, the engine shall shutdown. e. Test On-Line - When placed in this position, the engine shall start, run and connect to the bus as if a start signal were received. When returned to the Automatic position the circuit breaker shall open and the engine shall run for its cool-down period before shutting down.

B/A#09100194 16236-4 2. Generator Running Green Lamp (On for Running, Flashing for Cool- down). 3. Controls Not In Auto Red Lamp (Flashing).

D. Master Control- shall have a color touch screen operator interface which allows the operator to view status and to allow the operator to adjust system variables. The Master Control and Monitoring Panel shall be an integrated controller and shall combine the touch screen interface, networking and I/O into a single compact unit utilizing single programming software for graphics and logic. 1. The Master Control and Monitoring Panel shall provide the following features and characteristics: a. The color touch screen display shall have at a minimum a resolution of 800 x 600, TFT, supporting 32768 different colors. System shall be a true controller with its own operating system, and the reliability of an industrial Programmable Logic Controller. Windows PC based systems are Not Acceptable. The Control logic shall be ladder. The faceplate shall be made of Lexan® and shall be resistant to most corrosive substances found in industrial environments. b. The Master Control and Monitoring Panel shall have Portable memory in the form of a Compact FLASH slot to accommodate flash memory which is readily available in most electronic stores. The Master Control and Monitoring Panel shall have the capability of reading, and updating the program from the Compact Flash Card. The Master Control and Monitoring Panel shall have the capability of storing and capturing any of the displayed screens onto Compact Flash, in the form of .jpg or .bmp files. The Master Control and Monitoring Panel shall also have the capability of reading any of these screen captures directly from the compact flash card. c. The Master Control and Monitoring Panel shall be powered with a 24 Vdc control voltage using engine batteries. Necessary equipment shall be installed to prevent “brownout” situations during the engine crank cycle. Operating temperatures shall range from 32 to 122 degree F, with humidity 5 to 95% Non-condensing. The Unit shall be UL labeled and CE approved, including any ancillary AC power monitoring devices. 2. The Master Control and Monitoring Panel shall have the following screens: a. Main Menu: Screen to provide system status and access to One- Line, Manual Paralleling, ATS Status, Individual Generator Set and Individual Generator & Bus Metering, Alarm Status, Event Log data, System Control and Certified Service Tech Screens. b. One-Line Diagram Screen: Displays system paralleling configuration. Depicts system configuration in a single line format and system status.

B/A#09100194 16236-5 1) Breaker Position of generator sets, Open/Closed. 2) Real time power values of generator set(s) Amps, kW, PF, kVars, Voltage, and Frequency. 3. Manual Paralleling Control Screen- Provides manual paralleling control capability over individual generator sets. a. Synchroscope Graphical (real time 360-degree analog movement) with digital display. b. Manual Raise / Lower voltage and frequency. c. Automatic voltage and frequency set points of generator. d. Real time power values of generator / generator bus. e. Generator Breaker Position. f. Ability to select generator set to be paralleled. g. Manual closing of generator breaker. 4. Dual Three Phase Metering Screen: Graphical analog (270 electrical degree) metering representation with digital display. Ability to display metering for two generators at the same time or one generator and the bus at the same time. Screen will display a graphical Synchroscope when one generator and the bus are selected. Displays the following minimum metering data for selected generator set and generator main bus totals. a. True RMS three phase voltage, amps, kilowatts, kilovolt-amperes, kilovars, power factor, and frequency parameters. b. Engine battery voltage display. c. Running Time Meter. 5. Single Three Phase Metering Screen: Large graphical analog (270 electrical degree) metering representation with digital display. Displays the following minimum metering data for selected generator set or selected main bus. a. True RMS three phase voltage, amps, kilowatts, kilovolt-amperes, kilovars, power factor, and frequency parameters. b. Engine battery voltage display. 6. ATS Status Screen: Displays status and provides control of each ATS connected to system. ATS must be equipped with proper features and accessories. a. ATS Connected to Normal b. ATS Connected to Emergency c. Engine Start Indication d. Load Shed Indication e. ATS Load Priority. Ability to change ATS priorities (password protected). 7. System Setup Control Screen: Displays system status, with System control. a. Engine priority, with Load Demand time delays (password protected). a. Load Demand pick-up and drop-out kW levels (password protected).

B/A#09100194 16236-6 b. Load Bus Optimization derate %, with Load Bus Optimization time delays (password protected). c. Scrolling system status: Emergency mode, Normal available, Gen(s) on-line, Gen(s) failure, Gen _ available, Gen _ synchronizer active, Gen _ Var Sharing active, Gen _ Load Sharing active. d. Engine Generator Alarms and Shutdowns: Displays generator(s) alarms and shutdowns. e. Not in Auto (Red) f. Emergency Mode Amber) g. Generator Circuit Breaker Ground Fault Alarm (Amber) h. *Pre-High Coolant Temperature (Amber) i. *Pre-low Oil Pressure (Amber) j. *Low Coolant Temperature (Amber) k. Low Battery Voltage (Amber) l. *Low Fuel Level Alarm (Amber) m. *Battery Charger Malfunction (Amber) n. *Engine Overcrank (Red) o. *Engine Overspeed (Red) p. *Engine Low Oil Shutdown (Red) q. *Engine High Coolant Temp Shutdown (Red) r. *Engine Low Coolant Level Shutdown (Red) s. Generator Circuit Breaker Tripped (Red) t. Generator Reverse Power (Red) u. Generator Undervoltage (Red) v. Generator Overvoltage (Red) w. Generator Under Frequency (Red) x. Generator Over Frequency (Red) y. Generator Loss of Excitation (Red) z. Generator Phase Reversal (Red) aa. Alarm reset button bb. Emergency Stop Button * contact, sensor signal or serial communication must be supplied by the engine supplier.

8. Engine Generator Protection and Setup Screen: a. Current and potential transformer ratio. b. Device 40Q Settings with enable feature. c. Device 81 O/U Settings with enable feature. d. Device 27/59 three phase with enable feature. e. Device 47 with enable feature. f. Device 15/25V Auto and manual synchronizing with voltage matching settings for both g. Device 32 reverse power. 9. Bus Protection and Setup Screen: a. Current and potential transformer ratio.

B/A#09100194 16236-7 b. Device 81 O/U Settings with enable feature. c. Device 27/59 three phase with enable feature. d. Device 47 with enable feature. 10. Engine Generator Control and Setup Screen: Provides generator control setup and control. a. Engine cool down timer setting. b. Cycle Crank attempts. c. Cranking time delay. d. Crank reset timer setting. e. Failure to synch timer setting. f. Number of actual crank attempts. g. Actual cool down timer left. h. Synch Mode Switch OFF, Auto, Check, Permissive i. Cycle Crank logic enabled / disabled. 11. kW Trending Screen: kW trending of generator sets and main bus. The kW trend screen shall have the capability to enable or disable auto store. Auto store feature when enabled will automatically store the trend screen onto compact flash card every five minutes. a. Generator ‘X’ Trending b. Generator Bus Total Trending 12. Multiple Parameter Service Trending Screen: Be able to trend up to 16 different parameters on one screen, comparing all generators/utilities, kW, kVars, voltage, current and frequency. Trend screen shall have the capability to enable or disable auto store. Auto store feature when enabled will automatically store the trend screen onto compact flash every five minutes. The operator shall also have the ability to manual store any screen captures onto the compact flash card. 13. Event data Log Screen: Provides viewing of events logged with time and date. Operator can acknowledge and clear alarms, up to 2049 different events. a. Alarm History Log of the last 64 events. b. Alarm Summary (Active Alarms and Unacknowledged) c. Active Alarm Indicator 14. Full Range of Service Screens: Without the aid of a Laptop computer, a certified service technician shall have the capability of setting up all the paralleling parameters including proportional gains, ranges, and sensitivities of all parallel functions. The operator shall be able to view all controlling outputs to the voltage regulator and speed controller, including all power parameters of all engines on one screen.

E. Special Features 1. Monitoring shall be true three phase monitoring, phase to neutral on all generators. Averaging or calculating a potential phase from the other two phases is not acceptable. 2. Shall have Soft-load transition during Load Demand Mode when load sharing between engine generators, on all diesel and natural gas generator

B/A#09100194 16236-8 sets. When a unit is in the Load Demand Mode and is being added, it will soft-load on to the bus. If a unit is taken off-line normally under load demand operation, the units should gradually unload before the generator breaker is signaled to open. 3. Shall have Load Bus Optimization as detailed in section 3.8 Sequence of Operation under E, page 11.

F. Communications Requirements 1. The DPCS shall be interconnected to allow the control or monitoring of any unit by a single connection to a Local Area Network via Ethernet. All information including transfer switches, engine points and parameters, and other third party devices can be communicated with effectively. 2. The DPCS shall have the capability of communicating directly with different engine generator set manufacturers. The DPCS shall support the following engine protocols: Serial based J1508 and CAN-Based J1939. 3. Serial RTU/Modbus® master/slave RS232/485. 4. DeviceNet master/slave. 5. CAN Network peer-to-peer protocol. 6. Ethernet 100-base-T supporting, EGD, SRTP, Modbus/TCP slave. 7. Interface with modules using ASCII (Caterpillar Engine Generator Sets).

G. Security 1. Security Code Required For Access - The DPCS has built-in security to protect against configuration changes and alarm purges by unauthorized personnel. There are two levels of access to the configuration menus. They are listed below. Each successive level has access to all of the levels above. A four-digit security code is required for access to the configuration menus. 2. Levels Of Access: a. Monitor with limited control (no security code) - Access to all Status Screens, view Alarm / Event Log Display, and ability to commit (clear) an Audible Alarm, provide some limited control. b. Operator /Administrator (Level one) - Access to system set-points. c. Technician (Level two) - Allows access to all set points including Engine generating paralleling digital calibration

H. Optional Control Features 1. The DPCS platform shall be fully flexible, in adding additional equipment such as future engine generators, external third party communication devices, AND additional I/O, with all this information easily sent to a Building Management System or owner host computer through one connection over Ethernet. 2. The DPCS shall have two remote diagnostic capabilities, one using industrial grade analog modem; the other using Ethernet IP connection. Both remote methods shall have full control capability, with one way backing up the other. Authorized certified technicians shall be able to

B/A#09100194 16236-9 connect to all DPCS(s) remotely and be able to perform diagnostics, modify screens, change logic if necessary and down load using one piece of software. 3. The DPCS shall have the option to add a color-touch screen operator interface to each generator control section. 4. The DPCS shall be supplied standard with controls for 32 ATSs. a. Available options include controls for 64 ATSs. 5. The DPCS shall have the option to add Master Controller Redundancy. 6. The DPCS shall have the option to add a Master Operator Interface Touch Screen with monitoring only function.

I. Miscellaneous Components 1. Control Fuses - Control fuses shall be mounted in locations where they are readily accessible. Pullout type fuses shall be provided for all primary circuits and shall be of the current limiting type. 2. Electromagnetic Control Relays - All electromagnetic control relays shall be suitable and adequately rated for their intended service in the control system. Relays used in low-voltage low-current DC control circuits shall have gold flashed contacts to insure positive contact make. Relays used for other than logic and dry contact switching shall have contact ratings suitable for make and carry of their duty current at the voltage of operation. All relays for control circuit duty shall be plug-in type with retaining clips and transparent plastic covers. 3. Current Transformers - Current transformers are furnished with VA burden ratings suitable to supply the metering, protective devices and electronic governor without affecting their accuracy. 4. Potential Transformers (if required) - Potential transformers are provided in turns ratio and VA burden rating to be compatible with the controls, metering and the electronic governor. Transformers shall have integrally mounted primary and secondary fuses. 5. Door Mounted Control station with the following system controls: a. Audible Alarm Horn. Located in Master. b. Horn Silence Push-button. Located in Master. 6. DC Control Power Selector -- Best Battery System a. Control power for the system logic shall be derived from the engine starting batteries. The control logic shall be powered through a suitable means which shall permit continuity of power until the last battery is no longer available. The controls shall be powered from any battery or combination of batteries and prevent feedback to a failing battery. The transition of control logic power from any battery combination to any other battery combination shall be accomplished without disruption in the power flow.

J. Sequence of Operation

B/A#09100194 16236-10 1. The Digital Paralleling Control System is designed to start and parallel all engine generator sets, upon receipt of a signal from an automatic transfer switch (es) that emergency power is required. 2. Normal Mode a. Whenever the individual engine generator control switches are placed in their automatic position, the engine generator system is on standby in readiness for automatic starting and synchronization in the event of a power failure signal. 3. Emergency Mode a. In the event of a power failure, all generator(s) automatically start and come up to speed. The first generator set to achieve 90% of nominal voltage and frequency shall be connected to the bus. Interlocks permit the connection of only one engine generator to the dead generator bus in the event of simultaneous generator relay operation. Upon sensing the availability of emergency power, the priority-1 load block will be allowed to transfer their loads to the emergency bus, either through direct control or through a “permissive signal” to the automatic transfer switches (if equipped). Each synchronizer will automatically adjust the frequency of the on-coming generator(s) to synchronize with the bus. When synchronism is achieved, the on-coming generator is paralleled to the bus. When the second generator’s circuit breaker is closed the priority-2 load block will be allowed to transfer their loads to the emergency bus. As each generator parallels to the bus, another block of load is allowed to be added, until all generators and all loads are online. b. Upon sensing that normal utility power has been restored to acceptable limits, a sequence shall begin to transfer the load back to the utility source. The re-transfer shall be initiated after the retransfer to utility time delay has expired (adjustable at each ATS from 0 minute to 30 minutes) allowing an open transition transfer return to utility. After all the transfer switches have re-transferred their loads to the normal source, the generator circuit breakers are simultaneously opened and the engine generators run for an adjustable no-load cool-down period of zero to thirty minutes; factory set at 5-minutes. The controls are released and the generators are placed in readiness for the next power failure. c. If a generator fails while operating in the automatic mode, it is disconnected from the bus and shutdown. Audible and visual alarms will be activated to indicate the condition. If “Load Bus Optimization” is not activated, the lowest priority feeder loads (as programmed by the operator via the Touch Screen) are signaled to shed so as to leave one block of load online per generator. d. A push-button permits override of the load-shed circuits for supervised operation (one for each priority except priority 1). Loads that have been block shed can be manually re-added using

B/A#09100194 16236-11 the priority-# Load Shed Bypass/Reset push-button located on the Master control section Touch Screen. By pressing the Load Shed Bypass/Reset push-button, the system will transfer the priority-# load block to the emergency bus. By pressing the Load Shed Bypass/Reset push-button a second time, the ENTIRE priority-# load block will shed. Indication from the Touch Screen will annunciate the status of each Priority load block, indicating if it is shed or manually bypassed. If the operator inadvertently bypasses the load shed and overloads the Generator(s) resulting in a bus under-frequency, all manually bypassed loads will be automatically shed along with blocks of load such that the remaining load blocks shall be one less than the number of generators remaining on the bus. The “Bus Under frequency” condition will be indicated. e. If the online load exceeds 100% of rated generator capacity, loads will be stepped off in reverse priority at one second intervals. The Bus Overload indication will light to indicate that the bus is overloaded. This condition will automatically reset as the overload is corrected. Once the online load no longer exceeds the generating capacity, step shedding will cease and the system will continue to power the remaining loads. Indicators will annunciate the status of each Priority load block, indicating if any loads in that block are shed or if the load block is manually bypassed. If the operator bypasses the load shed to bring the shed loads back online, and the online load exceeds 100% of the capacity again, the system will again step loads off in reverse priority at one second intervals. This condition will automatically reset as the overload is corrected. This is done in an attempt to prevent an underfrequency condition, thereby preventing the entire load block from being shed. 4. Generator Load Demand Control a. After all generators sets have been paralleled to the bus and all loads are connected, a stabilization time delay (0 - 900 seconds) factory sets at 60 seconds will be initiated while a Load Demand Mode indication flashes. At the expiration of the time delay period, the system will operate in a load demand mode at which time the mode indication remains illuminated. The load demand logic controls the number of generating sets on the bus, such that the on-line reserve capacity of the bus is not less than 10%, nor more than 110%, of the capacity of a single generator set. b. Upon sensing that the connected load has decreased the reserve capacity to 10% or less (field adjustable from 1-29% displayed as 81-99% of Generator rating), a 10 second time delay is initiated and a “Gen Start TD Active “ indication starts flashing. This time delay will be field adjustable from 0 - 300 seconds. If the reserve capacity stays below 10% for the duration of the 10-second time

B/A#09100194 16236-12 delay, the controls will initiate the starting and paralleling of the next set in sequence. If, during the time delay period, the reserve capacity decreased to 0 or less (signifying bus overload), the time delay will be bypassed and the next set in sequence will be immediately started and paralleled. At the same time, loads shall begin to shed in reverse order every second until the online load does not exceed 100% of rated online generator capacity. c. If at any time, the online load exceeds 100% of available rated capacity, the system will remove the last load that was added. If the online load does not decrease to less than 100% of rated capacity, loads will be shed one at a time, every second in reverse order until the overload is corrected. The Bus Overload indication will light indicating that the bus is overloaded and will automatically reset as the overload is corrected. d. If the online load exceeds 120% of capacity, signals will be given to shed load such that the connected priority blocks of load are reduced to equal the number of engine generator sets on line. When the next set is paralleled to the bus, the shed load will be reconnected and all controls automatically reset. If the next generator set does not come online, the system will not automatically reset. The Bus Overload indication will blink indicating that the bus was overloaded and will stay on solid (not blinking) if the bus remains overloaded. Loads will not be added to the bus while the Bus Overload indication is active (blinking or solid). Once the operator acknowledges the Bus Overload indication by activating the Alarm Reset pushbutton, then the loads will be re-added as capacity allows (in Load Bus Optimization mode). e. If while operating in the load demand mode, an engine-generator set malfunction occurs, the affected set will be removed from the bus. If the remaining loads online exceed 100% of the remaining online generator capacity, the loads will step shed as described in the previous paragraph. If the load does not exceed the online capacity, no loads will shed. Generator Load Demand mode will momentarily reset and all generators will start. f. Upon sensing that the on-line reserve capacity has increased to 120% or more (field adjustable from 120-140 % displayed as 80- 60% of Generator rating), a 10 second (adjustable 0-300 seconds) time delay will be initiated and a “Gen Stop TD Active “ indication will start flashing. If the reserve capacity stays above 110% for the duration of the time delay, the circuit breaker of the last set that went on line will be opened. The engine will run for its cool down period, then shutdown. 5. Bus Load Optimization a. Each ATS load should be programmed with a priority value load (field adjustable, accessible via the Touch Screen on the master

B/A#09100194 16236-13 door). A load’s priority value is a 3-digit number. The most significant digit refers to the load’s block priority value (i.e. 201 => priority 2 load block, whereas 118 => priority 1 load block). The two lower significant digits refer to the load’s sub-priority value, or load step priority (i.e. 201 => priority 2 block, step 01; 118 => priority 1 block, step 18). Valid priority values are 1 – 8 while valid sub-priority values are 1 - 99. Therefore, valid three digit priority values are 101 - 899. Note: priority 1 loads (101 - 199) have insignificant sub-priority values since priority 1 loads are never optimized, also 3 digit priority values of 200, 300 and 400, etc. are not valid priority numbers. However, because of the dynamic nature of the adjustable load priorities, all loads, even priority 1 needs to have sub-priority step values. b. With the Bus Load Optimization soft switch in the "on" position (accessible via the Touch Screen) during emergency mode and with loads shed (loads requiring power), after a stabilization time delay (Bus Opt stable delay) the optimization feature is activated and a Bus Optimize Active indication illuminates. The Bus Optimize Active indication flashes through the duration of the stabilization time delay. At this time, the Bus Optimization loading control will determine if there is enough room to add the next load by checking the pre-set Load Value (field adjustable, accessible via the Touch Screen on the master door) assigned to the first sub- priority load (field adjustable, accessible via the Touch Screen on the master door) within the highest priority block that is shed and compare it to the excess generator bus capacity (also known as Headroom). c. Should a Priority Block fail to be added to the bus while operating in the Emergency Mode, loads could be added manually by the operator as described or automatically through "Bus Optimization". This feature is provided to re-add shed loads one at a time based on predetermined kW loading values up to the capacity of the on-line power. d. If it is determined that the load can be added without overloading the bus, the load is signaled to add. The real time kW demand is constantly measured and the next sub-priority load is evaluated. Loads are evaluated at a preset time interval defined via the operator interface (Bus Opt Step Time). When the bus has been loaded to a level such that the next load would exceed 95% of bus capacity, the Next Load Exceeds Headroom indication will activate and load adding will pause. The system will continuously monitor the generator demand and evaluate if the next load step can fit on the bus. If building demand decreases and the next load can fit (for the duration of the step time delay), the system will add it and continue the evaluation process until as many loads as possible are added to the bus.

B/A#09100194 16236-14 e. If the load has already been added, there is no reason to compare it to see if it will fit; the program will skip to the next available load. f. If the load is not calling for an engine start, it will be skipped. g. If at any time, the online load exceeds 100% of available rated capacity, the system will remove the last load that was added. If the online load does not decrease to less than 100% of rated capacity, loads will be shed one at a time, every second in reverse order until the overload is corrected. The Bus Overload indication will light indicating that the bus is overloaded and will automatically reset as the overload is corrected. In this event, the system will begin a 300 second stabilization delay time (fixed) before evaluating another load to be added to the bus. h. If a generator fails, it will be removed from the bus. If the remaining loads online exceed 100% of the remaining online generator capacity, the loads will step shed as described in the previous paragraph. If the load does not exceed the online capacity, no loads will be shed. The Bus Overload indication will activate indicating that the bus is overloaded and will automatically reset as the overload is corrected. i. If the connected load exceeds 120% of online capacity, all optimized loads will immediately shed in an attempt to avoid an underfrequency event. A Bus Overload indication will activate and latch indicating that the bus is overloaded. The system will NOT attempt to re-add loads until the Bus Overload indication is acknowledged by pressing the Alarm Reset pushbutton. j. In the event of a bus Under-frequency, all optimized loads will be shed as well as any additional unsupported blocks of load. Load blocks will be shed such that the remaining load blocks shall be one less than the number of generators remaining on the bus. The Bus Underfrequency condition will be indicated. k. No loads can be manually added while an underfrequency indication is active. The operator must acknowledge the alarm by pressing the Alarm Reset push-button. If the Bus Opt switch remains “on”, the stabilization timer will then re-initiate and the process of stepping on the loads is repeated (after the bus underfrequency has been reset). l. If a load block is manually bypassed, all loads in that block will add, subject to their individual step timers. If they were already optimized on, they will remain on. If the load block is then manually shed, all loads in that load block will shed. m. Once all loads in a priority load block have been added to the bus, the LOAD SHED indication for the associated priority will turn off. 6. Generator No Load Test a. A system test switch is provided in the master control Touch Screen to limit access to authorized persons only. Operation of

B/A#09100194 16236-15 this switch will initiate an automatic system operation as if an ATS Accessory 7 (engine start signal) from any of the automatic transfer switches had operated. However, unless a normal source outage occurs during this mode of operation, the transfer switches will not transfer its load to the emergency bus. To terminate this test, the system test switch is reset to initiate a normal system shutdown sequence. 7. Single Engine Test a. Each engine can be started for test purposes by placing its generator control switch to the test off-line position. In this mode, the generator circuit breaker will remain open. Should a normal source outage occur during this mode of operation, the breaker will close and the remaining units will be started. Upon restoration of normal power, the system will revert to single engine test mode until the switch is returned to the AUTOMATIC position. For online test, placing of the generator control switch to the test on-line position will present a similar operation except that the generator breaker will close when the generator achieves nominal voltage and frequency. 8. ATS Hand – Off – Auto (H-O-A) Controls a. The system shall be capable of H-O-A control for the ATSs provided the ATSs are equipped with the load shed relay (“Acc 30B” signal). During Emergency Mode any ATS can be individually added to the bus or shed via these controls. The operator can select the ATS to be added by placing it in the HAND position. When placed in the HAND position, the load shed relay (“Acc 30B” signal) at the ATS will be energized (if not already energized via normal load control), allowing the ATS to transfer to Emergency. If the operator inadvertently adds too much load, causing a Bus Underfrequency condition, all HAND switches will be reset back to AUTO and the system will revert to Normal load control. b. When the ATS is placed back into the AUTO position, the ATS will function per normal load control. Any switch that does not have an Acc 30B picked up by normal load control (i.e. the switch is in Load Shed) will be immediately transferred back to Normal. c. When an ATS first calls for an engine start, the system will immediately begin emergency mode. Any ATS left in the HAND position will be returned to AUTO and normal load control will commence. d. If an ATS is placed in the OFF position, it will NEVER transfer to emergency. Any ATS left in the OFF position will not automatically return to AUTO at the start of emergency mode. An ATS left in the OFF position can only be taken out of OFF via the HOA switch. If the system is running in emergency mode, placing

B/A#09100194 16236-16 an ATS in the OFF position will immediately shed it from the emergency source.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FACTORY TESTING AND QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTION

A. The equipment shall be factory tested to simulate a complete and integrated system. The circuit breakers supplied shall be installed in their actual positions and electrically and mechanically tested. A narrative of the system operation shall be provided and shall be utilized when testing the equipment. A certified factory test report shall be furnished to verify system testing.

B. The switchgear shall be subjected to the factory testing and quality control inspections to insure reliable operation. These tests and inspections shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Perform a megger test with a 1000 volt megger. The minimum acceptable megger reading shall be 100 megohms on the switchgear, with all fuses, switches, circuit breakers, and contactors in the open position. 2. Insulation tests of all equipment and wiring, buses, etc., in accordance with manufacturer's standard practice. 3. Circuit continuity and wiring. 4. Mechanical equipment adjustment and operation of all moveable equipment and devices. 5. Equipment arrangements, types, and ratings for conformance with approved drawings. 6. Bus bar phasing and bracing. 7. Integrity of all electrical connections. 8. Conformity with the nameplate and circuit identification indicated on the Drawings and the approved manufacturer's drawings. 9. Demonstration of Switchgear Functions.

C. All switchboard equipment shall be given complete operational tests to ascertain that all design functions are satisfactorily performed. Testing shall include: 1. Actuation of all alarm indication devices. 2. All control circuits, automatic operations and interlocks shall be tested under simulated operating conditions. 3. All of the above shall be tested according to design specifications for correct and positive operations.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. The installing contractor shall perform all receiving, unloading, storage and installation of the equipment per all local applicable codes.

B. User’s Manual:

B/A#09100194 16236-17 1. One copy shall be furnished of the operation and maintenance instructions for all equipment and devices provided under this Contract for use during the installation and commissioning into service of the emergency power system.

C. After installation by others, the engine-generator set and switchgear manufacturers shall provide the services of competent locally based service technicians/project managers to instruct the Installing Contractor, and to coordinate the commissioning of the equipment. They shall assist in placing the equipment into operation and provide instruction, as required, to the person or persons who are delegated to operate the equipment. This service shall include a minimum as follows: 1. Pre-installation coordination meeting to coordinate the installation and interconnection of the switchgear with the engine-generator equipment. 2. Initial checkout of the installation of the equipment to allow energizing of the switchgear. 3. Post-installation start-up and testing prior to system turnover and for the initial instruction period for operating personnel. This shall include all service required to checkout the emergency power system and demonstrate its complete operation, for final acceptance by the Owner.

D. The switchgear manufacturer shall maintain a competent factory service organization that is available for service and on call 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

E. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to verify that the following items have been completed and are ready to perform as specified before the arrival of the start-up technician. 1. Inspect for obvious shipping damage. 2. The switchgear is installed, anchored down and grounded. 3. Shipping splits have been reinstalled with the splits bolted together, interconnect wiring installed and bus splice plates installed. 4. Terminate all power cables. 5. Install customer control wiring to external equipment including engines, batteries, ATS, associated motor controls, etc. 6. The engine-generator set is installed and ready to run. (Batteries charged and fuel in tank, etc.) 7. Associated motor controls, plumbing, building utilities are complete and operational.

F. The start-up technician shall perform the following items: 1. Verify contractor connections, control power availability, visually inspect any relay settings. 2. With the engine generator supplier's technical representative controlling the engine, verify that the switchgear and control equipment are fully operational and perform per the sequence of operation specified.

B/A#09100194 16236-18 Equipment or services shall be provided by the engine generator set supplier. 3. With the engine generator supplier's technical representative controlling the engine, demonstrate all functions of the control system, both automatic and manual, to the satisfaction of the approving engineer. 4. Provide documentation in the form of function checklists and recorded data for each section to the approving engineer. 5. Provide plant operators with instruction on the plant operating procedures and major component operation after acceptance by the approving engineer.

3.3 WARRANTY AND SERVICE

A. Switchgear manufacturer warrants the equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for eighteen months from date of shipment.

B. Switchgear manufacturer shall have an established network of factory owned and operated service centers within the continental US capable of servicing the specified equipment.

C. The manufacturer's personnel shall be on call 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Personnel shall be factory trained and certified in the maintenance and repair of the specified equipment.

D. After-warranty service contracts shall be available to the owner by the manufacturer to provide periodic maintenance and/or repair of the specified equipment.

3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Operation Instructions and Maintenance Manuals: 1. After completion of work and start-up of the equipment at the project site, deliver to the Owner's Representative, (3) copies of operation instructions, maintenance manuals and drawings presenting full details for care and maintenance of each item of equipment provided under this Contract. 2. Each manual shall contain the operating and maintenance information and parts lists for all equipment provided under this Contract. When necessary, provide supplemental drawings to show system operation and servicing and maintenance points. For all electrical components, provide wiring and connection diagrams. Manuals shall include instructions required to accomplish specified operation and functions. Data shall be neat, clean, legible copies. 3. Switchgear drawings and wiring diagrams shall be included and up to date at the completion of start-up and system acceptance by the Owner. Drawings and wiring diagrams shall include any field modifications or changes to reflect actual as installed conditions.

B/A#09100194 16236-19 4. In general the manual shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: a. Switchgear Elevation & One Line b. AC & DC Schematic and Physical Component Layout Drawings c. Remote Interface drawing d. Bill of Material e. Circuit Breaker Operation Manuals f. Description of Operation g. Recommended Spare Parts List - showing all consumables anticipated to be required during routine maintenance and testing.

B. Manuals shall be in the form of three-ring binders and compact discs (CDs) adequately labeled with the project name and location and the contents indexed. Three (3) sets of manuals and three (3) sets of compact discs (CDs) shall be provided to the Owner's Representative.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16236-20 SECTION 16289 -TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16442 - Panelboards: Transient voltage surge suppressors integrated in panelboards.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment. 2. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. 3. IEEE C62.45 - Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low- Voltage AC Power Circuits.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA LS 1 - Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices.

C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 2. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit capacity, dimensions, weights, details, and wiring configuration.

C. Test Reports: 1. Indicate Let-Through voltage test data. 2. Submit spectrum analysis of each unit. 3. Submit test reports from nationally recognized independent testing laboratory verifying suppressors can survive published surge current rating.

B/A#09100194 16289-1 D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions and connection requirements.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify transient voltage surge suppression device complies with UL 1449 Second Edition Surge Voltage Ratings.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of transient voltage surge suppressors.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. List individual units under UL 1449 and UL 1283.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept equipment on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect equipment from damage by providing temporary covers until construction is complete in adjacent space.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Execution Requirements: Requirements for warranties.

B. Furnish five year manufacturer’s warranty for transient voltage surge suppressor part failure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR (TVSS)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D. 2. Siemens. 3. Cutler Hammer 4. General Electric 5. Liebert B/A#09100194 16289-2 6. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Surge protective devices for protection of AC electrical circuits.

C. Types: Service entrance switchboards, Enclosed switchgear, Distribution switchboards, Power panelboards.

D. Unit Operating Voltage: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Greater than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage.

F. Construction: 1. Finish: Factory finish of baked enamel. 2. Balanced Suppression Platform: Equally distribute surge current to Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. Furnish surge suppression platform with equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. 3. Internal Connections: Hardwired with connections using low impedance conductors and compression fittings. 4. Safety and Diagnostic Monitoring: Equipped with standard overcurrent protection: a. Continuous monitoring of fusing system. b. Monitor individual MOV’s (including neutral to ground). Capable of identifying open circuit failures not monitored by conventional fusing systems. c. Monitor for overheating in each mode due to thermal runaway. d. Furnish green and red solid state indicator light on each phase. Absence of green light and presence of red light indicates which phases have been damaged. Fault detection activates flashing trouble light. Units not capable of detecting open circuit damage, thermal conditions, and over current will not be accepted. 5. Labeling: Permanently affix UL 1449 suppression voltage ratings and CSA to unit.

G. Rating: 1. Electrical Noise Filter: Furnish each unit with high performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Electric line noise attenuation no less than 45 dB at 100 kHz using MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method.

H. Accessories: 1. Digital display transient event counter with manual reset. 2. Local audible alarm. 3. Form C dry contacts one normally open (NO) and one normally closed (NC) for remote status monitoring. 4. Remote monitor panel with indicating lights and audible alarm for mounting in remote location. 5. Push-to-test feature. B/A#09100194 16289-3 I. Surge Current Capacity: Total surge current (based on 8 x 20 microsecond waveform) device is capable of surviving is not less than: Min Surge Current Min Surge Current Application Per Phase Per Mode *

Service Entrance (Switchboards, Switchgear, MCC) 240 kA 120 kA

Distribution and branch locations (Panelboards, 120 kA 60 kA MCC, Bus Duct)

*L-G, L-N and N-G (WYE system);

J. Protection Modes: For Wye configured system, furnish device with directly connected suppression elements between line-neutral (L-N), line-ground (L-G), and neutral-ground (N-G).

K. Do not exceed the following for maximum UL 1449 suppression voltage ratings:

Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347

WYE - L-N; L-G; N-G 400 V 800 V 1200 V Delta - L-L, L-G 800 V 1500 V 2000 V

L. ANSI/IEEE Catalog C3 Let Through Voltage: Based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for Catalog C3 surges (20 kV, 10kA) and not less than:

Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347

L-N 500 V 900 V 1300 V

M. ANSI/IEEE Cat. B3 Let Through Voltage: Based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for ANSI/IEEE Catalog B3 Ringwave (6 kV, 500 amps) not less than:

Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347

L-N 170 V 300 V 470 V

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

A. Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.

B. Test units to specified surge ratings to ensure devices will achieve required life expectancy and reliability. Testing to full ratings also verifies internal B/A#09100194 16289-4 construction quality of suppressors. Provide withstand testing for each mode and each phase basis.

C. Perform actual Let-Through voltage test data in form of oscillograph results for ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Catalog C3 (20 kV, 10 kA), Catalog C1 (6 kV, 3 kA), and Catalog. B3 (6 kv, 500 A at 100 kHz) tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.45.

D. Perform spectrum analysis of each unit based on MIL-STD-220A test procedures between 50 kHz and 200 kHz verifying device noise attenuation exceeds 45 dB at 100 kHz.

E. Perform test verifying suppressors can survive published surge current rating for each mode and each phase basis. Test wave based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41, 8x20 microsecond current wave.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify mounting area is ready for equipment.

C. Verify circuit rough-ins are at correct location.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with IEEE 1100.

B. Install service entrance suppressors internal to switchgear off of branch breaker.

C. Install distribution and branch suppressors internal panelboards off of branch breaker.

D. Install using breaker connection.

E. Install indicator lights, trouble alarms, surge counter in face of switchgear or panelboard.

F. Install with maximum conductor length of 14 inches (350 mm). Install suppressor with internal fusing.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16289-5

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

B/A#09100194 16289-6

SECTION 16411 -ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fusible and nonfusible switches.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16491 - Fuses.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 2. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).

B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches and ratings of installed fuses.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D Co. 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric

B/A#09100194 16411-1

4. Siemens 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.

C. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R or J fuses.

D. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.

E. Service Entrance: Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for this application. Furnish solid neutral assembly and equipment ground bar.

F. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts.

G. Fusible switches to be equipped with single phase protection.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D Co. 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 4. Siemens 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.

C. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.

D. Service Entrance: Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for this application. Furnish solid neutral assembly and equipment ground bar.

E. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts.

F. Non-Fused switches to be equipped with single phase protection.

B/A#09100194 16411-2

2.3 SWITCH RATINGS

A. Switch Rating: Horsepower rated for AC or DC as indicated on Drawings.

B. Short Circuit Current Rating: UL listed for 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class H or K fuses (30-600 ampere).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed switches plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16070.

B. Height: 5 feet (1500 mm) to operating handle.

C. Install fuses for fusible disconnect switches. Refer to Section 16491 for product requirements.

D. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 16075.

E. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services.

B. Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16411-3

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A#09100194 16411-4 SECTION 16421 -ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes manual and magnetic motor controllers in individual enclosures.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16491 - Fuses.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 2. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 3. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 4. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures. 5. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).

B. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details.

C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and ratings of enclosed controllers.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit Replacement parts list for controllers.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B/A#09100194 16421-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FRACTIONAL-HORSEPOWER MANUAL CONTROLLER

A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D Co. 2. Cutler Hammer 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose, Class A, manually operated, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal overload unit, red pilot light, and toggle operator.

C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type to meet conditions of installation.

2.2 FULL-VOLTAGE NON-REVERSING CONTROLLERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D Co. 2. Cutler Hammer 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A solid-state controller for induction motors rated in horsepower.

C. Control Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz

D. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

E. Overload Relay: 1. Melting Alloy: With one-piece thermal unit construction. Thermal units shall be interchangeable. Overload relay control circuit contact shall be replaceable. Thermal units shall be required for starter to operate. 2. Solid State: Trip current rating will be established by selection of overload relay and shall be adjustable (3 to 1 current range). The overload shall be self-powered, provide phase loss and phase unbalance protection, have a permanent tamper guard and be ambient insensitive. It will also be available in Trip Class 10 or 20 and have a mechanical test function. 3. Outputs: Unit will be designed for addition of either a normally open or normally closed auxiliary contact and be field convertible. 4. Reset: Unit shall offer both manual reset and remote reset using an external module.

F. Product Features: 1. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each field convertible contacts in addition to seal-in contact. 2. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5, heavy duty type. 3. Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 5, Form Z, rated A150. 4. Pushbuttons: Covered type. 5. Indicating Lights: LED type. B/A#09100194 16421-2 6. Selector Switches: Rotary type. 7. Overload Relay: NEMA ICS

G. Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with disconnect in common enclosure, using fusible switch conforming to NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class J fuses. Obtain IEC Class 2 coordinated component protection.

H. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16070.

B. Height: 5 feet to operating handle.

C. Install fuses for fusible switches. Refer to Section 16491 for product requirements.

D. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics.

E. Install engraved plastic nameplates. Refer to Section 16075 for product requirements and location.

F. Neatly type label and place inside each motor controller door identifying motor served nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. Place label in clear plastic holder.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16421-3

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A#09100194 16421-4

SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes distribution and branch circuit panelboards, electronic grade branch circuit panelboards, and load centers.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding. 2. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: 1. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 2. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 4. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 5. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 6. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. 7. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.

C. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

D. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards. 2. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 3. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Requirements for submittals. B/A#09100194 16442-1

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.

C. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting arrangements.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Requirements for maintenance products.

B. Furnish two of each panelboard key. Panelboards keyed alike.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D Co. 2. Cutler Hammer 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: NEMA PB 1, breaker type panelboard. Furnish combination controllers as indicated on Drawings.

C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings. Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard and to be fully extended through all useable spaces for future connections of devices.

D. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Furnish circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits.

B/A#09100194 16442-2

F. Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated on Drawings.

G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1, 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide cabinet box.

H. Cabinet Front: Surface 1 piece with door-in-door type. Door shall have rounded corners. A clear plastic directory card holder shall be mounted on the inside of the door.

2.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D Co. 2. Cutler Hammer 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.

C. Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings. Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard.

D. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.

F. Cabinet Box: 6 inches (153 mm) deep, 20 inches (508 mm) wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches (508 mm) wide for 480 volt panelboards.

G. Cabinet Front: Surface or Flush hinged 1 piece door. Door shall have rounded corners. A clear plastic directory card holder shall be mounted on the inside of the door.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and load centers in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Install panelboards and load centers plumb.

C. Install recessed panelboards and load centers flush with wall finishes.

D. Height: 6 feet (1800 mm) to top of panelboard and load center; install panelboards taller than 6 feet (1800 mm) with bottom no more than 4 inches (100 mm) above floor.

E. Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.

B/A#09100194 16442-3

F. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard and load center. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes to balance phase loads.

G. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 16075.

H. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 4 empty 1 inch (DN27). Identify each as SPARE.

I. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16060. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in accordance with NFPA 70.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services,

B. Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

D. Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.

E. Perform switch inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.

F. Perform controller inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16442-4

SECTION 16491 FUSES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fuses and spare fuse cabinet.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.

1.3 FUSE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. All fuses to be by the same manufacturer.

B. Main Service Switches Larger than 600 amperes: Class L (time delay).

C. Motor Branch Circuits: Class J (time delay).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit data sheets showing electrical characteristics, including time-current curves.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual sizes, ratings, and locations of fuses.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish two fuse pullers.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish three sets of spare fuses of each Class, size, and rating installed.

B/A#09100194 16491-1

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bussman. 2. Ferraz Shawmut 3. Gould Shamut. 4. Graybar Electric 5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or as indicated on Drawings.

C. Voltage: Rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.

2.2 SPARE FUSE CABINET

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bussman. 2. Gould Shamut. 3. Hoffman. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Wall-mounted sheet metal cabinet with shelves, suitably sized to store spare fuses and fuse pullers specified. Locate in main electrical room. Verify exact location with Owner before installation.

C. Doors: Hinged, with hasp for Owner's padlock.

D. Finish: Gray enamel with labeling.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuse with label oriented so manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.

B. Install spare fuse cabinet in mechanical room 1068 or maintenance 1071 as directed by Owner.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16491-2 SECTION 16510 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes interior luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16530 - Emergency lighting.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast-Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast. 2. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts-for High- Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire not standard product of manufacturer.

C. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

D. Samples: Submit two color chips 3 x 3 inch (75 x 75 mm) in size illustrating luminaire finish color where indicated in luminaire schedule.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish two of each plastic lens type.

C. Furnish 10% replacement lamps for each lamp installed.

B/A#09100194 16510-1 D. Furnish 10% of each ballast type.

E. Furnish five (5) spare gear trays for security fixtures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES

A. Product Description: Complete interior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and accessories as scheduled.

B. Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements for product options. Substitutions are able to be submitted for consideration a minimum of 2 weeks before the bid date.

2.2 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric 2. Advanced. 3. Universal 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Electronic High-power-factor type electromagnetic ballast certified by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. to comply with ANSI C82.1, suitable for lamps specified, with voltage to match luminaire voltage.

2.3 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Advanced. 2. General Electric Co. 3. Universal 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: ANSI C82.4, metal halide lamp ballast, suitable for lamp specified, with voltage to match luminaire voltage.

2.4 FLUORESCENT DIMMING BALLASTS AND CONTROLS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Advanced Mark VII. 2. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Electrical assembly of control unit and ballast to furnish smooth dimming of fluorescent lamps.

C. Ballast: Selected by dimming system manufacturer as suitable for operation with control unit and suitable for lamp type and quantity specified for luminaire.

B/A#09100194 16510-2 2.5 INCANDESCENT LAMPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Oshram Sylvania. 2. GE Lighting. 3. Philips Electronics North America. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Oshram Sylvania. 2. GE Lighting. 3. Philips Electronics. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Fluorescent Lamps: Programmed rapid start fluorescent lamp shall be energy saving type, color temperature of 3500°K, a color rendering index not less than 85, and not less than 20,000 hours average rated life. Refer to drawings for additional detailed information.

C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Shall have a color temperature of 3500°K, a color rendering index not less than 85, and not less then 10,000 hours average rated life. Refer to drawings for additional detailed information.

2.7 HID LAMPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Oshram Sylvania. 2. GE Lighting. 3. Philips Electronics North America. 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.

B. Support luminaires independent of ceiling framing.

C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on Drawings.

D. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.

E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface-mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure. B/A#09100194 16510-3 F. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.

G. Special support required for all security type fixtures. Refer to detail for exact requirements.

H. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.

I. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.

J. Install wall-mounted luminaires at height as indicated on Drawings or as scheduled.

K. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

L. Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16130 as indicated on Drawings.

M. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire.

N. Install specified lamps in each luminaire.

O. Ground and bond interior luminaires in accordance with Section 16060.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Aim and adjust luminaires as indicated on Drawings.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Final cleaning.

B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.

C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Execution Requirements: Protecting finished work.

B. Relamp luminaires having failed lamps at Substantial Completion. B/A#09100194 16510-4 3.6 SCHEDULES

A. Refer to Fixture Schedules on Drawings.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16510-5

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

B/A#09100194 16510-6 SECTION 16515 LIGHTING CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting relay panels. 2. Occupancy sensors. 3. Photocells.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Product requirements for electrical identification items for placement by this section. 2. Section 16123 - Building Wire and Cable. 3. Section 16130 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems: Product requirements for raceway and boxes for placement by this section. 4. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices: Product requirements for wiring devices for placement by this section. 5. Section 16150 - Wiring Connections: Execution requirements for electric connections specified by this section. 6. Section 16442 - Panelboards.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 2. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. 3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 4. NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal Blocks. 5. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. 6. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures. 7. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Distributed switching control using self contained individually mounted lighting relays.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B/A#09100194 16515-1 B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensioned drawings of lighting control system components and accessories. 1. One Line Diagram: Indicating system configuration indicating panels, number and type of switches or devices. 2. Include typical wiring diagrams for each component. 3. Guaranteed layout of occupancy sensors.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s standard product data for each system component.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for each system component.

E. Manufacturer’s layout: Manufacturer shall submit floor plans with sensor locations, types, and all required components for review.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record the following information: 1. Actual locations of components and record circuiting and switching arrangements. 2. Wiring diagrams reflecting field installed conditions with identified and numbered system components and devices.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit replacement parts numbers. 2. Submit manufacturer’s published installation instructions and operating instructions. 3. Recommended renewal parts list.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Convene minimum three weeks prior to commencing work of this section.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept components on site in manufacturer’s packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect components by storing in manufacturer’s containers indoor protected from weather.

B/A#09100194 16515-2 1.9 WARRANTY

A. Furnish one year manufacturer warranty for components.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide 10% spare relays per LCP, up to the maximum capacity of the LCP.

B. Provide CD version of manufacturers operating software to include graphical interface software.

C. Provide 2 extra sets of as-built and operating manuals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REMOTE CONTROL LIGHTING RELAYS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Lighting Control and Design. 2. Hubbell Building Automation 3. Leviton 4. Lutron 5. Wattstopper 6. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Relay Panels 1. NEMA rated enclosure with screw cover or hinged door. 2. 16 AWG steel barriers shall separate the high voltage and low voltage compartments of the panel and separate 120v and 277v. 3. LCP input power shall be capable of accepting 120v or 277v without rewiring 4. Control electronics in the low voltage section shall be capable of driving up to 48, 20a, 14,000 SCCR rated latching relays, control any individual or group of relays, provide individual relay overrides, provide a master override for each panel, store all programming in non-volatile memory, after power is restored return system to current state, provide programmable blink warn timers for each relay and every zone, and be able to control relays that default to Open, Normally Open Latching (NOL) or relays that default to Closed, Normally Closed Latching (NCL). 5. Lighting control system shall be digital and consist of LCPs, digital switches, digital interface cards or modules. All system components shall connect and be controlled via manufacturer’s required cable, providing real time two-way communication with each system component. Analog systems are not acceptable. 6. The lighting control system is a networked system that communicates via manufacturer’s required cable and includes centralized relay panels, digital switches, photocells, various interfaces and operational software. The intent of the specification is to integrate all lighting control into one

B/A#09100194 16515-3 Energy Management Control System. Lighting control system shall include all hardware and software. Software to be resident within the lighting control system. Non-networked, non-digital system not acceptable.

C. Standard Output relays 1. UL Listed 20 Amp, Latching, 14,000 SCCR, 277VAC Ballast and HID and 20 Amp Tungsten at 120 Vac. 2. Relays shall be individually replaceable. Relay terminal blocks shall be capable of accepting two (2) #8AWG wires on both the line and the load side. Systems that do not allow for individual relay replacement or additions are not acceptable. 3. Relays to be rated for 150,000 operations minimum at a full 20a lighting load, default to closed at normal power loss, Normally Closed Latching (NCL). 4. Relay types available shall include: Normally Open Latching (NOL) relay, a 600v 2-pole NO and NC and a Single Pole, Double Throw (SPDT) relay.

D. Low Voltage Switches 1. All switches shall be digital and communicate via manufacturer’s required cable. Contact closure style switches, except as specified, shall not be acceptable. The programming for a digital switch will reside in the switch itself, via double EPROM memory. Any digital switch button function shall be able to be changed locally (at the DTC or a PC) or remotely, via modem or Ethernet. 2. Digital low voltage switch shall be a device that sits on the lighting control system bus. Digital switch shall connect to the system bus using the same cable and connection method required for relay panels. System shall provide capability to locally and remotely program each individual switch button, monitor and change function of each button locally and remotely. Each button shall be capable of being programmed for On only, Off only and On/Off (toggle). Switches requiring low voltage control wires to be moved from one input terminal to another to accomplish these functions are not acceptable. 3. Low voltage switches to match color of receptacles and line voltage toggle switches.

E. Digital Electronic Time Clock 1. A Digital Time Clock (DTC) shall control and program the entire lighting control system and supply all time functions and accept interface inputs. 2. DTC shall be capable of up to 32 schedules. Each schedule shall consist of one set of On and Off times per day for each day of the week and for each of two holiday lists. The schedules shall apply to any individual relay or group of relays. 3. The DTC shall be capable of controlling up to 126 digital devices on a single bus and capable of interfacing digitally with other individual busses using manufacturer supplied interface cards. 4. The DTC shall accept control locally using built in button prompts and use of a display or from a computer or modem via an on-board RS 232 port. B/A#09100194 16515-4 All commands shall be in plain English. Help pages shall display on the DTC screen. 5. The DTC shall be run from non-volatile memory so that all system programming and real time clock functions are maintained for a minimum of 24 days with loss of power. 6. Provide lighting control software to owner on a CD. 7. Controls contractor outputs shall provide system wide timed overrides. Any relay, group or zone that is overridden On, before or after hours, shall automatically be swept Off by the EMCS a maximum of 2 hours later.

F. Photocell 1. Photocells to be mounted in location indicated on the plans. Photocells used for exterior lights shall provide multiple trips point from 1 roof mounted unit. 2. All trips points shall be able to be changed through the lighting controls software. 3. Photocells requiring manual trip point adjustment are not acceptable. Photocell used for interior lighting control shall have multiple settings such as start-point, mid-point, off-point, fade-up, fade-down, etc. All settings shall be remotely accessible and adjustable. Systems providing local adjustment only are not acceptable. Photocells to be certified to comply with the current energy code covering this project at time of submittal of plans for building permit.

G. Interfaces 1. System to have all of the following interfaces. a. A dry contact input interface card that provides 12 programmable dry contact closure inputs. b. Direct digital interface to building automation EMCS using Lonworks that accept on/off commands, time schedules and report status of all relays in all panels in real time. Interface cards shall “self populate” each individual relay and each group to the EMCS. Lighting control system shall accept schedules from EMCS. All EMCS system programming required shall be the responsibility of the EMCS system provider.

2.2 OCCUPANCY SENSOR

A. Manufacturers 1. Leviton 2. Watt Stopper 3. Hubbell

B. Self Contained Units 1. General to Wall Switches with Infrared: a. Shall use passive infrared motion detection. b. Shall be compatible with incandescent, magnetic or electronic low voltage, and magnetic or electronic fluorescent, as well as motor loads. B/A#09100194 16515-5 c. Switch shall be microprocessor controlled. d. Shall be capable of detecting occupancy with true, 180º field of view. e. Shall utilize zero crossing circuitry, which increases relay life, protects from the effects of inrush current, and increases sensor longevity. f. Wall switch shall have integral shutters that narrow the field of view from 180º. g. Shall feature pushbutton for manual on and off, which times out based upon occupancy detection. h. An LED shall indicate occupancy status. i. Manual range, photocell, and time settings shall be user- configurable. j. Switch shall be rated at 120/277V in one unit. k. Unit shall fit in a standard box and use a standard wallplate, which is gangable. l. Wall switch shall not protrude more than .4 inches from box. m. Shall be a Decora style unit with a matching wallplate available. n. Wall switch must be available in white, ivory, almond, and gray (or equivalent colors). 2. Self Adaptive Technology Wall Switch: a. Shall use microprocessor for motion signal analysis and internal, adaptive self- adjustment. b. No manual adjustment shall be required at the time of installation or during operation. c. Shall automatically adapt to changing room conditions with the ability to disable adaptive features. d. Shall save learned and adjusted settings in non-volatile memory that retains all settings during power outages. e. Shall recognize motion detected within 20 seconds of turning off lighting as a false off. In response to a false off, the microprocessor shall increase the time-off setting. f. Maximum adapted time-out shall not exceed 30 minutes. g. Walk through feature shall shut off lights within 2.5 minutes after momentary occupancy. h. Shall beep before load is automatically switched off. i. Shall have a 3-position service switch: off, auto, and on. j. Four, selectable manual timer settings shall be available from 30sec to 20min. 3. Dual Relay Wall Switch: a. Shall provide switching for 2 separate banks from a single unit. b. Shall use microprocessor for motion signal analysis and internal, adaptive self-adjustment. c. Shall save learned and adjusted settings in non-volatile memory that retains all settings during power outages. d. No manual adjustment shall be required at the time of installation or during operation.

B/A#09100194 16515-6 e. Shall automatically adapt to changing room conditions—with the ability to disable adaptive features. f. Maximum adapted time-out shall not exceed 30 minutes. g. Walk through feature shall shut off lights within 2.5 minutes after momentary occupancy. h. Shall offer two modes of operation: i. Only one relay responds to photocell. j. Both relays respond to photocell and lights return to the previous state on the next cycle. k. Shall beep before load is automatically switched off. l. Shall have a 3-position service switch: off, auto, and on. m. Four, selectable manual timer settings shall be available from 30sec to 20min.

C. Low-Voltage Sensors and Accessories 1. General to Low Voltage Sensors a. Shall use microprocessor for motion signal analysis and internal, adaptive self-adjustment. b. No manual adjustment shall be required at the time of installation or during operation. c. Shall automatically adapt to changing room conditions. d. Shall identify, record and learn a room’s normal occupancy cycles to automatically adjust the sensitivity threshold. e. Shall save learned and adjusted settings in non-volatile memory that retains all settings during power outages. f. Shall recognize motion detected within 20 seconds of turning off lighting, as a false off. In response to a false off, the microprocessor shall increase sensitivity, and increase the time-off setting. g. Sensor shall recognize as a false on the failure to detect motion 6 seconds after motion is initially detected, turning on lighting. The sensor shall decrease the sensitivity in response to a false on. h. Sensor shall feature an 8-second time-out install test mode, which will automatically revert to standard time-out no longer than one hour after test mode is initiated. Sensor shall have manual controls and override switches to force manual adjustments. i. Shall provide a concealed bypass switch to force on lighting. j. Sensitivity shall be adjustable from 0% to 100%. k. Control knob shall set the minimum setting for the timer in automatic mode. l. Control knobs shall set the initial settings for automatic sensitivity adjustments. m. Shall have a switch for restoring factory settings. n. Timer shall be manually selectable. o. Provide Form 1C isolated dry relay contacts on localized stand alone occupancy sensors not connect to relay system. Contacts shall be furnished for future interfacing the sensor to auxiliary systems.

B/A#09100194 16515-7 p. Optional photocell shall be available. Photocell shall prevent lighting from coming on when the ambient light levels are above the set point. q. Shall be equipped with tamper resistant cover. r. All controls shall be accessible from front of unit. s. Rugged, plastic housing shall be available white t. Shall accept Class 2 wiring. 2. Low-Voltage Multi-Technology Ceiling-Mount a. Shall incorporate Doppler shift ultrasonic and passive infrared motion detection technologies. b. Shall mount on the ceiling. c. Shall be available in 180º and 360º coverage patterns. d. Infrared lenses shall have a 360º field of view. e. Shall be available in 32kHz or 40kHz ultrasonic frequencies. f. Shall automatically adapt to changing room conditions—including background PIR levels and continuous airflow. g. Shall incorporate a real-time motion indicator LED, which is visible from the front of unit. h. Operating status and setting confirmation shall be provided via LED motion indicators. i. Shall have mask inserts for PIR rejection to prevent false tripping. 3. Power Pack a. Shall be compatible with incandescent, magnetic or electronic low voltage, and magnetic or electronic fluorescent, as well as motor loads. b. Ratings: Shall utilize normally open, silver alloy dry contacts rated for a 20A-ballast load. c. Relay function shall not require more than 5-ma control current to operate. d. Power Pack shall allow for separation of Class 1 and Class 2 wiring. e. Power Pack Mounting Specifications 1) Shall fit inside the ballast cavity of a fluorescent fixture, and shall be qualified for installation in a ballast cavity. 2) Shall be sized to fit inside a standard, 4” x 4” junction box. 3) Shall be mountable to a 1/2in. knockout within a ballast cavity on the line voltage end, such that it may be mounted to the outside of a junction box with the line voltage wiring internal to the box and the low voltage wiring external. 4) Shall be mountable to a 1/2in. knockout within a ballast cavity on the low voltage end, such that it may be mounted to the inside of a ballast cavity with the box and line voltage wiring internal to the cavity and the low voltage wiring external. 4. Relay

B/A#09100194 16515-8 a. Relay shall be compatible with incandescent, magnetic or electronic low voltage, and magnetic or electronic fluorescent, as well as motor loads. b. Control module shall interface with and control two- and three- wire relays from GE, Reliant and Hubbell. c. Add-A-Relay shall accept 24VAC full-wave or half-wave rectified power. d. Shall supply 24VDC at full rated current of 100ma. e. Control module Output: 1) Output for relay control shall be dry contact closure, not solid state switching. 2) Shall be an “ON” dry contact closure of at least 150ms when blue wire transitions from low to high. 3) Shall be an “OFF” dry contract closure of at least 150ms when blue wire transitions from high to low. f. Mounting Specifications 1) Shall fit inside the ballast cavity of a fluorescent fixture, and shall be qualified for installation in a ballast cavity. 2) Shall be sized to fit inside a standard, 4” x 4” junction box. 3) Shall be mountable to a 1/2in. knockout within a ballast cavity on the line voltage end, such that it may be mounted to the outside of a junction box with the line voltage wiring internal to the box and the low voltage wiring external. 4) Shall be mountable to a 1/2in. knockout within a ballast cavity on the low voltage end, such that it may be mounted to the inside of a ballast cavity with the box and line voltage wiring internal to the cavity and the low voltage wiring external

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Mount panels, switches, occupancy sensors, and photocells as indicated on Drawings.

B. Install wiring in accordance with Section 16123.

C. Use only properly color coded, stranded wire. Install wire sizes as indicated on Drawings. Install wire in conduit in accordance with Section 16130.

D. Label each low voltage wire clearly indicating connecting relay panel. Refer to Section 16075.

E. Mount relay as indicated on Drawings. Wire numbered relays in panel to control power to each load. Install relays to be accessible. Allow space around relays for ventilation and circulation of air.

B/A#09100194 16515-9 F. Identify power wiring with circuit breaker number controlling load. When multiple circuit breaker panels are feeding into relay panel, label wires to indicate originating panel designation.

G. Label each low voltage wire with relay number at each switch or sensor.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for manufacturer’s field services.

B. Furnish services for minimum of three days for check, test, and start-up. Perform the following services: 1. Check installation of panelboards. 2. Test operation of remote controlled devices. 3. Repair or replace defective components.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Test each system component after installation to verify proper operation.

B. Test relays and switches after installation to confirm proper operation.

C. Confirm correct loads are recorded on directory card in each panel.

3.4 START UP AND TRAINING

A. On-site start-up and training of the system shall be included in the project bid.

B. Start-up shall include a complete working demonstration of the system with simulation of possible operating conditions that may be encountered.

C. Training shall include any documentation and hands-on exercises necessary to enable operations personnel to assume full operating responsibility for the system after completion of the training period.

D. The project bid shall include two days start-up assistance, minimum, and two days training to include four trip(s), minimum. 1. Ten (10) days prior to start up manufacturer shall contact controls contractor to coordinate all information (points and panel schedules). 2. Ten (10) days prior to start up manufacturer shall contact contractor and shall submit a start up checklist for contractor to review and verify that work is completed prior to manufacturer’s arrival. 3. Ten (10) days prior to start up manufacturer shall contact engineer and owner and shall submit a list showing schedules for approval prior to programming. 4. Ten (10) days prior to training session manufacturer shall contact owner and engineer and shall submit a training agenda to engineer for review and approval. 5. Training trips shall be separate from start up. B/A#09100194 16515-10 E. Demonstrate operation of the following system components: 1. Operation of switches. Demonstrate for all zones. 2. Operation of each occupancy sensors. 3. Operation of each photocell.

F. The manufacturer shall provide a full time telephone technical help center for customers.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16515-11

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

B/A#09100194 16515-12

SECTION 16520 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes exterior luminaries, poles, and accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements - Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire not standard Product of manufacturer.

C. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

D. Samples: Submit two color chips 3 x 3 inch (75 x 75 mm) in size illustrating luminaire finish color where indicated in luminaire schedule.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Store and handle solid wood poles in accordance with ANSI O5.1.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordination with project conditions.

B. Furnish bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to installer of pole foundations.

B/A#09100194 16520-1

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish 10% of each lamp installed.

C. Furnish one gallons of touch-up paint for each different painted finish and color.

D. Furnish 10% ballasts of each lamp type installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINARIES

A. Product Description: Complete exterior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and accessories as scheduled.

B. Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements for product options. Substitutions are permitted only if submitted properly 10 days before bids are due.

2.2 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Advanced. 2. Universal 3. General Electric 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: ANSI C82.4, metal halide lamp ballast, suitable for lamp and environmental conditions specified, with voltage to match luminaire voltage.

2.3 HID LAMPS

A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric Co. 2. Philips Electronic North America. 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.4 METAL POLES

A. Manufacturers: 1. As specified on Fixture Schedule on sheet 2. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Coordination with Project conditions. B/A#09100194 16520-2

B. Verify foundations are ready to receive fixtures.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install concrete bases for lighting poles at locations as indicated on Drawings.

B. Install poles plumb. Install double nuts to adjust plumb. Grout around each base.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Bond and ground luminaries, metal accessories and metal poles in accordance with Section 16060. Install supplementary grounding electrode at each pole.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation.

B. Measure illumination levels to verify conformance with performance requirements.

C. Take measurements during night sky, without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring moon.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Aim and adjust luminaries to provide illumination levels and distribution as indicated on Drawings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Execution Requirements: Protecting finished work.

B. Relamp luminaries having failed lamps at Substantial Completion.

3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Refer to Fixture Schedule on sheet E1.1.

END OF SECTION B/A#09100194 16520-3

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

B/A#09100194 16520-4 SECTION 16530 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes emergency lighting units and exit signs.

B. Related Sections:

C. Section 16510 - Interior Luminaires: Exit signs.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Emergency lighting to comply with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

C. Samples: Submit two color chips 3 x 3 inch (75 x 75 mm) in size illustrating unit finish color.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish one replacement lamps for each lamp installed.

C. Furnish one replacement battery for each battery type and size.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. As specified on Fixtures Schedule on Drawings.

B/A#09100194 16530-1 1. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Install two (2) 1400 Lumen Batteries in the Life Safety Room for battery backup.

2.2 EXIT SIGNS

A. As specified on Fixture Schedules on sheet 01-E09.01. 1. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Exit sign fixture suitable for use as emergency lighting unit.

C. Housing: as indicated on drawings.

D. Face: Translucent glass face with green letters.

E. Directional Arrows: Universal type for field adjustment.

F. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings Universal, for field selection.

G. Lamps: LED.

H. Input Voltage: 120 volts.

2.3 BLT or EPC – SILENT SINGLE ZONE AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY POWER TRANSFER CONTROL

A. Installation 1. BLT or EPC is designed to be installed as a wiring device as indicated on the drawings.

B. Method Of Operation 1. BLT or EPC single zone silent operation control is designed for lights in public spaces where critical light levels of at least 1 foot candle must be maintained during a loss of normal utility power. The EPC senses the loss or voltage drop and within 1.5 seconds transfers the load to an available emergency source. When the normal utility power is restored, the EPC senses this and will transfer the load back within 1.5 seconds to the normal utility power. Momentary incorporated test switch simulates normal power failure and can be performed anytime. Any interruption of normal utility power will automatically transfer designated lights to full bright condition regardless whether system is turned on or off.

C. Electrical Specifications 1. BLT or LVS Emergency Power Controls have been tested, approved, and are listed by Underwriters laboratories under UL924 standard designated emergency light fixtures controls. They meet and exceed all NEC articles 700 through 700-26, 701-717, 702-709, 705-750, wherever applicable, in addition to NFPA 1104-2.4.1, OHSA and life safety codes. EPC utilizes contacts which can not stick mechanically of electrically. Contacts are rated at 30Amp and can be subjected to 15 Amp direct shorts without B/A#09100194 16530-2 damage when protected by surge protectors and all 24 volt 24 circuits employ not one but two 24 volt, 2 wall zeners in parallel to protect unit components against over voltage damage.

D. C-1 & C-2 contact ratings 1. 120 VAC ballast 20 amp 2. 120-V tungsten 1800 watt 3. general use 20 amp, 1 HP 5. general use 20 amp, 1.5 HP

E. Features 1. EPC (or BLT) units continually monitor status of contactors, regular and emergency power by LED’s. Emergency power and conductors are continually monitored against interruption and any failure will activate a built-in buzzer.

F. Warranty 1. All model EPC (or BLT) units are tested during production and upon completion are burned in for a minimum of 24 hrs. and cycled under varying conditions 100 times. 2. 10 year replacement warranty. 3. Designed for 35 year trouble free service.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install suspended exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend sign at indicated height.

B. Install surface-mounted emergency lighting units and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.

C. Install wall-mounted emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings.

D. Install accessories furnished with each emergency lighting unit and exit sign.

E. Connect emergency lighting units and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided in Section 16130 as indicated on Drawings.

F. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within unit.

G. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit and exit sign.

H. Ground and bond emergency lighting units and exit signs in accordance with Section 16060.

B/A#09100194 16530-3 I. Single zone automatic emergency power transfer control devices shall be installed in a junction box recessed above ceiling with test switch visible and shall have no time delay.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Operate each unit after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Aim and adjust lamp fixtures as indicated on Drawings.

C. Position exit sign directional arrows as required by code.

3.4 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Execution Requirements: Protecting finished work.

B. Relamp emergency lighting units and exit signs having failed lamps at Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16530-4

SECTION 16700 COMMUNICATIONS RACEWAYS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes conduits and raceways and backboards for future telephone, security, and communication equipment.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding. 2. Section 16075 - Electrical Identification. 3. Section 16130 - Raceway and Boxes. 4. Section 16133 - Cable Trays. 5. Section 16141 - Floor Boxes.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. International Electrical Testing Association: 1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

B. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance: 1. TIA/EIA 568 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 2. TIA/EIA 569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Rough-in for communication systems as indicated on plans.

B. Horizontal Pathway: Conform to TIA/EIA 569, using raceway as indicated on Drawings.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and sizes of pathways and outlets.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in installing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of project.

B/A#09100194 16700-1

1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Convene minimum two weeks prior to commencing work of this section.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with security, communications, and PA system installers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS

A. Material: Fire retardant Plywood.

B. Size: As indicated on Drawings, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install pathways in accordance with TIA/EIA 569.

B. Finish paint termination backboards with durable gray enamel in accordance with Section 09900 prior to installation of telephone equipment.

C. Install termination backboards plumb, and attach securely to building wall at each corner.

D. Install polyethylene pulling string in each empty telephone conduit over 10 feet (3 m) in length or containing bends.

E. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 16075. Mark backboards with legend "COMMUNICATIONS."

F. Ground and bond pathways, cable shields, and equipment in accordance with Section 16060.

G. Install bushings on all conduits.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services.

B. Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B/A#09100194 16700-2

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16700-3 SECTION 16710 COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Complete communications wiring system for Building #5; including telephone termination backboards, copper cross connects, fiber optic patch panel, optic fiber connectors, interior fiber backbone cable, copper modular patch panel, UTP wiring devices, interior copper backbone cable, interior copper horizontal cable, communications cabinets, labeling, audio and coaxial cables, connectors, and video distribution equipment.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding 2. Section 16130 – Raceway and Boxes. 3. Section 16133 - Cable Trays. 4. Section 16141 - Floor Boxes. 5. Section 16700 – Communication Raceways.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance: 1. TIA/EIA 568 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 2. TIA/EIA 569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

B. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Service Entrance Pathway: Raceway and tunnel to Building #5.

B. Backbone Pathway: Conform to TIA/EIA 569 using cable tray and conduit.

C. Horizontal Pathway: Conform to TIA/EIA 569, using cable tray and conduit.

D. Backbone Fiber Optic Cable: Between remote closets to the main closet.

E. Backbone Copper Cable: Between remote closets to the main closet.

F. Horizontal Copper Cable: Between wall outlets and closet patch panels.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Submittal procedures.

B/A#09100194 16710-1 B. Product Data: Submit catalog data for each termination device, cable, outlet device, and labels.

C. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified field testing and inspection.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations and sizes of pathways and outlets.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in installing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 60 miles of project.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.

B. Convene minimum two weeks prior to commencing work of this section.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish two of each type of data jack, faceplate, and patch panel.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with owner for any switchovers and shut-downs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS

A. Material: Fire retardant Plywood.

B. Size: Typically 8 x 8 feet, or as indicated on the drawings, 3/4 inch thick.

2.2 COPPER CROSS-CONNECT

A. Manufacturers: 1. Uniprise 2. ADC/Krone 3. Amp 4. Belden 5. Hubbell B/A#09100194 16710-2 6. Leviton 7. Ortronics 8. Panduit 9. Siemon 10. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Provide insulation displacement connector (IDC) type 110 Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of horizontal and backbone cables terminated on the block.

2.3 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL

A. Manufacturers: 1. Uniprise 2. ADC/Krone 3. Amp 4. Belden 5. Corning 6. Hubbell 7. Leviton 8. Ortronics 9. Panduit 10. Siemon 11. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Rack mounted optical fiber patch panel shall be constructed utilizing 18 gauge steel or 11 gauge aluminum. Panel shall be divided into two sections, distribution and user. Distribution section shall have strain relief, routing guides, splice tray and shall be lockable, user section shall have a cover for patch cord protection. Each panel shall provide pigtails and adapters. Provide adapters as LC with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves. Provide dust covers for adapters. Contractor shall match existing connectors field verify prior to ordering.

2.4 OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Uniprise 2. ADC/Krone 3. Amp 4. Belden 5. Corning 6. Hubbell 7. Leviton 8. Ortronics 9. Panduit 10. Siemon 11. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: B/A#09100194 16710-3 1. ST fiber optic connectors shall fully comply with the fiber optic connector performance requirements as specified in TIA/EIA 268B.3 and the intermateability requirements as specified by the TIA (604-6) FOCIS-6 standard. It shall be compatible with 62.5/125µm and 50/125µm, 3.0 mm jacketed or 900µm tight-buffered, multimode glass fiber. 2. The fibers shall terminate in 2.5mm ferrules with a non-optical disconnect and an insertion loss typically less than 0.35 dB per connector. 3. It shall be epoxy-type field termination. It shall incorporate pre-radiuses zirconia ceramic ferrules to ensure consistent end face geometry and high performance connector mating. The jack shall snap into all outlets and patch panels

2.5 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR FIBER BACKBONE CABLE

A. Manufacturers: 1. Uniprise 2. ADC/Krone 3. Amp 4. Belden 5. Berk-Tek 6. Corning 7. General Cable 8. Hubbell 9. Mohawk 10. Panduit 11. Siemon 12. Superior Essex 13. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Interlocking Armored MIC, 62.5/125 micrometers, dual window, multimode, dielectric, optical fiber non-plenum rated cable. Minimum LED bandwidth shall be 200 MHz-km for 850 nm and 500 MHz-km for 1300 nm.

2.6 COPPER MODULAR PATCH PANEL

A. Manufacturers: 1. Uniprise 2. ADC/Krone 3. Amp 4. Belden 5. CommScope 6. Hubbell 7. Leviton 8. Ortronics 9. Panduit 10. Siemon 11. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B/A#09100194 16710-4 B. Product Description: Rack mounted RJ45 category 6 compliant angled UNP610 patch panel with UNJ600-OR type terminations. Four-pair Category 6 UTP cabling shall be terminated onto a four-pair Category 6 module. The module termination to four-pair, 100 ohm solid unshielded twisted pair cable shall be accomplished by use of a forward motion termination cap and shall not require the use of a punch down or insertion tool.

C. Rack-mounted patch panels no larger than 24 ports each, or as shown on drawings.

2.7 UTP WIRING DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Uniprise 2. No Substitutions, match existing

B. Product Description: Modular Jacks 1. Communications outlets shall consist of one utility outlet box plate equipped with 8-pin modular (RJ-45) jack(s) and shall meet the connector requirements of TIA/EIA Category 6, standard. 2. The termination cap shall provide strain relief on the cable jacket, ensure cable twists are maintained to within ½ inch (12.7mm), and include a wiring scheme label. The wiring scheme label shall be available with UNP610 wiring schemes. 3. All terminations for this project shall use the T568B wiring scheme. The jacks shall terminate 4 pair 24 and 22 AWG 100 Ohm solid unshielded twisted pair cable. Category 6 modular jacks shall meet UL or ETL verified Category 6 performance. They shall be universal in design, accepting 2, 3, or 4 pair modular plugs without damage to the outer jack contacts. They shall be able to be re-terminated a minimum of 10 times. They shall snap into all outlets and patch panels. 4. The Category 6 outlets shall be capable of being installed at either a 45 degree or a 90 degree angle in any modular faceplate, frame, or surface- mounted box avoiding the need for special faceplates. 5. Provide orange modular jacks. The modular jacks shall also cross coordinate with the patch panel modular jacks.

C. Product Description: Faceplates 1. Provide sloped inserts in all faceplate frames and shall be removable from the front of the frame using a small standard screwdriver without the need to remove the faceplate frame. Each insert shall accept individual connector modules that can be individually inserted and removed as required. The shuttered inserts shall include a spring-loaded shutter that automatically closes when released. The sloped inserts shall provide a 45° downward slope to provide adequate bend radius and connector protection both in front and in the rear of the faceplate frame. 2. Provide blank module inserts for all unused module locations. Jack module arrangement is shown on the drawings. Provide color-coded

B/A#09100194 16710-5 inserts at each outlet, termination block and at patch panels as shown on the drawings. 3. Provide tamper resistant cover over faceplate for the entire first floor of the building. Cover shall include two tamper resistant screws, hinged design, impact resistant material, and have a sloped design.

2.8 INTERIOR COPPER UNSHIELDED BACKBONE CABLE

B. Product Description: Riser cable shall be Category 3 compliant, 24 gauge, and bare copper, with non-plenum insulation, with number of pairs as indicated on drawings.

2.9 INTERIOR COPPER UNSHIELDED HORIZONTAL CABLE

B. Product Description: Cables shall be Category 6 compliant, 4 pair, 24 gauge bare copper with non-plenum insulation. Cable shall be black in color.

B/A#09100194 16710-6 2.10 COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Atlas. 2. Bline. 3. Chatsworth. 4. Great Lakes Case and Cabinet. 5. Hoffman. 6. Hubbell. 7. Panduit. 8. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Floor Mounted Cabinet 1. Sized and quantity as indicated on plans and specified herein, metal construction, conforming to EIA standards with all parts and accessories as shown on plans, and additional fittings and components as required for a complete installation. a. 84” high, 24” wide, 36” deep enclosed cabinet, steel construction, Chatsworth 16141-702, or equal. b. 19” rack mounting rails with EIA pattern on both sides. c. Floor mounting hardware. d. Vertical cable management; 6 inches deep with protective edge guards, Chatsworth 16144-750 or equal. e. Horizontal cable management; Loop brackets with smooth cable entry slots, Chatsworth 30139-719. Rear horizontal cable management to suit contractor. f. Power strip: Eight outlets, grounding three prong plug, 20 amp resetable circuit breaker, with surge protection, and ON/OFF switch, Chatsworth 12816-707, or equal. g. Equipment shelf: low profile capable of supporting 200 lbs. h. Fan assembly kit with 940 cfm, mounted to top of cabinet, Chatsworth 16146-701, or equal. 2. Provide all hardware, cable management guides, rail mounts, rings, D- rings, loops, etc, and accessories for a complete installation.

C. Product Description: Wall Mounted Cabinet 1. Sized and quantity as indicated on plans and specified herein, metal construction, conforming to EIA standards with all parts and accessories as shown on plans, and additional fittings and components as required for a complete installation. 60” high, 24” wide, 20” deep enclosed cabinet, steel construction, B-Line #E2-WM-2H-602420, or equal. a. 19” rack mounting rails with EIA pattern on both sides. b. Wall mounting hardware. c. Vertical cable management; 5 inches deep with protective edge guards, Chatsworth 13485-772 or equal. d. Horizontal cable management; Loop brackets with smooth cable entry slots, Chatsworth 30139-719. Rear horizontal cable management to suit contractor.

B/A#09100194 16710-7 e. Power strip: Eight outlets, grounding three prong plug, 20 amp resetable circuit breaker, with surge protection, and ON/OFF switch, Chatsworth 12816-707, or equal. f. Equipment shelf: low profile capable of supporting 200 lbs. g. Fan assembly kit with 100 cfm and filter kit, mounted to top of cabinet, Chatsworth 12084-701 and 12805-701, or equal. 2. Provide all hardware, cable management guides, rail mounts, rings, D- rings, loops, etc, and accessories for a complete installation.

2.11 LABELING

A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady. 2. Panduit. 3. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: Smear-resistant typewritten, vinyl film, self-laminating labels

C. Data jacks shall be labeled by room number and then jack number. The numbering is to be verified with the owner.

D. Labeling scheme shall be submitted to the owner for approval prior to installation.

2.12 COAXIAL CABLES (ALTERNATE)

A. Manufacturers: 1. Comm/Scope 2. Belden 3. Berk-Tek 4. Trilogy 5. Comprehensive Video Group

B. Flexible RG11 75 ohm Coaxial Cable 1. Cable shall be constructed of a 14 AWG solid copper clad steel center conductor, gas expanded polyethylene dielectric, bonded foil, 60% braid, non-bonded tape, 40% braid, with an overall PVC jacket and be non- plenum rated. 2. Cable used as the basis of design is CommScope #F11SSV CMG.

2.13 AUDIO, VIDEO AND COAXIAL CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Amp 2. Blonder-Tongue 3. Gilbert 4. Hubbell 5. Jerrold Electronics

B/A#09100194 16710-8 6. Leviton 7. Neutrik 8. Ortronics 9. Panduit 10. RMS 11. Scientific-Atlanta 12. Siemen 13. Toner 14. Winegard Company 15. Additional manufacturers may be approved. Information must be submitted 10 days prior to bid date for approval, which will be listed in an addenda.

B. Connectors and Termination 1. Supply all necessary connectors as required on RG11 coaxial cable. 2. Supply all terminators as necessary, and as indicated on Drawings.

C. Splitters 1. Splitter(s) shall be Blonder-Tongue TLS or SXRS Series or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING WORK

A. Maintain existing fiber, exercise caution when working with and removing surrounding materials.

B. Notify owner immediately of any cable interruptions and reconnect and provide cable to reefed.

3.2 CORDINATION

A. Contractor will be responsible for coordinating the installation of a new cable television and phone service with the utility company. New service cable shall be routed in conduit into MDF.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Install pathways in accordance with TIA/EIA 569.

B. Install wire and cable in accordance with TIA/EIA 568.

C. Finish paint termination backboards with durable white enamel prior to installation of telephone equipment.

D. Install polyethylene pulling string in each empty telephone conduit over 10 feet in length or containing bends.

B/A#09100194 16710-9 E. Ground and bond pathways, cable shields, and equipment in accordance with Section 16060.

3.4 INSTALLATION – FIBER OPTIC CABLE

A. Install fiber optic cable in accordance with TIA/EIA 568.

B. All fiber optic splices shall be fusion type.

3.5 INSTALLATION – COMMUNICATION CABLE

A. Wiring above accessible ceilings shall be neatly installed on communication wiring hooks. Install cables in cable tray, through corridors as shown on drawings. Cables and wires shall not be laid on the ceiling tiles, ceiling tee bar grid structure, or supported directly on any member not specifically intended for cable raceway use. Provide cable supports at intervals not to exceed 5 feet.

B. Install proper grounding conductor between the copper protector assembly and the building grounding system.

C. The following clearances shall be adhered to: 1. Do not install cables within 4 feet of transformers or motors. 2. Do not install cables within 1 foot of parallel conduits used for power distribution. 3. Do not install cables running parallel within 1 foot of fluorescent lighting fixtures. 4. Provide 10 feet minimum service loop at cable tray for each terminated cable to accommodate future adds, moves, and changes. 5. Dress all cables in a neat work-man like manner in strict accordance with industry-wide standards. Contractor shall replace cables with excessive strain and tension applied to them at no additional cost at Owner's or Architect's discretion. 6. All communications cables entering and/or exiting Telecommunication Closets shall do so only through raceways.

D. Unshielded Twisted Pair Conductors 1. Install all UTP cables in accordance with Category 6 specifications including but not limited to the following: a. Ensure that the bend radius of the cable is no less than six (6) times the cable's diameter when permanently installed. b. All pairs of each Category 6 four (4) pair cable to be terminated by means of insulation displacement connections at station modular jack terminals and at patch panel terminals. c. Install cable per manufacturer's recommendation for pulling tension on the cable. d. Strip back only as much cable jacket as is necessary, and maintain the twists of the cable as close as possible to the termination at the station jack terminals and patch panel terminals. Untwisted pairs shall not exceed a distance of 1/2" from point of termination.

B/A#09100194 16710-10 e. All pairs of Category 6 cable shall not exceed 90m in length.

E. Fiber Optic Cable 1. Install all fiber optic in accordance with but not limited to the following: a. Ensure that the bend radius of the cable is no less than 20 times the cable's outside diameter during installation, and that the bend radius of the cable is no less than ten (10) times the cable's diameter when permanently installed. b. Terminate each optical fiber with a field installable ST-compatible connector, and mate connector to adapter at connector panel in optical fiber patch panel. c. Do not exceed manufacturer's maximum recommended pulling tension of the cable. d. Follow all the manufacturer's guidelines and industry standards on handling and installing the cable. e. Fiber termination shall be installed by a certified technician.

3.6 INSTALLATION – UTP WIRING DEVICES

A. Install faceplates with modular jacks as indicated on plans.

B. Mount flush plates so all four edges are in continuous contact with finished surfaces.

C. Install all devices per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

3.7 INSTALLATION – COMMUNICATIONS CROSS CONNECT EQUIPMENT

A. Install all patch panels in equipment cabinet, as shown on drawings.

B. Install all equipment per manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Install all cross connect equipment on telephone plywood backboard in a neat, organized, and workmanlike manner in strict accordance to industry-wide standards.

3.8 INSTALLATION – OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTORS

A. Install connectors per manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards.

B. Installation shall be performed by a certified technician.

3.9 INSTALLATION – COMMUNICATION CABINETS

A. Securely support all cables with appropriate cable management equipment to relieve excessive strain and tension on the cables and to dress the cables in a neat, workmanlike manner in strict accordance to industry-wide standards.

B. Vacuum clean cabinets upon completion of installation.

B/A#09100194 16710-11 C. Permanently fasten cabinets to floor or wall.

D. Bond all communication cabinet sections together using a metal bonding strap. The strap shall be attached to the racks with bolts through holes drilled in the rack section. Compression lugs with exothermic welds shall be used. Remove any paint down to bare metal at the point where the rack will be interconnected. Bond the rack assemblies to the Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) or Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB).

E. Install all components per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

F. Provide a ½ size scale drawing showing the location of all voice, video, and data outlets and their designated label. Drawing shall also show location of video taps and cable tray route. Drawing shall be both on hard copy and on compact disc, one drawing for each floor shall be attached to wall in each Telecommunication closet.

3.10 INSTALLATION – LABELS

A. Labels shall be permanently fixed to each end of each installed and terminated cable.

B. Labels shall be permanently fixed to each data faceplate.

C. Contractor shall submit samples prior to installation for approval.

3.11 TESTING – COMMUNICATION CABLES

A. Unshielded Twisted Pair Conductors 1. The Category 6 cable runs shall be tested for conformance to the specifications of EIA/TIA 568A Category 6. Testing shall be done with an EIA/TIA-67UL certified level 2 test set. 2. After terminations are complete, the Contractor shall test for shorts, opens, crosses, splits, and reverse polarity on all new cables installed cables. 3. Contractor shall guarantee 100% good pairs on all new cables. 4. Contractor shall perform all necessary repairs and adjustments, and replace all faulty and/or damaged cables at no additional cost. 5. Contractor shall record and tabulate results of readings from tests and submit copy of certified results to Owner and Architect. 6. Test data shall be supplied to owner on portable format from tester, compact disc. Every master reel shall be tested for attenuation, next, power sum crosstalk, impedance and RL. This test shall be performed using a sweep test method and include frequencies from .772 MHZ to 350 MHZ.

B. Fiber Optic Cable 1. End-to-End Attenuation Test a. Perform end-to-end attenuation test on all fibers to measure the total optical power loss between cable termination points.

B/A#09100194 16710-12 b. Measure the end-to-end attenuation of the multi-mode fibers at wavelengths of 850 nm and 1300 nm. c. Utilize a stabilized light source and optical meter, and follow test procedure which complies with EIA/TIA-526-14 Method B: Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode/Single mode Fiber Cable Plant. d. Measure the attenuation of the fiber optic system in both directions at both wavelengths and document results. e. Contractor shall perform all necessary repairs and adjustments, and replace all faulty and/or damaged cables and/or faulty splices at no additional cost. Maximum splice insertion loss shall not exceed 0.3 db per splice. f. Contractor shall record and tabulate results of readings from tests, and submit copy of certified results to Owner and Architect. g. Documentation shall be provided in both hard copy bound and on compact disc.

3.12 EXTENDED WARRANTY – COMMUNICATION CABLES

A. Provide owner with manufacturers 25 year warranty. 1. Provide a complete system warranty to guarantee end-to-end high performance cabling systems that meet application requirements. The guarantee shall include cable and connectivity components and have one point of contact for all cabling system issues. The system shall be warranted for a period of at least 25 years. 2. A factory-registered contractor shall complete network installation. The contractor shall have completed standards based product and installation training.

3.13 WARRANTY – COMMUNICATION CABINETS

A. Installation shall have a one year warranty on all labor and materials for a period of one year from acceptance.

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Inspect and test copper cables and terminations in accordance with TIA/EIA 568.

END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16710-13

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

B/A#09100194 16710-14 SECTION 16720 INTEGRATED SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes intrusion detection devices, alarm control panels, card readers, interior and exterior cameras, accessories, and wiring.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. 2. Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding. 3. Section 16075 - Identification. 4. Section 16123 - Building Wire and Cable. 5. Section 16710 – Communication Circuits.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Intrusion Detection System: Protect building and selected areas from intrusion.

B. Video Surveillance Description: Video surveillance, monitoring, and recording interior and exterior points as indicated on Drawings.

C. Security Access System Description: Control access to building and interior and exterior selected doors using encoded cards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system wiring diagram showing each device and wiring connection; indicate annunciator layout, and sequence of operation.

C. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B/A #09100194 16720-1 B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of intrusion detection equipment.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s standard operating and maintenance instructions.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Maintenance service.

B. Furnish service and maintenance of entire security system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOFTWARE

A. Manufacturers 1. General Electric 2. Lenel 3. Others: Approved 4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Provide all ISMS access control hardware and software as standard catalog product offering of a single manufacturer.

C. Servers, workstations, and related computing peripherals will be provided by the owner. Contractor will load all software

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Architecture: 1. The ISMS shall be a Microsoft Windows based client/server application capable of integrating multiple security functions including management, control, and monitoring of access control, alarms, photo ID credentialing,

B/A #09100194 16720-2 interfacing with video surveillance, other security subsystems and business database applications. 2. The ISMS shall be a true 32bit multi-threaded application, designed for Microsoft Windows technology platforms; with multi-user and multi- tasking capability, developed in a high level “C” language. 3. The ISMS shall use a commercially available standard database that is SQL and ODBC compliant, certified for the Microsoft Windows platform. 4. The ISMS shall support user definable record-level database partitioning, for defining limited views of the ISMS database. 5. The ISMS database shall support open direct database connectivity for importing cardholder and card ID data from external systems and/or database applications. The ISMS shall facilitate interfacing by providing the following capabilities: a. Real time and batch processing of data via ODBC, JDBC or OLE DB over a network connection. b. Insert, update, and delete record information. c. Automatic download of data to ISMS control panels based on database changes. d. Provide audit trail in the operator history/archive database for all database changes initiated by the interface. 6. The ISMS be capable of operating in a Microsoft SQL Server Cluster environment where the ISMS application server(s) support a shared database cluster. Cluster management shall be provided by industry standard Microsoft clustering services and should not require any proprietary clustering software. 7. It shall be possible to separate the ISMS database from the ISMS application including deployment of the database and application in separate geographical locations and communicating over standard network infrastructure to provide maximum flexibility and conformance to IT data center standards. 8. The ISMS shall be capable of supporting database and file replication using Microsoft SQL Server Replication Services and Microsoft File Replication Services for providing distributed database replication across multiple ISMS application servers allowing for system expansion and delivering N tiers of server redundancy. Database and file replication shall not require any proprietary database or file replication software. 9. The ISMS shall conform to the standard TCP/IP networking communications protocol between the application server(s), client workstations, control panels, video surveillance system(s) and database subsystems, using 10/100MbEthernet connectivity over LAN/WAN network typologies. 10. The ISMS shall be flexible and scalable in architecture, permitting expansion of both capacity and functionality, to be implemented

B/A #09100194 16720-3 progressively as needed, through software licensing and/or software upgrades. 11. The ISMS shall provide the ability to perform network deployed software updates. Network deployed updates shall have the option to be deployed manually or automatically. 12. The ISMS shall provide a real-time display of all system status and data at all operator workstations. 13. The ISMS shall monitor status and record activity transactions of all secured areas and alarm input/output points; visually and audibly annunciate alarms upon change of status, for assessment and response at all operator workstations. 14. The ISMS shall monitor and record card access, alarm, and operator activity to an online history/archive database for reporting. 15. The ISMS shall employ distributed processing technology, allowing the host to function almost entirely as an application/database server. The majority of the real time, day-to-day decisions shall be made locally by intelligent control panels. The control panels shall be the direct field interface for all access control, alarm sensing, and input/output-controlled devices. 16. Each control panel shall be able to continue access control and alarm- monitoring operations autonomously, in the event of ISMS hosting failure or network segment outage. 17. The ISMS shall manage and automatically download in real-time, all database changes made at all operator workstations, to the control panels that require notification of the specific database changes or updates.

B. System Redundancy and High Availability: The ISMS shall provide multiple levels of communications redundancy and failover for all ISMS hosted controllers, digital video recorders, API service connections, and client workstations. The ISMS shall be capable of automatically re-routing communications to alternate ISMS computers across the system without operator intervention. 1. ISMS system configurations with a single application/ database server shall provide at a minimum the following redundancy and failover capability: a. The ISMS shall provide communications redundancy and failover for network-attached devices. Each network attached device (Control Panels, Digital Video Recorders, and API service connections) shall have one or more alternative communication sever(s) that can provide hosting in case of primary communications server failure. b. In case of primary communications server failure, they system shall automatically re-route network-attached devices to their designated backup communications servers to allow continuous

B/A #09100194 16720-4 system operations without loss of alarm and event transaction processing during failover. c. Network-attached devices which transition to backup communications servers, shall be able to be redirected back to their default primary servers, once the primary communications servers have been restored. 2. ISMS system configurations with multiple regional application/ database servers shall provide at a minimum the following redundancy and failover capability: a. The ISM shall support the same level of communications redundancy and failover for network-attached devices per regional application/database server, allowable to span across regional application/database servers in the event of a regional application/database server failure. b. In case of a regional application/database server failure, client workstations shall be able to failover to their designated backup regional application/database server to allow continuous system operations. c. In case of a regional application/database server failure, upon server restoration, the ISMS shall automatically update and synchronize the regional application/database server. d. Client workstations which transition to a backup regional application/database server, shall be able to be redirected back to their default regional application/database server, once the regional application/database server functions have been restored.

C. System Capacity: Provide total system capacity to accommodate the following: 1. Application/Database Servers: Must be capable of supporting a Single application/database server upgradeable to a multi-server configuration with up to 64 synchronized application/database servers operating as a single unified system. 2. Workstations: Must be capable of supporting a minimum of 5 concurrent operator workstation sessions per server upgradeable to 50 concurrent operator workstation sessions per server. 3. Cardholder Database: Must be capable of supporting a minimum of 25,000 access control cards upgradeable to 500,000. Multiple access control cards assignable per cardholder, each tracked separately. Access control cards shall be unique 4 to 16-digit numbers without facility code dependency. 4. Control Panels: Must be capable of supporting a minimum of 64 per server upgradeable to 1,024 per server 5. Access Control Readers: Must be capable of supporting a minimum of 256 readers per server upgradeable to 4,096 readers per server.

B/A #09100194 16720-5 6. General Purpose Alarm Inputs: Must be capable of supporting a minimum of 2,560 alarm input points per server upgradeable to 20,048 per server. 7. General Purpose Outputs: Must be capable of supporting a minimum of 2,048 relayed or TTL level output points per server upgradeable to 16,384 per server. 8. Time Schedules: Unlimited definable in system database, up to 1,024 concurrently active per control panel. 9. Access Rights: Unlimited definable in system database, up to 96 concurrently active per access card per control panel. 10. Transactions: Centralized on-line storage of historical transactions, a minimum of 1,000,000 events 11. Digital Video Recorders: Must be capable of supporting a minimum of 16 per server upgradeable to 256 per server 12. Video Surveillance Cameras: Must be capable of supporting a minimum of 256 per server upgradeable to 4,096 per server.

D. Operator Interface: 1. The ISMS shall use a single Windows based client application interface for system configuration, administration, management, and monitoring operations. 2. The ISMS shall provide a mouse-driven, Windows based, graphical user interface allowing operator(s) to open and work on multiple windows simultaneously, at host server and client workstation(s) with minimal degradation to system performance. 3. The ISMS shall provide on-line context sensitive help files to facilitate operators in the configuration and operation of the ISMS. Standard Windows help commands for Contents, Search, Back, and Print shall be supported. 4. The ISMS shall implement National Language Support (NLS) in a manner that allows simultaneous multi-lingual operation, based on individual operator language preference. The graphical user interface and on-line help shall support English. 5. The ISMS shall support defining an unlimited number of operators; application access via workstation(s) shall be restricted by operator login and password. Operator passwords shall be stored in the database in an encrypted manner. The ISMS shall provide that ability to setup password rules for password length and expiration periods for system operators. Operator profiles shall be configurable to include form level permissions, database partition views, and language preference. 6. The ISMS shall allow operator authentication through an Active Directory Server, bypassing ISMS storing passwords. Operator access with the ISMS shall continue to be defined within the ISMS configuration forms. 7. The ISMS shall support the use of thin client application deployment to provide remote access to the Operator Interface. Thin client application

B/A #09100194 16720-6 support shall be via standard Microsoft Terminal Services, Citrix MetaFrameXP and Microsoft Virtual Terminal Services using a standard web browser

E. Cardholder Management: 1. The ISMS shall provide an operator interface for enrollment, modification, and deletion of cardholder’s personnel and access control information. The ISMS shall allow enrollment of cardholder’s personnel and access control information in advance, without requiring assignment of access control card(s). The ISMS shall provide the ability to select multiple cardholders and badge records in applying mass changes. The cardholder’s personnel and access information shall include the following data: a. First Name. b. Middle Name 1. c. Middle Name 2. d. Last Name. e. Employee Number. f. Personnel Type (Selectable from a user defined list that shall include at a minimum; Permanent, Temporary, Contractor, and Visitor classifications). g. Department (Selectable from a user defined list). h. Facility (Selectable from a user defined list of database partitioned views). i. Trace Activity (Enable/Disable). j. Address 1 (User definable label). k. Address 2 (User definable label). l. Address 3 (User definable label). m. Address 4 (User definable label). n. Address 5 (User definable label). o. Telephone. p. 90 User Fields (User definable labels). q. Access Right(s) (Multiple assignments). r. Access Card(s) (Multiple assignments).

F. Card ID Management: 1. The ISMS shall provide an operator interface for enrollment, modification, and deletion of access control card ID information in advance, without requiring assignment to a cardholder and shall include the following data: a. Description. b. Card ID number (4 to 16 digit, unique access control identifier). c. Pin Number (4 digit number for authenticating cardholder in card & keypad reader applications). d. Status (Issuable, Active, Lost, Suspended, Remake). e. Assigned Cardholder (Selectable from predefined list of cardholders).

B/A #09100194 16720-7 f. Issue Date (Required to support advanced date issuance with automatic activation of access control card ID numbers at control panel level in real-time without ISMS host notification). g. Return Date. h. Expire Date (Required to support out to year 2099 and automatically expire access control card ID numbers at control panel level in real-time without ISMS host notification).

G. Access Control Management: 1. The ISMS shall allow or deny access to secured areas, arm and disarm intrusion zones, and provide output control via access control readers, based on validation of a cardholder’s assigned access rights. 2. The ISMS shall support defining an unlimited number of access rights in a manner that associates reader(s) with a specific time schedule. The time schedule shall define the specific time(s) of day and day(s) of the week for which access will be granted for the associated reader(s) and/or controlled output(s). 3. The ISMS shall allow cardholders to be assigned multiple access rights and multiple access control cards, without requiring duplicate database entry of cardholder personnel information. 4. Any and all access control cards assigned to a cardholder, shall automatically inherit all of the access rights assigned to the cardholder. 5. The ISMS shall monitor all secured areas and process an alarm notification whenever a reader controlled door is opened, unless door is opened pursuant to a valid card read, exit request through egress device, or door has been manually unlocked via remote command from an authorized system operator. 6. The ISMS shall be user configurable to operate in either global or local mode, controlling IN and OUT access of secured areas for anti-passback and time & attendance applications.

H. Time Schedule and Mode Management: The ISMS database shall support defining an unlimited number of schedules. Schedules shall define time, day, and date intervals for automatically executing ISMS functions, events, and mode changes. 1. Time schedules: Shall define start and stop interval(s) by time of day and day of week or mode. Each time schedule shall support multiple intervals per day and multiple days per week. Time schedules shall be applicable to the following ISMS functions: a. Cardholder access rights to secured areas. b. Readers online/offline. c. Doors lock/unlock. d. Alarm monitoring on/off. e. Inputs enabled/disabled. f. Outputs on/off.

B/A #09100194 16720-8 g. Transaction routing for alarm and card activity. 2. Event Schedules: Shall define specific time(s) for an event to occur by time of day and day of week or mode. Each event schedule shall support multiple events per day and multiple days per week. Event schedules shall be applicable to the following ISMS functions: a. Changing reader modes of operation between card only, card-plus- keypad, and card or keypad. b. Changing alarm monitoring sense times. c. Resetting anti-passback and/or time and attendance IN/OUT status of all cardholders in control panel databases. d. Initiating a scheduled dial from host to communicate to remote dial-up control panels. 3. Mode Schedules: Shall define specific times and dates for indicating to system control panels which time and event scheduled functions to execute. a. A minimum of 4 distinct mode classifications will be supported for categorizing time and event scheduled functions. Mode classifications shall include Normal and 3 user definable modes such as holiday, evacuation, lock-down, or others. b. Mode changes can either be scheduled to occur at a specific date and time or manually changed by an operator.

I. Reader / Door Control: 1. The ISMS shall allow access control readers to be individually configured for different applications and modes of operation and shall support the following: a. Physical Reader Type: Each reader’s physical mode of operation shall allow to be manually changed by an operator, or automatically via a system event schedule, for increasing or decreasing the level of security required for accessing secured areas at any time. 1) Card Only. 2) Card-plus-keypad. 3) Card or Keypad. b. Logical Reader Type: Each reader’s logical mode of operation shall be configurable to support the following: 1) Normal. 2) Anti-passback IN, configurable to operate in enforced or passive mode. 3) Anti-passback OUT, configurable to operate in enforced or passive mode. 4) Time & Attendance IN, configurable to operate in enforced or passive mode.

B/A #09100194 16720-9 5) Time & Attendance OUT, configurable to operate in enforced or passive mode. 6) IN Required, configurable to operate in enforced or passive mode. 7) Elevator Control. c. Maximum unlock time after a valid card read shall be configurable from 0 to 59 minutes and 59 seconds. d. Alarm sense time for allowing a door to remain open after a valid card read, before reporting a door held open alarm, shall be configurable from 0 to 61minutes and 59 seconds. e. Extended unlock /alarm sense time after a valid card read shall be configurable from 0 to 59 minutes and 59 seconds, for cardholders requiring extended unlock duration times as in ADA applications. Cardholders and individual credentials for cardholders shall be configurable to initiate Extended unlock/sense functionality on doors configured to do so. f. “Toggle” Card Reader: In addition to normal time duration control, the system shall support configuring readers to switch between on /unlock and off/locked with each valid card read. g. Door relock after a valid card read shall be configurable to support the following: 1) Lock on duration. 2) Lock on open. 3) Lock on close. h. Reader / Door State: 1) Each reader shall support operating in a default on-line or off-line state, allowing to be manually changed by an operator, or automatically under a time of day and day of week schedule. 2) Each door shall support operating in a default locked or unlocked state, allowing to be automatically changed under a time of day and day of week schedule. 3) Each door, when scheduled to automatically unlock, shall be individually configurable to additionally require a valid card transaction to occur first before automatically executing the door unlock schedule. 4) Each door shall be individually configurable to monitor aperture of the door after a valid access grant, validating actual passage of the cardholder for accurately managing individual card IN & OUT status. i. Reader Transaction Routing: 1) Transactions for valid, invalid, and lost cards from each reader shall be independently configured for default routing

B/A #09100194 16720-10 to history/archive, system printer, and/or all operator workstations. 2) Valid card transaction from each reader shall be independently configured to support routing under time of day and day of week schedule to history, system printer, and/or all operator workstations.

J. Input/Output Control 1. The ISMS shall allow control panel input and output points to be individually defined, configured, and controlled in the following manner: a. Input point(s) shall be user configurable for specific applications. The following application types shall be supported: 1) Alarm: digital input used to trigger an alarm and any selected output. 2) Digital Output:: digital input used to trigger a selected input without alarm notification. 3) Inactive: digital input is disabled. b. Input point(s) shall support a user configurable sense time from 0 to 59 minutes and 59 seconds. Sense time changes shall be supported via event schedules. c. Input point(s) shall allow the active state to be configured as open or closed. d. Input point(s) shall be user configurable to control a primary and/or secondary output. Input point(s) configured for output control shall allow being enabled or disabled via time schedule. 1) The primary output shall be configurable to follow the input point’s state change or activate for it’s defined output duration. 2) The secondary output(s) shall be configurable to follow the input point’s state change or remain activated until manually reset or scheduled off. e. Output point(s) shall support a user configurable duration time from 0 to 61 minutes and 59 seconds. f. Output point(s) shall allow the active state to be configured as on or off. g. Output point(s) shall be automatically controlled via time schedule to turn on or off. h. Output points shall allow grouping to facilitate activating multiple output points, on or off, via time schedule. i. Output point(s), including reader controlled doors, shall allow manual control by authorized operators in the following manner: 1) Activate/unlock for duration. 2) Activate/unlock indefinitely. 3) Deactivate/Lock.

B/A #09100194 16720-11 4) Schedule override. 5) Text entry explaining reason for manual operator control shall be recorded in operator history/archive database.

K. Intrusion Zone Control: 1. The ISMS shall provide the ability to define local intrusion zones that consist of a. One or more access control readers b. One or more alarm inputs c. An input point to designate for arming and disarming d. An output point to designate for arming and disarming 2. The ISMS shall provide the ability to arm or disarm intrusion zones by a. Access control reader, using card and keypad b. Digital Input state change c. Manual Operator control 3. The ISMS shall provide the ability to arm or disarm intrusion zones from outside the protected area. a. Readers assigned to an armed intrusion zone shall deny access to card holders unless the intrusion zone is disarmed. b. Readers assigned to an intrusion zone shall flash LED indicators on the reader to annunciate the intrusion zone status. c. Cards shall be authorized as to which intrusion zones they can arm and disarm. d. Users of the system will enter keypad information to tell the system to arm or disarm and then they will present their card e. If the user is authorized to arm zone, and they have an active access right for the reader, then the intrusion zone shall be armed and any readers associated with the intrusion zone (other than the arm/disarm reader) shall be placed offline, any inputs associated with the intrusion zone shall be monitored on. An output shall be able to be generated based on the arm event. A history record shall be generated for this event. f. A configurable time delay before arming a zone shall exist allowing the user to leave the monitored area before the zone is armed. g. If the user is authorized to disarm the intrusion zone, and they have an active access right for the reader, then the intrusion zone shall be disarmed and all readers associated with the intrusion zone will return to normal operation, any inputs associated with the intrusion zone shall be monitored off. An output shall be able to be generated based on the disarm event. A history record shall be generated for this event.

B/A #09100194 16720-12 h. If the user is not authorized to disarm the intrusion zone, but the user has an active access right for the reader, then access will be denied, and a history record shall be generated. 4. The ISMS shall provide the ability to arm or disarm intrusion zones by manual control a. A properly permissioned operator shall be able to manually arm or disarm an intrusion zone 1) Intrusion zones shall be partitioned to limit restrict which operator can view which intrusion zones.

L. Alarm Management 1. The ISMS shall allow alarms to be individually defined, configured, and controlled in the following manner: a. Configure if monitoring of the alarm is enabled or disabled. An alarm shall allow monitoring to be controlled manually by an authorized operator and automatically via time schedule. b. Alarm(s) shall be user configurable to trigger primary and/or secondary output(s). 1) The primary output shall be configurable to follow the alarm’s state change or activate for it’s defined output duration. 2) The secondary output shall be configurable to follow the alarm’s state change or remain activated until manually reset or scheduled off. c. Alarms shall allow grouping to facilitate monitoring multiple alarms, on or off, via time schedule and changing alarm sense times via event schedules. d. Alarms shall support regrouping via event schedules, allowing alarms to be reassigned to different alarm groups. e. Configure if the alarm shall be routed to the history/archive database and/or printed on a host/server alarm printer. f. Alarms shall be able to be routed to specific workstations on specific time schedules. If an alarm is not responded to within a definable time period, it shall be able to be bumped to another workstation for acknowledgement. g. User-definable instructions shall be assignable to each alarm, required to display in the alarm monitor window at all operator workstations for alarm assessment and response. h. Configure if operator acknowledgement of the alarm is required before the alarm can be cleared from the alarm monitor window from any operator workstation. i. 20 priority levels for prioritizing the processing and display of alarms.

B/A #09100194 16720-13 j. Configure and assign different foreground and background colors for the alarm text from a palette of 256 different colors, based on the alarm priority and state (Alarm, Reset, Bumped Alarm, Bumped Reset). k. E-mail Alarm Notification: The ISMS shall be capable of providing Alarm notification to email address(s) or devices using a SMTP messaging protocol.

M. System Monitoring: The ISMS shall provide multiple monitoring application windows dedicated for displaying real-time information of ISMS card access and alarm activity as well as control panel and operator workstation status. 1. Activity Monitor: shall display card access and non-alarm event activity from all ISMS readers and relevant security devices that are on-line, active, and configured to route to monitor. The monitor window shall provide operator controls to clear, pause, and resume scrolling display of activity transactions. The following system activity transaction information shall be displayed: a. Transaction date & time b. Access Control Transaction types: 1) Valid (Access granted). 2) Valid Open (Access granted with door aperture confirmation). 3) Valid No Passage (Access granted with no door aperture detected). 4) Invalid (Access not granted). 5) Invalid Pin (Access not granted). 6) Max Invalid PIN (Access not granted, card suspended). 7) Suspended Card (Access not granted). 8) Lost Card (Access not granted). 9) Unknown Card (Access Not Granted). 10) Duress Valid. 11) Duress Invalid. 12) Duress Valid Open. 13) Duress Valid No passage. 14) Anti-Passback IN Invalid. 15) Anti-Passback OUT Invalid. 16) Time & Attendance IN Invalid. 17) Time & Attendance OUT Invalid. 18) Floor selection for elevator control. 19) Valid floor. 20) Invalid floor. c. Cardholder name. d. Card ID number for unknown or unassigned cards. e. Intrusion Zone Area Transaction Types:

B/A #09100194 16720-14 1) Zone Armed. 2) Zone Disarmed. 3) Arm/Disarm Failed, Zone Not Secure. 4) Arm/Disarm Failed, Invalid Access Right. 5) Arm/Disarm Failed, Not in Zone. f. Guard Tour transaction Types: 1) Tour Started. 2) Tour Ended. 3) Tour Activity Valid. 4) Tour Activity Invalid. 5) Tour Paused. 6) Tour Resumed. g. Source device location description & reference. h. The ISMS shall allow direct navigation from any event within the Activity Monitor to its related call-up of live and recorded video playback. 2. Alarm Activity Monitor: shall display alarm activity for all ISMS alarms configured or scheduled as monitored. The alarm activity monitor shall provide alarm notification and interaction for alarm assessment including acknowledgement and response. All operator acknowledgements and responses shall be recorded in the operator and alarm history/archive database. The following alarm activity information shall be displayed: a. Priority. b. Description. c. Reference type or additional alarm information. d. Alarm state: 1) Alarm. 2) Reset. 3) Cut (Tamper supervision). 4) Short (Tamper supervision). e. Process state: 1) Acknowledged. 2) Unacknowledged. f. Occurrence Count. g. Host date and time. h. Control panel date and time. i. Predefined alarm instructions for operator assessment. j. Entry for operator alarm response in free form text and from pick list of predefined alarm responses. k. Acknowledgement button. l. Alarm notification shall be provided via pop-up dialogue notifying the operator of the occurrence of a new alarm. Direct navigation from the notification dialogue to the Alarm Activity Monitor shall be provided.

B/A #09100194 16720-15 m. The ISMS shall allow direct navigation from any alarm within the Alarm Activity Monitor to its related call-up of live and recorded video playback as well graphics map location. 3. Control Panel Monitor: shall provide real-time communications status and connectivity control of all ISMS control panels. The control panel monitor shall support and provide the following: a. Display control panel properties, firmware version, and communications status. b. The ability to remotely reset, configure online/offline, force database downloads, and update control panel firmware. 4. Client Workstation Monitor: shall provide real-time communications status and connectivity control of all ISMS servers and client workstations. 5. Alarm Graphics Monitor: The system shall provide graphical map creation, editing, and real-time monitoring software for command & control visualization of ISMS alarms and device states via user configurable multi-state device symbols or icons. a. The following ISMS components shall be represented on graphics maps for monitoring and control: area/zones, cameras, client workstations, controllers, digital inputs, digital outputs, digital video recorders, reader, control points, and command groups. b. The ISMS shall allow a group of same or different devices to be represented by a single icon as a control point, such that the group is treated as a single object for alarm status purposes. c. The ISMS shall allow multiples of the same device type for the purpose of executing a single command on all the devices in the command group. Each command group icon can be defined as all devices of that type on the map, all devices of that type in a facility, or a user-defined set of devices. d. The ISMS shall provide a series of default icons and user definable custom icons in JPG, GIF, animated GIF, and PNG file formats. Variable sizes shall be supported in 16x16, 24x24, and 32x32 pixels. e. The ISMS shall support two icon techniques for alarm visualization: an overlay technique showing the state of the highest priority alarm on a device, and a decoration technique for displaying multiple alarms simultaneously for a device. f. The ISMS shall support creation and importing of images in JPG, GIF, or PNG file formats imported as a single layer base map. g. The ISMS shall support importing of multi-layer AutoCAD DXF R12 files, allow selected layers to be imported, and shall maintain layer separation within the system. The ISMS shall permit the re- import of a DXF file or individual layers from the file, without disturbing the other layers and icons previously placed on the map.

B/A #09100194 16720-16 h. The ISMS shall provide the ability to define map layers that can be dynamically turned on or off while editing and viewing during monitoring operations. i. The ISMS shall list maps alphabetically by facility in a navigation pane for easy access and additionally provide hyperlink icons that allow an operator to navigate and traverse through a series of maps quickly. j. The ISMS shall allow a default map defined per operator, such that the map automatically displays when the alarm graphics monitor window is launched. The user shall be able to size the alarm graphics monitor window as desired, maps, graphics symbols and icons shall maintain aspect ratios. k. The user shall be able to zoom in to the map using a mouse wheel or right mouse click on a background point on the map. l. The user shall be able to determine the state of each device by the icon’s appearance, which shall change dynamically as alarms are set, reset, and cleared. m. The user shall have right mouse button click access to the Alarm and Response Monitor from any symbol icon in an alarm state. n. The user shall be able to initiate device control commands from a map using right mouse button click access of selected symbol icons. The control commands shall be device-type dependent and include the following: 1) Area/Zone – arm and disarm. 2) Cameras – launch live video. 3) Inputs – monitor on and off. 4) Outputs – activate on and off. 5) Reader/Doors – lock and unlock.

N. Database Reporting: The ISMS shall provide on-line database reporting without degrading system performance. The following reporting functions and capabilities shall be supported: 1. Predefined reports with the ability to create and save user definable templates for grouping, sorting, and filtering data. A minimum number of predefined reports shall be furnished covering the following topics: a. Cardholder and card ID information. b. System administration and device configurations. c. System schedules and events. d. Reader access. e. Floor access. f. Roll call / Muster. g. Time and attendance. h. Alarm history. i. Badge history.

B/A #09100194 16720-17 j. Operator history. 2. Reports shall allow operators to perform page setup, preview report online, print, and export reports to multiple file formats and destinations. a. Export file formats supported shall include: 1) Crystal Reports. 2) Data Interchange Format. 3) Excel. 4) HTML. 5) Lotus. 6) ODBC. 7) Paginated Text. 8) Report Definition. 9) Rich Text Format. 10) Tab Delimited Text. 11) Unformatted Text. 12) Word. b. Export destinations supported shall include: 1) Disk File. 2) Exchange Folder. 3) Lotus Domino Database. 4) Microsoft Mail (MAPI). 3. The ISMS shall support direct database connectivity for facilitating report generation from external 3rd party database applications. The following applications shall be supported: a. Microsoft SQL Server. b. Microsoft Access. c. Crystal Reports Enterprise.

O. Integrated Video Surveillance: The ISMS shall support software level integration with video surveillance systems for facilitating real-time response to monitored events processed by the ISMS.

P. Application Program Interface: The ISMS shall support an application program interface (API), which allows authorized software connections between the ISMS and external systems for developing custom interfaces and providing tightly coupled integrated solutions. The API for the ISMS shall facilitate real-time response to monitored events processed by the ISMS as well as control of devices managed by the ISMS. 1. The ISMS shall only allow authorized connections through the API. 2. The ISMS shall allow up to twenty-five (25) concurrent connections to external systems through the API. 3. The API shall expose the following aspects of the ISMS: a. Bi-directional alarm event processing for monitoring and acknowledgement b. Receiving ISMS card access activity events

B/A #09100194 16720-18 c. Receiving digital input events d. Receiving intrusion zone events e. Control of operator logins f. Control of alarm point monitoring On/Off g. Control of digital input points Enable/Disable h. Control of digital output points Open/Close i. Control of intrusion zones Arm/Disarm j. Control of control panel Modes 4. The API shall be fully documented and made available with sample application code.

2.3 CONTROL PANEL

A. The control panels shall be intelligent and fully stand-alone processor capable, making all local access control and alarm monitoring decisions without host server dependency. Control panels shall support and provide the following: 1. UL listed under UL 294 and UL 1076; FCC Part 15 and CE compliant. 2. Direct on-board support for industry standard RS232, RS422, Dial-up modem AT command set, and 10/100Mb Ethernet communications interfaces to ISMS host. 3. The 10/100Mb Ethernet NIC shall be onboard and support IT standard methods of communications with ISMS host including configuration support for static IP addressing, dynamic DNS, DHCP and DES encryption. PCMCIA Adapters or external terminal server devices will not be acceptable. 4. Support redundant communications to ISMS host; primary communications via 10/100Mb Ethernet with automatic switchover to secondary communications via dial-up modem when detecting network failure. 5. RS232 and RS422 communications ports for cascading/clustering multiple control panels via a single communications port interface to ISMS host. 6. Flash able memory support for facilitating remote firmware updates from ISMS host server and operator workstations; control panels shall remain on-line and operational during firmware update process. 7. The control panel shall be able to be configured & diagnosed remotely through a standard browser interface, independently of the ISMS host application. 8. The control panel shall support local database retention in the event of power failure, without the use of batteries that have to be replaced. Minimum retention without primary power source shall be 20 days. When primary power is restored, the control panel shall automatically attempt to establish communications with the ISMS host, in the event communications to ISMS host is not available, the control panel shall automatically return to operation with its last local database configuration.

B/A #09100194 16720-19 9. Control panel cabinets shall be an industrial grade enclosure with knockouts outs for field wiring and have a key-locked and tamper protected door. 10. Low voltage power supply with uninterruptible battery backup allowing continued operations for a minimum of 4 hours at full load

2.4 CARD READER - STAND ALONE ACCESS CONTROL NETWORK DOOR CONTROLLERS

A. Manufacturers 1. HID Edge Reader Solo 2. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Provide stand alone network door controller(s) as shown on the project plans. The network door controller shall provide access control processing, web-based user interface and power for a single door, including reader, lock, door status, request-to-exit device and auxiliary sounder.

C. The stand alone network controller/reader shall be of single piece design with integrated card reader as follows: 1. iCLASS 13.56 MHz contactless smart card reader. a. The reader shall encrypt all RF data transmission between the smart card and reader using industry standard encryption techniques and advanced key management. b. The reader shall be compatible with ISO 15693 – read only; 2k bit (256 Byte), 16k bit (2k Byte) and 32k bit (4k Byte); ISO 14443A – read only; MIFARE and DESFire (serial number). ISO 14443B – read only; 2k bit (256 Byte) and 16k bit (2K Byte). US Government PIV. FeliCa IDm 2. MultiCLASS 13.56 MHz contactless and 125kHz Proximity card reader. a. The reader shall support all HID Proximity formats, including Corporate 1000. b. The reader shall encrypt all 13.56MHz RF data transmission between the smart card and reader using industry standard encryption techniques and advanced key management. c. The reader shall be compatible with ISO 15693 – read only; 2k bit (256 Byte), 16k bit (2k Byte) and 32k bit (4k Byte); ISO 14443A – read only; MIFARE and DESFire (serial number). ISO 14443B – read only; 2k bit (256 Byte) and 16k bit (2K Byte). US Government PIV. FeliCa IDm

D. The stand alone network door controller shall provide a complete, fully featured access control hardware and firmware infrastructure with an intuitive embedded user interface and will require NO additional software.

B/A #09100194 16720-20 E. The stand alone network door controller shall communicate with a network client using an embedded web user interface over Ethernet or Internet; The embedded user interface shall be accessible via Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher and Mozilla Firefox 2.0 and will require NO additional ActiveX controls, Java Client, or other browser add-on applications.

F. The stand alone network door controller embedded user interface shall present, and give the user control of, access door commands including door lock/unlock, lock pulse, alarm acknowledge, door status, alarms and recent events from all screens contained in the user interface.

G. The stand alone network door controller embedded user interface shall be capable of managing a minimum of 1000 cardholders/credentials.

H. The stand alone network door controller embedded user interface shall be capable of managing a minimum of 8 schedules and 3 intervals each day of the week including holidays.

I. The stand alone network door controller embedded user interface shall provide standardized report generation of: People, Cards/PINs, Events, Schedules, Special Days and export data as an XML file.

J. The stand alone network door controller embedded user interface shall provide an easy to use backup and restore function which will allow for all system data to be backed up to a connected PC. The same utility shall allow the user to restore all system data from a connected PC.

K. The stand alone network door controller embedded user interface shall be capable of displaying in the following languages: English, French, German, Spanish (International), Russian, Portuguese (Brazilian), Italian, Chinese (Simplified), Japanese, Korean and Hindi.

L. The stand alone network door controller shall provide full distributed processing of all access control functions. The unit shall provide fully functional stand-alone operation when not actively managed or monitored through the embedded user interface; performing all access decisions and event logging. Upon connection with the web client, the stand alone network door controller or network controller/reader shall display all buffered off-line transactions (minimum of 5,000) through the embedded user interface.

M. The stand alone network door controller shall incorporate a 32-bit 100 MHz RISC processor running the Linux operating system. The unit shall be capable of remote upgrade (via Windows® DLL, or the direct-communication OPIN® API) to a host controller configuration for integration to host-based access control applications.

B/A #09100194 16720-21 N. The stand alone network door controller shall not be a proprietary product of a manufacturer of host access control software applications, and must have the ability to migrate to an alternative manufacturer’s host access control software application by remote reconfiguration or firmware upgrade and without intervention from the original controller manufacturer.

O. The stand alone network door controller shall provide configuration operations through the embedded user interface. The configuration operations shall include: Network settings, Door parameters, Date and Time and Installer Information.

P. The stand alone network door controller shall provide on-board Flash memory to allow program updates to be downloaded directly via the network. The network door controller shall provide the following minimum memory: 1. 8 MB on-board Flash memory 2. 32 MB SDRAM 3. 256k SRAM

Q. The stand alone network door controller shall provide the following certifications: 1. UL 294 Listed Access Control System Units 2. CSA 205 (Canada) 3. FCC Class A Verification 4. EMC for Canada, EU (CE Mark), Australia (C-Tick Mark), New Zealand, Japan 5. EN 50130-4 Access Control Systems Immunity for the EU (CE Mark)

R. The stand alone network door controller shall meet the following physical specifications: 1. (Dimensions: 3.3” W x 4.8” H x 1.5” D (83.8 mm x 121.9 mm x 36.3 mm) 2. Weight: 6.8 oz (.195 kg) 3. Cover Material – UL94 Polycarbonate 4. Power Requirements – 250-1000 mA @ 12 VDC provided either through : a. 12 – 16 VDC linear Power Supply b. 802.3af compliant Power Over Ethernet (POE) device 5. Temperature – 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C) 6. Humidity – 5% to 95% relative, non-condensing 7. Visual Indicators a. System Activity LED b. Network Activity LED 8. Communication ports and connectors: a. RJ-45 connector for Ethernet TCP/IP (10/100baseT) b. Wiegand/Clock-and-Data reader data port c. RS-232 port for optional modem or serial communications after upgrade to host controller configuration d. Door position input with programmable End of Line supervisory capability up to 6K Ohm.

B/A #09100194 16720-22 e. Request to exit (REX) input with programmable End of Line supervisory capability up to 6K Ohm. f. Non-latching alarm annunciation output relay g. Unpowered (Dry) contact rated 2A @ 30VDC h. Powered (Wet) contact rated for up to 700 mA @ 12VDC i. Note: The 700 mA is shared between two relays j. 12VDC Power input k. Tamper input (Can have a built-in additional external tamper) l. AC Power Fail input (Can be configured for general purpose use, after upgrade to host controller configuration) m. Battery fail input (Can be configured for general purpose use after upgrade to host controller configuration) 9. Cable Distances: a. TCP/IP – 328 feet (100m) using CAT 5 cable b. Wiegand – 500 feet using 9-conductor stranded, overall shield 22 AWG cable (Alpha 1299C) c. Input circuits – 500 feet using 2-conductor shielded 22AWG cable (Alpha 1292C) or 18AWG cable (Alpha 2421C) d. Output circuits – 500 feet using 2-conductor 22AWG cable (Alpha 1172C) or 18AWG cable (Alpha 1897C) e. RS-232 – 50 feet using 9-conductor stranded 22AWG cable (Alpha 1299C or Alpha 58119)

S. The stand alone network door controller shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for 18 months.

T. The stand alone network controller/reader shall be an HID p/n 83120B Edge Reader Solo ESR40 or p/n 83125B Edge Reader Solo ESRP40.

2.5 REQUEST TO EXIT SENSOR

A. Shall be Securitron XMS or equivalent.

2.6 DOOR POSITION SENSOR

A. Shall be General Electric model 1076C or equivalent.

2.7 DOOR STRIKES

A. To be provided by door hardware contractor.

2.8 NETWORK INDOOR CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS – RUGGED MINIDOME

A. Manufacturers 1. Axis 2. Bosch

B/A #09100194 16720-23 3. Panasonic 4. Pelco 5. Sony 6. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. General requirements: 1. The camera shall be network enabled minidome color camera. 2. The camera shall have an analog video output producing 480 TV lines of horizontal resolution. 3. Network interface shall be via an 8-pin RJ-45 connector, 10 Base T /100 Base TX Ethernet. 4. The camera shall utilize JPEG and MPEG-4 compression. 5. The camera shall incorporate a built-in web server, such that standard web browser Internet Explorer can be used to view the camera view without need for special viewer software. 6. The camera shall be capable of supporting up to 20 users in the JPEG format or 10 users in the MPEG 4 format simultaneously over the network 7. There shall be up to 4 user level settings. 8. Maximum frame rate capability of the camera over the local area network is up to 18 frames per second on 640 X 480 capture size on JPEG and 15 frames per second on MPEG 4. 9. The camera shall have a through put of : MPEG-4 JPEG 640 x 480 @ 15 fps 640 x 480 @ 18 fps, 320 x 240 @ 30 fps 320 x 240 @ 30 fps, 10. Image sizes shall be user selectable for the following: MPEG-4 JPEG 640 x 480 640 x 480 320 x 240 320 x 240 160 x 120 160 x 120 11. The camera shall in corporate a CCD iris function, which varies the automatic shutter automatically between the ranges of 1/60 to 1/100,000 sec. 12. The camera shall have a 6 pin I/O interface located on rear of the base. There shall be an alarm input port, and 2 Alarm/relay output ports. The Alarm input port shall be opto-isolated. 13. The camera shall support the following Network protocols: TCP/IP, DNS, RTCP, UDP, RTP, ARP, HTTP, ICMP, SMTP, FTP, DHCP, NTP and SNMP (MIB2). Network security shall be via Password (basic authentication) and IP filtering. 14. The camera shall have both FTP client and server capabilities. 15. The camera shall have user configurable port settings. 16. The camera shall be capable of dynamic IP address change notification. 17. The camera shall be capable limiting the bandwidth on all ports.

B/A #09100194 16720-24 18. The camera shall have an internal image memory size of 8MB for alarm buffering. 19. The camera shall be capable of pre and post alarm buffering. 20. The camera shall be capable of specifying up to 10 users inclusive of administrator, and allow each user to have one of four levels of access. 21. Camera shall be Sony SNC-DF70 or equal.

C. Camera lens specifications: 1. The camera shall have a lens supplied as standard accessory .the lens shall be a 3.0 to 8mm DC type auto iris lens, F=1.0 2. The camera shall have a minimum object distance shall be 0.2m (0.66ft). 3. The camera optical system shall permit the camera to cover a large angle of view from 66.6° to 27° Horizontal by 49.3° to 20.2° Vertical. 4. The camera lens zooms and focus levers shall have locking screws.

D. Video-Electrical Requirements 1. The power connection shall be by means screw down mini terminals connector. 2. The camera scanning system shall be 525 lines, 60 fieldes/30 frames, and 2:1 interlace. 3. The video output of the camera shall meet the EIA/NTSC standard. 4. The color mini dome camera shall require a minimum scene illumination of: 0.9 lux at F1.0, @ 89.9% reflectance (50 IRE, AGC ON, Turbo On) in color mode; and 0.2 lux at F1.0, 89.9% reflectance (50 IRE, AGC ON, Turbo On) in B/W mode. 5. The camera synchronization shall be Internal. 6. The camera shall be have normal AGC of 18dB, and an additional 6dB for turbo AGC for a total range of 24dB. 7. The composite video output shall be 1.0 V peak to peak @ 75 ohms. 8. The video signal to noise ratio shall be 50dB (Normal AGC, Weight ON). 9. The camera shall employ a center weighted backlight compensation system, and shall be dip switch on/off selectable. 10. The camera shall be capable of being externally triggered to change from color to b/w modes. The cameras shall also be capable of switching between color and b/w modes automatically. 11. The camera shall be capable of auto switchover from color to b/w and vice versa, shall be selectable for short, or long via dip switch selection. 12. The camera shall have a continuously variable shuttering capability, a feature called CCD Iris mode. CCD iris mode shall be from 1/60 to 1/100,000 sec, and shall be used only with manual iris, CS mount lenses. 13. The camera shall employ Auto Tracking White (ATW) balance. 14. The Auto tracking white (ATW) balance range shall be 2,000 degrees Kelvin to 10,000 degrees Kelvin.

E. Audio requirements:

B/A #09100194 16720-25 1. The camera shall support audio. Audio compression standards supported shall be G.711 (64kbps) & G.726 (40, 32, 24, 16Kbps). 2. The camera shall also support an external microphone. External microphone connectivity shall be via a single channel stereo type mini- jack, supporting 2.4 VDC power at 4.7 ohm external microphone input. 3. The camera shall support an external active speaker via a mini-jack. Audio output shall be a maximum level of 1Vrms. 4. The camera shall be capable of bi-direction audio transmission.

F. Mechanical requirements: 1. SNC-DF70N camera lens mount shall be CS type. 2. The camera shall be a CS mount type, IP66 rated, impact resistant, in a minidome type configuration. 3. The cameras main body shall be constructed of aluminum die cast, and the lower clear dome shall be 3mm polycarbonate. 4. The camera body shall have ¾” thread for direct connection with a conduit pipe, located on the rear of the camera, as well as on the side of the main body. A removable threaded cap shall be used to seal the unused conduit access. 5. The camera shall support 1 optically isolated alarm or sensor input, and 2 relay outputs via a pin push type spring lock connector. 6. Relay outputs shall be rated at 1 Amp at less than 24V DC 7. Video output connector from the camera shall be a two (2) pin mini – jack screw down connector to a pigtail BNC type of connector. 8. The CCD/lens combination shall be user settable at ± 150 degrees Pan, and 9. Tilt of ±75 degrees, lens leveling rotation of ±150 degrees.

G. Power Requirements 1. The camera power requirements shall be AC 24 V 50/60 Hz or DC12V. 2. The camera shall support power over ethernet (PoE) 802.3af standard.

H. Environmental Requirements 1. The operating temperature shall be 14°F to 122°F (-10°C to +50°C) 2. Storage temperature shall be within -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to +60°C)

I. System Requirements 1. Operating system requirements: Microsoft Windows 2000/XP. 2. Minimum processor requirements: Pentium III, 1 GHz or higher. 3. Minimum memory requirements : 256MB RAM 4. Web browser requirements: shall be Internet Explorer version 5.5 or 6.0.

J. Supplied Accessories 1. CD ROM containing User guide & setup program (1) 2. Installation manual (1)

B/A #09100194 16720-26 3. Wire rope (1) 4. Installation screws (2) 5. Dome cover (1) 6. Mini power connector 7. Warranty card 8. Provide flush mount kit were required

K. Spares 1. Contractor shall provide ten (1) spare cameras including housing and accessories.

2.9 NETWORK EXTERIOR CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturers 1. Axis 2. Bosch 3. Panasonic 4. Pelco 5. Sony 6. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. General requirements: 1. The camera shall be network enabled with high resolution pan/tilt/zoom. 2. The camera shall have an analog video output producing 480 TV lines of horizontal resolution. 3. The camera shall have a network interface via an 8-pin RJ-45 connector, 10 Base T /100 Base TX Ethernet. 4. The camera shall utilize JPEG and MPEG-4 compression. Compression levels are user selectable in 5 levels of compression ratios. 5. The camera shall incorporate a built-in web server, such that standard web browser Internet Explorer can be used to view the camera view without need for special viewer software. 6. The camera shall be capable of supporting up to 20 users in the JPEG format or 10 users in the MPEG 4 format simultaneously over the network. 7. There shall be up to 4 user level settings. 8. The maximum frame rate capability of the camera over the LAN shall be up to 30 frames per second on MJPEG or MPEG 4 at a capture size of QVGA. 9. The camera shall have the capability of selecting either JPEG or MPEG-4 compression formats. 10. The camera shall be capable of compressing MPEG-4 and JPEG at: MPEG-4 JPEG 640 x 480 @ 15 fps 640 x 480 @ 18 fps, 320 x 240 @ 30 fps 320 x 240 @ 30 fps,

B/A #09100194 16720-27 11. Image sizes are user selectable for the following: MPEG-4 JPEG 640 x 480 640 x 480 320 x 240 320 x 240 160 x 120 160 x 120 12. The camera shall have a minimum slow shutter setting shall be 1/60 second, and a maximum of 1/100,000 sec. 13. The camera shall support the following Network protocols: TCP/IP, DNS, RTCP, UDP, RTP, ARP, HTTP, ICMP, SMTP, FTP, DHCP, NTP and SNMP (MIB2). Network security shall be via Password (basic authentication) and IP filtering. 14. The camera shall have both FTP client and server capabilities. 15. The camera shall have user configurable port settings. 16. The camera shall be capable of dynamic IP address change notification. It shall accomplish this via an email to a specified address when its IP address changes. 17. The camera shall be capable of limiting the bandwidth on all ports from 64kbps to 2048 mbps. 18. The camera shall have an internal image memory size of 8MB for alarm buffering. 19. The camera shall be capable of pre and post alarm buffering. 20. The camera shall be capable of adaptive control and also multicast capabilities. 21. The camera shall be capable of specifying up to 10 users inclusive of administrator, and allow each user to have one of four levels of access. 22. Camera shall be Sony SNC-RX570N or equal.

C. Camera lens specifications: 1. The camera lens shall have 18x optical zoom and 12x digital zoom capability. 2. The camera lens shall be auto-focus type, but can be switched to manual, which can be set by the administrator 3. The camera shall have minimum object distance of 290mm (wide) and 800mm (tele) 4. The camera shall have a F Number of F= 1.4 (wide) F 3.0 (tele) 5. The camera shall have a focal length of F= 4.1 – 73.8mm 6. The camera shall be capable of auto switchover from color (day-mode) to b/w (night- mode) and vice versa, the transfer shall be selectable for long or short, in order to nullify any artificial lighting changes. 7. The camera shall require a minimum scene illumination of: a. Color: 0.71 lux at f1.4 (50 IRE, shutter at 1/60 sec.) b. B&W: 0.061 lux at F1.4 (50 IRE, shutter at 1/60 sec.) c. Color: 0.51 lux at f1.4 (50 IRE, shutter at 1/4 sec.) d. B&W: 0.011 lux at F1.4 (50 IRE, shutter at 1/4sec.)

B/A #09100194 16720-28 D. Video-Electrical Requirements 1. The power connection shall be by means of screw down mini terminals connector. 2. The scanning system shall be 470 lines, 60 fieldes/30 frames, 2:1 interlace. 3. The video output of the camera shall meet the EIA/NTSC standard. 4. Camera synchronization shall be internal. 5. The camera shall have normal AGC of 18dB, and an additional 6dB for Turbo AGC for a total range of 24dB. 6. The composite video output shall be 1.0 V peak to peak @ 75 ohms. 7. The video signal to noise ratio shall be more than 50dB (Normal AGC, Weight ON). 8. White balance shall be Auto, Indoor 1, Indoor 2, Outdoor, One push AWB. 9. The camera shall employ a center weighted backlight compensation system, and shall be selectable for on/off. 10. The camera shall be capable of being externally triggered to change from color to b/w modes. The cameras shall also be capable of switching between color and b/w modes automatically. 11. The camera shall employ Auto Tracking White (ATW) balance. 12. The Auto tracking white (ATW) balance range shall be 2,000 degrees Kelvin to 10,000 degrees Kelvin. 13. The camera shall come with a built-in compact flash (CF) slot. The compact flash slot can be utilized for image storage. 14. The camera shall utilize an SNCA-CFW1 for wireless data transfer .This (CF) type card shall IEEE 802.11b compliant.

E. Audio requirements: 1. The camera shall support audio. Audio compression standards supported shall be G.711 (64kbps) & G.726 (40, 32, 24, 16Kbps). 2. The camera shall also support an external microphone in lieu of the built- in microphone. External microphone connectivity shall be via a single channel stereo type mini- jack, supporting 2.4 VDC power at 4.7 ohm external microphone input.

F. Mechanical requirements: 1. The camera shall have built in RS232 ports at rear of unit 2. The camera shall have a 12 pin I/O interface located on rear of the base. 3. There shall be two (2) alarm input port, and two (2) Alarm/relay output 4. Ports. The alarm input port shall be opto-isolated. a. Relay outputs shall be rated at 1 Amp at less than 24V DC 5. The analog video output from the camera shall be a BNC type of connector.

G. Power Requirements 1. The camera shall use an input power voltage of either AC24V or DC12V.

B/A #09100194 16720-29 2. The camera power requirements shall be AC24 V 50/60 Hz or DC12V.

H. Environmental Requirements 1. The operating temperature shall be 14°F to 122°F (0°C to +40°C) 2. Storage temperature shall be within -4°F to 140°F (-20°C to +60°C)

J. Supplied Accessories 1. CD ROM containing User guide & setup program (1) 2. Installation manual (1) 3. Warranty card

K. Outdoor Housing 1. Housing shall be a vandal resistant dome. 2. Housing shall have a clear dome. 3. Housing shall include a heater and blower. 4. Include mounting hardware to mount to pole. 5. Include transformer. 6. Include accessories and cable connectors as required.

L. Outdoor Accessories 1. Furnish and install brackets and accessories to mount exterior fixtures to building or pole.

M. Spares 1. Contractor shall provide one (1) spare camera including housing and accessories.

2.10 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Provide wire and cable in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B/A #09100194 16720-30 B. Verify surfaces to receive devices are ready for installation.

3.2 EXISTING WORK

A. Remove exposed abandoned intrusion detection wiring, including abandoned wiring above accessible ceiling finishes.

B. Disconnect and remove abandoned intrusion detection equipment.

C. Maintain access to existing intrusion detection equipment and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.

D. Extend existing intrusion detection installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install 16 AWG minimum size conductors for detection and signal circuit conductors. Install wiring in conduit to cable tray.

C. Make conduit and wiring connections to door hardware devices.

D. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 16077.

E. Ground and bond equipment and circuits in accordance with Section 16060.

F. Install one category 6 cable to each IP camera, to be connected to the buildings local area network.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements and 01700 - Execution Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.5 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturer’s field services.

B. Furnish services of technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, system testing, and Owner training.

B/A #09100194 16720-31 3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Furnish 16 hours of instruction each for two persons, to be conducted at project site with manufacturer's representative.

END OF SECTION

B/A #09100194 16720-32 SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes an addressable microprocessor-based fire alarm system with initialing devices, notification appliances, monitoring and control devices, and auxiliary fire alarm equipment and power and signal wire and cable.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Door closers, electric locks, electric releases. 2. Section 13930 - Wet-Pipe Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Flow detection and alarm devices. 3. Section 13975 - Standpipes and Hoses: Flow detection and alarm devices. 4. Section 15820 - Duct Accessories: Smoke dampers. 5. Section 15910 – Direct Digital Controls. 6. Section 16123 - Building Wire and Cable. 7. Section 17320 - Panic, Guard Tour And Miscellaneous Systems

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code. 2. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 1996. 3. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code 2003 edition

B. Michigan Building Code: 1. 2003 Edition

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Fire Alarm System: NFPA 72, automatic addressable local fire alarm system with connections to municipal system with connections to central station.

B. Software: The fire alarm system shall allow for loading and editing instructions and operating sequences as necessary. The system shall be capable of on-site programming to accommodate system expansion and facilitate changes in operation. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control unit. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory.

B/A#09100194 16721-1 C. History Logs: The system shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history. A separate alarm and trouble log shall be provided.

D. Recording of Events: Record all alarm, supervisory, and trouble events by means of system printer. The printout shall include the type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) the device identification, date and time of the occurrence. The printout differentiates alarm signals from all other printed indications.

E. Wiring/Signal Transmission: 1. Transmission shall be addressable signal transmission, dedicated to fire alarm service only. 2. System connections for initiating circuits and notification appliance circuits shall be Class B. 3. Circuit Supervision: Circuit faults shall be indicated by a trouble signal at the FACP. Provide a distinctive indicating audible tone and alphanumeric annunciation.

F. Remote Access: 1. FACP shall have the capability to provide Remote Access through a Dial- Up Service Modem using the public switched telephone system of a private switched telephone system. 2. A personal computer or technician’s laptop, configured with terminal emulation software shall have the ability to access the FACP for diagnostics, maintenance reporting and information gathering.

G. Required Functions: The following are required system functions and operating features: 1. Priority of Signals: Alarm events have highest priority. Subsequent alarm events are queued in the order received and do not affect existing alarm conditions. Supervisory and Trouble events have second-, and third-level priority respectively. Signals of a higher-level priority take precedence over signals of lower priority even though the lower-priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all events regardless of priority or order received. 2. Noninterfering: The activation of an addressable device does not prevent the receipt of signals from subsequent activations. 3. Transmission to Central Control Security Room: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to Central Control Security Room via the building security system. 4. Annunciation: Operation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be annunciated at the FACP indicating the location and type of device. 5. General Alarm: A system general alarm shall include: a. Indication of alarm condition at the FACP. b. Identification of the device that is the source of the alarm at the FACP.

B/A#09100194 16721-2 c. Operation of audible and visible notification devices throughout the building until silenced at FACP. d. Closing doors normally held open by magnetic door holders. e. Unlocking designated doors. f. Shutting down supply and return fans serving zone where alarm is initiated. g. Closing smoke dampers on system serving zone where alarm is initiated. h. Initiation of smoke control sequence through the building temperature control system. (Smoke evacuation system) 6. Supervisory Operations: Upon activation of a supervisory device such as fire pump power failure, low air pressure switch, and tamper switch, the system shall operate as follows: a. Activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED at the control unit and the graphic annunciator. b. Pressing the Supervisory Acknowledge Key will silence the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the Supervisory LED "on" indicating off-normal condition. c. Record the event in the FACP historical log. d. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote central station. 7. Restoring the condition shall cause the Supervisory LED restore system to normal. 8. Alarm Silencing: If the “Alarm Silence” button is pressed, all audible and visible alarm signals shall cease operation. 9. System Reset a. The “System Reset” button shall be used to return the system to its normal state. Display messages shall provide operator assurance of the sequential steps (“IN PROGRESS”, “RESET COMPLETED”) as they occur. 10. Drill: A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the notification appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated. 11. WALKTEST: The actuation of the “enable one person test” program at the control unit shall activate the “One Person Testing” mode of the system as follows: a. The city circuit connection shall be bypassed for the testing group. b. Control relay functions associated to the testing group shall be bypassed. c. The control unit shall indicate a trouble condition. d. The alarm activation of any initiation device in the testing group shall cause the audible notification appliances to sound a code to identify the device. e. The unit shall automatically reset itself after signaling is complete. f. Any momentary opening of an initiating or notification appliance circuit wiring shall cause the audible signals to sound for 4 seconds indicating the trouble condition.

B/A#09100194 16721-3 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate system wiring diagram showing each device and wiring connection; indicate annunciator layout, and design calculations. Alternate or as-equal products submitted under this contract must provide a detailed line-by-line comparison of how the submitted product meets, exceeds, or does not comply with this specification. 2. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer. 3. Operating instructions for FACP. 4. Footcandle levels for each room for proper coverage. 5. Provide devices in every room. 6. Contractor shall be responsible for complete coverage of entire building. If devices are not shown the Contractor is responsible for providing them.

C. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified field testing and inspection. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate activities on site, adverse findings, and recommendations.

E. Submission to Authority Having Jurisdiction: In addition to routine submission of the above material, make an identical submission to the authority having jurisdiction. Include copies of shop drawings as required to depict component locations to facilitate review. Upon receipt of comments from the Authority, make resubmissions if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. Submission shall be made to both the state and the city for review

1.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: The equipment and service described in this specification are generic. Acceptable manufactures are: 1. Edwards Systems Technologies 2. Simplex 3. National Time and Signal

B. Being listed as an acceptable Manufacturer in no way relieves obligation to provide all equipment and features in accordance with these specifications.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A factory-authorized installer is to perform the work of this section.

B/A#09100194 16721-4 B. Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a single fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the “UL” label.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of fire alarm equipment.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s standard operating and maintenance instructions.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of project.

B. Installer: Certified fire alarm installer with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm equipment for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish 2 extra keys of each type.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish three of each type of automatic smoke detector without base.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)

A. General: Comply with UL 864, "Control Units for Fire-Protective Signaling Systems."

B. The following FACP hardware shall be provided: 1. Power Limited base panel with beige cabinet and door, 120 VAC input power. 2. 800 Addressable point capacity (inputs or outputs). 3. Maximum of 144 points of annunciation where one (1) point of annunciation equals: LED output or 1 switch input on a 24 Point I/O module.

B/A#09100194 16721-5 4. Four (4) Class B or A (Style Y/Z) Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC; rated 2A @ 24VDC, resistive); 5. Two form “C” Auxiliary Output Circuits (rated 2A @ 24VDC, resistive), operation is programmable for trouble, alarm, supervisory of other fire response functions 6. Dual Municipal City Circuit Connection with disconnects switches for connection to either 24VDC Remote Station (reverse polarity) or local energy. 7. The FACP shall support two (2) RS-232-C ports. 8. Supervised serial communication channel for control and monitoring of remotely located LCD annunciators and I/O panels. 9. Security System Interface: Provide Modbus interface for communication to security automation system. 10. Building Management System: Provide Modbus interface for smoke evacuation system control.

C. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange unit so all operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the system is performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required to form a complete control unit, provide exactly matching modular unit enclosures.

D. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Panel shall include an 80 character LCD display to indicate alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and shall include a keypad for use in entering and executing control commands.

2.2 FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL (FAAP)

A. Product Description: Supervised remote annunciator including audible and visual indication of fire alarm by zone, and audible and visual indication of system trouble.

B. Mounting: Factory mounted in flush wall-mounted enclosure.

2.3 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL PULL STATIONS

A. Description: Addressable Double-action type, red LEXAN or metal, and finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions of contrasting color. Station will mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common with the control units.

2.4 VOICE EVACUATION CONTROL PANEL

A. Provide one-way voice communication and tone generating capabilities.

B. A central audio control panel shall be provided for the necessary alarm message/tone generation, main and remote microphone connections, music

B/A#09100194 16721-6 inputs and mixer/pre-amplifier circuits. Continuous supervision shall be provided. Audio outputs shall have individual gain control.

C. A hand-held, push-to-talk microphone shall be provided recessed within a protective panel-mounted enclosure. The microphone shall be a dynamic communication type with a frequency range of 200 Hz to 4000 Hz and shall be equipped with a self-winding five-foot coiled cable. An LED indicator shall be provided to indicate microphone push-to-talk button has been pressed and speaker circuits are ready for transmission. Microphone shall be supervised from disconnection.

D. An audio control switch module shall be furnished to provide manual control of audio functions. These switches and associated LED indicators shall be supervised from disarrangement or failure.

E. Audio power amplifiers shall be furnished with self-contained filtered 24VDC power supply, transformer and, amplifier monitor circuits. Amplifiers shall provide a 25 VRMS output with a frequency response of 120Hz to 12,000Hz. Provide a sufficient quantity of amplifiers to operate all system speakers simultaneously plus ten (10%) percent space capacity.

F. Tones Digitized tones for alarm or auxiliary requirements shall be available. Tone requirements are as follows: Slow whoop, wail, march time beep, continuous horn, stutter, chime, coded horn, hi/lo, and steady tones of specified frequency. Tone sequence (pre-announce, after message, etc.) shall be determined by the facility. Steady tones and horn shall be available in temporal code pattern.

G. A pre-recorded digitized voice message capability shall be provided for automatic transmission to building occupants during alarm conditions. Four (4) messages shall be provided, one for alarm, one for testing, one for severe weather conditions, and one for all clear. The all clear messages shall be for each condition, e.g., "all clear fire alarm condition", "all clear severe weather condition"; blanket all clear statements are not acceptable. Provide the alarm, severe weather, and all clear messages in English. Message generation shall be software derived with no mechanical interface permitted. System shall be capable of generating a custom message of up to four minutes in length. A self-contained speaker will provide testing of the message(s) without disturbing the occupants of the facility.

H. Voice control panel shall report trouble and supervisory conditions to the fire alarm control panel and the network control panel. These conditions shall be reported by specific type and occurrence; summary indications are not to be utilized.

2.5 SMOKE SENSORS

A. General: Comply with UL 268, "Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." Include the following features:

B/A#09100194 16721-7 1. Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification. 2. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC, nominal. 3. Self-Restoring: Sensors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore normal operation. 4. Plug-In Arrangement: Sensor and associated electronic components are mounted in a module that connects to a fixed base with a twist-locking plug connection. 5. The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI. 6. Addressability: Sensors include a communication transmitter and receiver in the mounting base having a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP. 7. Monitoring: FACP shall individually monitor sensors for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and shall individually adjust for sensitivity. The control unit shall determine the condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to the stored values. 8. Environmental Compensation: The FACP shall maintain a moving average of the sensor’s smoke chamber value to automatically compensate for dust, dirt, and other conditions that could affect detection operations. 9. Programmable Sensitivity: Photoelectric Smoke Sensors shall have 7 sensitivity levels ranging from 0.2% to 3.7%, programmed and monitored from the FACP. 10. Sensitivity Testing Reports: The FACP shall provide sensor reports that meet NFPA 72 calibrated test method requirements. The reports shall be viewed on a CRT Display or printed for annual recording and logging of the calibration maintenance schedule. 11. The FACP shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleaning. The system shall provide a means to indicate that a sensor requires cleaning. When a sensor’s average value reaches a predetermined value, (3) progressive levels of reporting are provided. The first level shall indicate that a sensor is close to a trouble reporting condition and will be indicated on the FACP as “ALMOST DIRTY.” This condition provides a means to alert maintenance staff of a dirty sensor without creating a trouble in the system. If this indicator is ignored, a second level “DIRTY SENSOR” condition shall be indicated at the FACP and subsequently a system trouble is reported [to the Central Monitoring Station]. The sensor base LED shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. The “DIRTY SENSOR” condition shall not affect the sensitivity level required to alarm the sensor. If a “DIRTY SENSOR” is left unattended, and its average value increases to a third predetermined value, an “EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR” trouble condition shall be indicated at the control unit. 12. The FACP shall continuously perform an automatic self-test on each sensor, which will check sensor electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a “SELF TEST ABNORMAL” trouble condition.

B/A#09100194 16721-8 B. Type: Smoke sensors shall be of the photoelectric type.

C. Duct Smoke Sensor: Photoelectric type, with sampling tube of design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size and installation conditions where applied. 1. The Duct Housing shall provide a supervised relay driver circuit for driving up to 15 relays with a single “Form C” contact rated at 7A@ 28VDC or 10A@ 120VAC. This auxiliary relay output shall be fully programmable.

D. Provide duct smoke sensors with appropriate length sampling tube

E. Resident smoke detectors shall include audio as well as visual devices for proper alerting of residents during and emergency situation.

2.6 HEAT SENSORS

A. Thermal Sensor: Combination fixed-temperature and rate-of-rise unit with plug-in base and alarm indication lamp; 135-deg F fixed-temperature setting except as indicated.

B. Thermal sensor shall be of the epoxy encapsulated electronic design. It shall be thermistor-based, rate-compensated, self-restoring and shall not be affected by thermal lag. Thermal sensor shall be an analog device.

C. Sensor shall have the capability to be programmed as a utility monitoring device to monitor for temperature extremes in the range from 32-deg F to 155-deg F.

2.7 ALARM-NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Visible/Only: Strobe shall be listed to UL 1971. The V/O shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. The V/O enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang or 4” square electrical box, without the use of special adapters or trim rings. V/O appliances shall be provided with different minimum flash intensities of 15cd, 75cd and 110cd. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific Visible/Only appliance.

B. Audible/Visible: Combination Audible/Visible (A/V) Notification Appliances shall be listed to UL 1971 and UL 464. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific strobe. The speaker shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA @ 24VDC. The audible/visible enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang or 4” square electrical box, without the use of special adapters or trim rings.

B/A#09100194 16721-9 2.8 DUCT-MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR

A. Product Description: NFPA 72, photoelectric type with the following features: 1. Auxiliary SPDT relay contact. 2. Key-operated normal-reset-test switch. 3. Duct sampling tubes extending width of duct. 4. Visual indication of detector actuation. 5. Duct-mounted housing.

B. Furnish with detector and power supply and signal circuits.

2.9 DOOR RELEASE

A. Product Description: Magnetic door holder with integral diodes to reduce buzzing.

B. Coil voltage: 24 VDC.

2.10 ADDRESSABLE CIRCUIT INTERFACE MODULES

A. Addressable Circuit Interface Modules: Arrange to monitor one or more system components that are not otherwise equipped for addressable communication. Modules shall be used for monitoring of waterflow, valve tamper, non- addressable devices, FM200/Ansal Systems and for smoke control of evacuation indicating appliances and AHU systems.

2.11 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY

A. General: Components include battery, charger, and an automatic transfer switch.

B. Battery: Sealed lead-acid type. Provide sufficient capacity to operate the complete alarm system in normal or supervisory (non-alarm) mode for a period of 24 hours. Following this period of operation on battery power, the battery shall have sufficient capacity to operate all components of the system, including all alarm indicating devices in alarm or supervisory mode for a period of 5 minutes.

2.12 FIRE SUPPRESSION MONITORING

A. Water flow: Activation of a water flow switch shall initiate general alarm operations.

B. Sprinkler valve tamper switches: The activation of any valve tamper switch shall activate system supervisory operations.

2.13 POWER REQUIREMENTS

A. The control unit shall receive 120 VAC power via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit.

B/A#09100194 16721-10 B. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with 5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to battery standby upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic.

C. The system shall support 100% of addressable devices & 20% for future additional devices in alarm or operated at the same time, under both primary (AC) and secondary (battery) power conditions.

2.14 ACCESSORIES

A. Lexan Covers (as noted on the drawings): The covers are to be a molded polycarbonate cover to protect against breakage and damage. The covers are to be clear in color and have an additional power source (9volt DC alkaline Batter) for a localized alarm. Provide covers on pull stations and audio/visual devices as shown on the floor plans.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify products and systems receiving devices are ready for installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install system components and all associated devices in accordance with applicable NFPA Standards and manufacturer’s.

B. Install 14 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection and signal circuit conductors in Plenum rated cable.

C. All conduit wiring shall be installed in conduit.

D. Mount end-of-line device in box with last device or separate box adjacent to last device in circuit.

E. Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds pulling force.

F. Connect conduit and wire to door release devices, sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire suppression system control panels, duct smoke detectors, elevator controllers and Security system for override.

G. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72.

B/A#09100194 16721-11 H. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 16075.

I. Ground and bond fire alarm equipment and circuits in accordance with Section 16060.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services.

B. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements in order to obtain a certificate of occupancy.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.

D. Pretesting: Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved.

E. Final Test Notice: Provide a 10-day minimum notice in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing.

F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies with applicable standards.

3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturer’s field services.

B. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, and system testing.

C. Include two (2) days of additional programming of the smoke purge system to insurance any revisions or changes requested by the state or city fire Marshall after they have reviewed the system and sequence of operations.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Furnish minimum of 10 hours of instruction each for four persons, to be conducted at project site with manufacturer's representative. 1. Training shall be provided to both the owner and the City Fire Marshall on two different days.

B. Schedule training with owner at least seven days in advance.

B/A#09100194 16721-12 END OF SECTION

B/A#09100194 16721-13